design criteria facility std manual 8-15-97

UNIVERSITY OF MARYLAND COLLEGE PARK

DESIGN CRITERIA/FACILITY STANDARDS MANUAL

DATE: August 15, 1997 (REVISED)

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 7.15.97)

FORWARD (6.15.97)

PURPOSE (11.15.96)

PROCESS (7.15.97)

1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND INSTRUCTIONS TO THE A/E

• Building Goals and Design Principles (7.15.97)A. Building GoalsB. Design Principles• Building Services and Preventive Maintenance SpaceRequirements (11.15.96)A. Housekeeping Zone ClosetsB. Housekeeping Central Storage RoomC. Housekeeper's RoomD. Preventive Maintenance ShopE. Preventive Maintenance StorageHousekeeping Zone Closet layout - Plan & ElevationHousekeeping & Maintenance Space Requirements• Codes (4.15.97)• Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S) in Facility Design (7.15.97)A. EH&S Project Development1. Safety Objective2. Program Development3. Design Development4. ConstructionB. EH&S Codes, Regulations, & Standards1. General2. Codes & Regulations3. Regulatory Requirements4. Mandatory CodesC. Contractual Provisions for Reliable EH&S Design1. Environmental Site Assessment2. General Building Ventilation3. Specialized Ventilation4. General Laboratory Ventilation5. Eyewash/Safety Shower Stations6. Laboratory Design for BiosafetyD. Best Management Practice in EH&S1. Institutional Standards of Care in EH&S2. Prohibited Building Materials3. Control of Airborne Health Hazards4. Lead-Based Paint During Building Alterations5. Asbestos in Existing Buildings6. Radon Mitigation7. Guidance Documents• List of Acronyms and Abbreviations (5.1.96) • Maintenance Operation Requirements (4.15.97)

I


• Structural (2.15.97)A. Codes and StandardsB. Loads1. Floor and Roof Loading2. Wind and Snow Load

C. Structural Systems1. Steel Framing systemsa. Unshored Composite Steel Beamsb. Shored Composite Steel Beamsc. Cambered Composite Beams2. Concrete Framing Systemsa. Cast-In-Place Systemsb. Precast Floor Framing Systemsc. Pre-Tensioning and Post Tensioning SystemsD. Stability and Serviceability Antena1. Progressive Collapse2. Vibration of Floor Systems3. Corrosion Protection4. Construction Tolerances5. Protection of Adjoining PropertyE. Attachment of Nonstruccural Elements1. Exterior Cladding2. Partitions3. Ceiling Systems4. Monolitic SystemsF. Furnishings and Equipment1. Fixed Casework and Equipment2. Mechanical and Electrical EquipmentG. Alterations to Existing Buildings and Historic Structures

2. SITEWORK

• Bike Lanes (2.15.97)• Exterior Considerations (General) (8.1.96)• Fire Apparatus Accessibility (8.1.96)A. IntroductionB. PurposeC. ScopeD. Mandatory CodesE. Reference StandardsF. Related GuidelinesWater Service & Fire Hydrants1. Definitions2. Fire Lane Structure3. Fire Lane Design4. Fire Lane Type I - Street5. Fire Lane Type II - Fire Access Road6. Fire Lane Type III - Fire Access Sidewalk7. Fire Lane Type IV - Fire Access Surface

ii


8. Entry Points9. Access Control10. Fire Protection Water Supply11. Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Plans and Temporary Fire Access

• Fire Hydrants and Associated Water Mains (8.1.96)A. ScopeB. Related WorkC. Mandatory Codes and StandardsD. Reference StandardsE. Related GuidelinesF. General DescriptionG. Water ServiceH. ValvesI. Fire HydrantsJ. Construction, Alterations, and Demolition• Irrigation Systems (5.1.96)A. General1. Irrigation Piping2. Main Lines3. Solenoid ValvesB. Drip Irrigation systemC. Spray HeadsD. Medium RotorsE. ControllersF. Small RotorsG. Electric ValvesH. Miscellaneous• Reforestation (11.15.96)• Pavement and Drainage Construction and Parking (2.15.97)• Parking Standards (8.15.97)A. GaragesB. Surface LotsC. Oil/Grit Separators in GaragesSign SpecificationsSign Standard SpecificationsMeter Pole Specifications• Pert Telephone (police Emergency ReportingTelephones) Installation Criteria (4.15.97)• Sanitary Sewer and Water Lines (2.15.97)• Seasonal Issues (8.1.96)• Site Construction Signs (4.15.97)• Site Standards (10.15.96)A. BenchesB. Bike RacksC. Bollards1. Steel Removable/Non-Removable2. Wooden Breakaway3. Pedestrian Bollard and ChainD. Cigarette Urns

iii


E. Concrete Dumpster Pads1. Plan View2. SectionF. Concrete Steps

G. Curbs1. Bituminous Concrete Curb2. 6" and 8" Concrete Curb and Gutter3. 8" Mountable Curb4. 4" Concrete Landscape CurbH. Electric Parking Gates1. Single Gate (out)2. Double Gate (in/out)I. Fencing1. Board-on-BoardJ. HandrailsK. KiosksL. Outdoor Drinking FountainsM. Paving1. Concrete Pavers2. Concrete Walks3. Bituminous Asphalt Paving4. Brick on ConcreteN. Picnic TablesO. Planting Details1. Trees2. ShrubsP. Ramps for Persons with Disabilities (PWD)1. PWD Ramp, Plan View2. PWD Ramp, SectionQ. Security GatesR. Trash ReceptaclesS. Tree Grates• Soil Preparation (11.15.96)• Steam Access Openings• Stormwater Management and Sediment and ErosionControl (4.15.97)• Tree Protection (8.1.96)• Trash Dumpsters/Pads (6.15.97)• Utilities (6.15.97)• Wetlands and Floodplain (4.15.97)

3. CONCRETE

4. MASONRY

5. METALS

6. WOODS AND PLASTICS

iv


7. THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

• Firestopping (8.15.97)Part 1 - General1.01 Scope1.02 Related Work1.03 Requirements1.04 Definitions1.05 System Description1.06 Submittals1.07 Quality Assurance1.08 Delivery, Storage, and Handling1.09 Project Conditions1.10 WarrantyPart 2 - -Products2.01 hrough-Penetration Firestopping of fire-rated Construction2.02 Construction-Gap Firestopping of Fire-rated Construction2.03 Smoke-Stopping at Smoke Partitions2.04 AccessoriesPart 3 - Execution3.01 Examination3.02 Preparation3.03 Installation3.04 Field Quality Control3.05 Adjusting and Cleaning• Joint Sealants• Roofs and Moisture Control (11.15.96)A. GeneralB. Built-Up Roofing Specifications1. Substrate2. Insulation3. Base Flashing4. Finished Surface5. Guarantee6. AccessC. Slate Roofing SystemD. Shingle Roofing system

8. DOORS AND WINDOWS

• Doors and FramesA. DoorsB. Frames• Glass and Glazing• Hardware (5.1.96)A. Mortise LocksetsB. Door ClosersC. Handicapped Automatic Door control ClosersD. Cylinders

v


E. Hardware1. Exit Devices2. Panic bars

3. Door Specifications• Windows

9. FINISHES

• Acoustical Quality Construction (6.15.97)• Ceiling Finishes (6.15.97)• Drywall Construction (6.15.97)• Floor Finishes (6.15.97)A. GeneralB. Interior Concrete FloorC. Resilient TileD. Flex-TuffE. CarpetF. Vinyl Rubber Rolled GoodsG. TerrazzoH. Quarry TileI. Wood FlooringJ. Seamless Flooring• Wall Finishes (6.15.97)

10. SPECIALTIES

• Chalkboards and Bulletins (10.15.96)• Exterior Building Signs (8.1.96)A. Exterior Building Signs (General)B. Raised Letters at Main Entrance• 10522 Fire Extinguishers and Fire Extinguisher Cabinets (10.15.96)Part I - General1.1 Scope of Work1.2 Quality Assurance1.3 SubmittalsPart II - Products2.1 Fire ExtinguishersA. Dry Chemical (ABC)B. Carbon Dioxide (CO2)C. Combustible Metal ("D")D. Dry Chemical ("BC")E. Pressurized Water ("A")F. FFFP Foam ("AB")G. Halon2.2 Fire Extinguisher CabinetsA. Cabinetsfor recessed indoor installationsB. Cabinets for interior & exterior surface mounted locations2.3 Miscellaneous AccessoriesPart III - Execution• Infant Changing Stations (9.15.96)

vi


• Interior Graphics/Signage (11.15.96)A. Interior Room Numbering Standard &

Identification SystemB. Assignment of Room Numbers to New BuildingsC. Assignment of Room Numbers for Renovation ProjectsD. Sign Specifications IllustrationE. Example, Room Numbering System• Mailboxes (5.1.96)• Restroom Requirements (2.15.97)Floors & WallsPartitionsLavatoriesLightingUrinalsWater ClosetsFloor DrainsSanitary Napkin Waste ReceptaclesElectric Hand DryersPaper Towel Dispensers with accompanying IllustrationsToilet Tissue DispensersSoap DispensersMirrors

11. FOOD SERVICE FACILITIES (6.15.97

• INTRODUCTION (6.15.97)• 11400 Food Services Facilities - Food ServiceEquipment(6.15.97)Part I - GENERAL1.01 Summary1.02 Related Sections1.03 Quality Assurance1.04 Submittals1.05 Delivery, Storage and Handling1.06 Project Conditions1.07 Special Project WarrantyPart II - PRODUCTS2.01 Materials2.02 Fabrication of Equipment2.03 Plastic Laminate Casework2.04 Prefabricated Kitchen Equipment2.05 Fire Suppression SystemPart III - EXECUTION3.01 Inspection3.02 Installation3.03 Field Quality Control3.04 Cleaning3.05 Close-Out procedures• 115010 Food Services Facilities - General Mechanical

vii


Requirements (6.15.97)Part 1 - SCOPEPart 2 - EXTENTPart 3 - PERMITSPart 4 - SHOP DRAWINGS AND MATERIALSPart 5 - MATERIALSPart 6 - WORKMANSHIPPart 7 - STANDARDSPart 8 - DRAWINGS IN GENERALPart 9 - ELECTRICAL WORKPart 10 - WORK SCHEDULEPart 11 - CUTTING AND PATCHINGPart 12 - DEMOLITIONPart 13 - OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALSPart 14 - OUTAGESPart 15 - AS-BUILT DRAWINGSPart 16 - TESTSPart 17 - GUARANTEESPart 18 - PROTECTION• Planning Guide for Food Service Facilities,P.G.'s County Health Department (6.15.97)

12. FURNISHINGS

• Classroom Furnishings and Equipment StandardsA. Tablet Arm ChairsB. Instructional ChairsC. Instructor Table Top and Attached LegsD. Audio Visual Screens• Design Standards for Instructional Space (6.15.97)INTRODUCTIONGENERAL PURPOSE CLASSROOMSA. Site & Space Relationships1. Classroom Location2. Noise3. Entrances/Exits4. Hallways5. Other ConsiderationsB. Dimensions of ClassroomsC. Entrances and Exits in RoomsD. WindowsE. Finishes1. Color and Reflectance Values (6.15.97)2. Floors3. Walls (6.15.97)4. CeilingsF. Acoustics1. Walls2. Ceiling3. Mechanical Systems4. Utility Boxes5. Window and Floor Treatments

viii


G. Lighting and Lighting Controls1. Controls2. Ceiling Lighting3. Chalkboard/Markerboard Lighting4. Exit SignsH. Electrical & Telecommunications ServicesI. Furnishings and Equipment1. Instructor Area2. Student Stations3. Chalkboards/Markerboards4. Tackboard5. Other Considerations (Voice Amplification, Trash & Recycling Receptacles, Pencil Sharpener)6. Projection Screens7. Data/Video ImagingJ. SignageK. HVAC IssuesLECTURE HALLSINTRODUCTIONSA. Site & Space Relationships1. Entrances/Exits2. Lobby Area3. Other Considerations (Vending, Restrooms, Public Telephones)B. Dimensions of Lecture HallsC. Entrances and Exits in RoomsD. WindowsE. Finishes1. Floors2. Walls3. CeilingsF. Acoustics1. Walls2. Ceilings3. Mechanical SystemsG. Lighting & Lighting Controls1. Controls2. Ceiling Lighting3. Chalkboard/Markerboard Lighting4. Other ConsiderationsH. Electrical & Communication Services1. Electrical Services2. Telecommunication ServicesI. Projection Booths (Rear and Front)J. Furnishings and Equipment1. Instructor Area2. Student Stations3. Chalkboards/Markerboards4. Audio5. Projection Screens6. Video and Data Projection7. Audiovisual Controls

ix


K. Video Recording SystemL. Other Special considerations1. Signage2. Environmental Issues3. Trash and Recycling Receptacles4. Pencil SharpenerSEMINAR ROOMSINTRODUCTIONA. SizeB. Furnishings and EquipmentC. Chalkboards/Markerboards and Tack BoardsD. Projection ScreenE. Electrical ServicesF. Audiovisual Equipment and ControlsG. TelecommunicationsH. LightingI. WindowsJ. Other ConsiderationsCLASSROOM AND BUILDING ACCESSIBILITYA. Americans With Disabilities ActB. Mobility ImpairmentsC. Hearing LossD. Loss of VisionE. SignageF. Other ConsiderationsG. Summary• Multiple Fixed SeatingA. MaintenanceB. Qualified ManufacturersC. Preferred MaterialsD. Mounting Requirements• Window Treatments

13. SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

• 13850 Fire Alarm Systems (2.15.97)Part I - GENERAL1.01 Scope1.02 Related Work1.03 Requirements1.04 System Description1.05 Quality Assurance A. Equipment not described B. Manufacturer/Distributor Support1.06 Submittals A. Shop Drawings B. Installation Instructions C. Product Data D. Sequence of Operations E. Address Listing F. Battery Calculations G. Amplifier Calculation

x


1.07 Sequence of Operation A. Manual Pull Station B. Smoke Detector C. Heat Detector D. Water Flow Alarms E. Valve Tamper Switch F. Duct Smoke Detector G. Fire Pump Supervisory Signals H. High/Low Air Pressure Signals I. Trouble Signals J. Smoke Control Systems K. Special door Locking ArrangementsPart II - COMPONENTS2.01 Control Panel A. Fire Alarm & Detection System B. Fire Alarm Annunciator C. Supervision D. Power Supply E. System Control F. Test Mode G. Programming H. Passwords & Security2.02 Voice/Alarm Systems A. Required Functions B. Public Address2.03 Alarm Initiating Devices A. Analog Smoke Detector - Ionization Type B. Analog Smoke Detector - Photoelectric C. Interface Modules (Monitor) D. Interface Modules (Control) E. Duct Smoke Detector Assemblies F. Addressable Manual Station G. Addressable Heat Detectors2.04 Notification Appliances A. Horn/Strobe Signals B. Strobe Signals C. Speaker/Strobe Signals2.05 Auxiliary DevicesPart III - EXECUTION3.01 Qualifications3.02 Fire alarm Control Panel (FACP) A. Location B. Lockset C. Battery Box3.03 Annunciator Panel3.04 Initiating Devices A. Manual Pull Stations B. Smoke Detectors C. Duct Smoke Detectors D. Heat Detectors E. Interface Modules (Monitor)

F. Interface Modules (Control)

xi


G. Water Flow Detectors H. Sprinkler/Standpipe Valves I. Fire Pump Supervision J. High/Low Air Pressure Supervision3.05 Notification Devices A. Horn/Strobe Signals B. Strobe Signals C. Speaker/Strobe Signals3.06 Off-Site Supervision3.07 Spare Parts3.08 Programming and Test Devices or Tools3.09 Signs3.10 Wiring3.11 System Testing3.12 Test Report3.13 Warranty3.14 Training3.15 As-Built Drawings3.16 Manuals• 13900 Fire-Suppression & Protection Systems (2.15.97)Part 1 - General1.01 Scope of Work1.02 Quality Assurance1.03 SubmittalsPart II - PRODUCTS2.01 Piping2.02 Valves2.03 Piping Accessories2.04 Sprinklers2.05 Fire Department Connections2.06 Alarm Check Valve2.07 Check Valve2.08 Control Valves2.09 Indentification Signs2.10 Drains and Test Piping2.11 Backflow Preventer2.12 Dry Pipe System2.13 Pre-Action System2.14 Fire Pump, Motor & Controller2.15 Pressure Maintenance Pump, Motor & Controller2.16 Excess Pressure Pump2.17 Risers2.18 Dry Standpipe systemPart 3 - EXECUTION3.01 General3.02 Testing3.03 Approvals3.04 Guarantee

3.05 Qualifications3.06 Manuals• Fuel Storage Tanks (11.15.96)

xii


• 13971 Wet Chemical Fire Extinguishing Systems (2.15.97)Part I - GENERAL1.1 Scope of Work1.2 References1.3 Submittals1.4 Qualifications1.5 System Requirements1.6 Electrical WorkPart II - PRODUCTS2.1 Pre-Engineered Wet Chemical Fire Extinguishing Systems2.2 System Controls2.3 Identification SignsPart III - EXECUTION3.1 Installation3.2 Field Quality Control

14. CONVEYING SYSTEMS

• Elevators (5.1.96)A. GeneralB. ShaftsC. Hydraulic ElevatorsD. Roller GuidesE. CabsF. Maintenance/Operating Manuals

15. MECHANICAL

• Automatic Temperature Control• Building Systems Equipment Accessibility• Flow Diagrams• HVAC• Mechanical Design Conditions• Mechanical Equipment Room Requirements (5.1.96)• Mechanical Life Cycle Cost Analysis• Mechanical Piping and Specialties (5.1.96)A. Gas LinesB. Chilled Water & Heating Water ValvesC. PipingD. Direct BurialE. Main Mechanical/Electrical Service EntryF. Valves• Piping Systems (10.15.96)A. Color Schedule• Plumbing Systems• Pumps• SCUB Concepts of Operation

xiii


16. ELECTRICAL

• Electrical General (2.15.97)• Electrical Building Modification (10.15.96)• Electrical Design Conditions• Electrical Design and Documentation• Electrical Distribution (5.1.96)• Electrical Life Cycle Cost Analysis• Electric Water Coolers• Emergency Generators (8.1.96)A. Emergency PowerB. Fuel to PowerC. Acceptable LocationsD. Generator ExhaustE. Generator RoomsF. Generator UseG. Overhead Lighting• Emergency Power (5.1.96)• Energy and Energy Analysis (11.15.96)A. EnergyB. Energy Analysis• Fire Protection System (11.15.96)• Lightning Protection (9.15.96)• LuminairesA. ExteriorB. Emergency GeneratorC. Mechanical and Electrical RoomsD. Exit SignsE. InteriorF. CorridorsG. LampingH. Recessed LightingI. Lenses• Security Egress System For Individuals withDisabilities (5.1.96)• Security Guidelines (5.1.96)• 16700 Telecommunications (6.15.97)Part I - GENERAL1.01 Reference Requirements1.02 Sections1.03 Related Sections1.04 References1.05 Quality Assurance1.06 Submittals1.07 Project Record Documents1.08 Qualifications1.09 Maintenance ServicePart II - PRODUCTS

2.01 Telephone Termination Backboards2.02 Station Copper Cable2.03 Riser Copper Cable

xiv


2.04 Underground Copper Cable2.05 Cable Protectors for Copper Cable2.06 Fiber Optic Cable2.07 Singlemode Fiber Optic Cable2.08 Optical Fiber Terminations2.09 Optical Fiber Patch Cords2.10 Connecting Blocks2.11 Intrabuilding Coaxial Cable2.12 Interbuilding Coaxial Cable2.13 Video System Parts and Accessories2.14 Outlet Boxes2.15 Voice/Data Jacks and Cover Plates2.16 Ductbank Innerliners2.17 Cable Lubricant2.18 Cases and Splices2.19 Firestopping2.20 Elevator Phone2.21 Outdoor Emergency Phone (6.15.97)Part III - EXECUTION3.01 System Design3.02 Forbidden Work3.03 Examination3.04 Installation of Backboards3.05 Cable Pulling3.06 Coordinate With Other Trades3.07 Conduit Installation3.08 Communications Equipment Rooms3.09 Station Cabling and Installation3.10 Riser Cabling and Installation3.11 Underground Cabling and Installation3.12 Outlet Box Installation3.13 Ductbank Design, Construction, and Utilization3.14 Manholes3.15 Connection to Existing System3.16 Re-Routing of Existing Underground Cables3.17 Video System Installation - Building Interior3.18 Video System Adjusting3.19 Cable Plant Labeling3.20 Testing and Acceptance3.21 As-Built Documentation• Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS)• Utility Metering (11.15.96)• Variable Frequency Drive (FVD) Requirements• 16000 ELECTRICAL DESIGN SERVICES (2.15.97)Part I - GENERAL1.01 Basic Services1.02 Codes

1.03 Time1.04 Quality of WorkPart 2 - PRODUCT2.01 Concrete Encased Ductbanks

xv


2.02 Switchgear & Transformer for Outdoor Installations2.03 Unit Substation for Indoor Installation2.04 Transformer Sizing2.05 Grounding Grid System2.06 Medium Voltage Cable2.07 Exterior Communication Cables & Wires2.08 Low Voltage A.C. Distribution2.09 Lighting System2.10 Wiring for Lighting Fixtures, Receptacles2.11 Communication System2.12 Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System (FADS)2.13 Generator System2.14 Security System2.15 Uninterruptable Power Supply System (UPS)2.16 Computer Rooms/Telecommunication Switch Room Raised Floor System2.17 Lightning Protection System2.18 Equipment MaintainabilityPart 3 - DESIGN REQUIREMENTS3.01 Design Calculations3.02 Catalogue Cuts3.03 Construction Drawings3.04 General Rules for Drawing References3.05 Specifications• 16010 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS (2.15.97)Part I - GENERAL1.01 Scope of Work1.02 Codes, Regulations and Permits1.03 Submittals: Test DataPart 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 Materials2.02 Equipment Supports, Foundations and Stands2.03 Nameplates2.04 Electrical SymbolsPart 3 - EXECUTION3.01 Coordination of Work3.02 Outages3.03 Workmanship3.04 Overtime3.05 Placing in Service3.06 Handling and Storage of Materials3.07 Equipment Connections3.08 Waterproofing3.09 Cutting, Patching and Painting3.10 Sleeves and Plates3.11 Excavating and Backfilling

3.12 Testing3.13 Special Testing3.14 Grounding3.15 Low Voltage Certification3.16 Medium Voltage Testing

xvi


• 16050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS (2.15.97)Part 1 - GENERAL1.01 Scope of Work1.02 Submittals1.03 Regulatory RequirementsPart 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 Basic MaterialsPart 3 - EXECUTION3.01 Installation• 16110 RACEWAY SYSTEMS (2.15.97)Part 1 - GENERAL1.01 Section Includes1.02 Regulatory RequirementsPart 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 Product Requirements2.02 Conduit and Fittings2.03 Multi-Outlet Assembly (MOA)2.04 Wireway and Auxiliary Gutters2.05 Wireways2.06 Electrical Boxes2.07 Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures2.08 Ladder-Type Cable Tray2.09 Warning Signs2.10 Pull RopesPart 3 - EXECUTION3.01 Examination and Preparation3.02 Installation• 16119 WIRING SYSTEMS (2.15.97)Part 1 - GENERAL1.01 Section Includes1.02 Regulatory Requirements1.03 SubmittalsPart 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 Wire and Cable2.02 Wiring Devices and Wall PlatesPart 3 - EXECUTION3.01 Examination and Preparation3.02 Installation3.03 Splices and Terminations3.04 Wiring Devices3.05 Field Quality Control3.06 Wiring for Lighting Fixtures, Receptacles• 16122 MEDIUM VOLTAGE (MV) (5000V TO 35KV) CABLE, SPLICE, AND TERMINATION (2.15.97)Part 1 - GENERAL1.01 Related Documents

1.02 ScopePart 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 Single Conductor (1/C) 15 KV Cable2.02 Inner Conductor

xvii


2.03 Conductor Shield (Layer Surrounding theInner Conductor)2.04 Insulation (Layer Surrounding theConductor Shield)2.05 Insulation Shield (Layer Surroundingthe Insulation)2.06 Metallic Shield (Layer Surroundingthe Insulation Shield)2.07 Outer Jacket (Layer Surroundingthe Metallic Shield)2.08 Identifications2.09 Termination Fittings (For 1/C, 15KV Wire)2.10 Splicing2.11 FireproofingPart 3 - EXECUTION3.01 General3.02 Installation of Cable In Conduit3.03 Splices and Terminations3.04 Installation, Fireproofing3.05 Feeder Identification3.06 Field Testing• 16361 AIR INTERRUPTER SWITCHES (2.15.97)Part 1 - GENERAL1.01 Section Includes1.02 System Description1.03 Submittals1.04 Regulatory Requirements1.05 Operation and Maintenance Data1.06 Delivery, Storage, and Handling1.07 Extra MaterialsPart 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 Manufactures2.02 Air Interrupter Switches2.03 Components2.04 Accessories2.05 Fabrication2.06 Factory Finishing2.07 Medium Voltage FusesPart 3 - EXECUTION3.01 Examination3.02 Installation3.03 Field Quality Control• 16400 480 VOLTS SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM (2.15.97)Part 1 - GENERAL

1.01 Section Includes1.02 System Description1.03 Submittals1.04 References and Regulation Requirements1.05 Source Quality Control1.06 Delivery, Storage and Handling

xviii


1.07 Maintenance1.08 Equipment RatingPart 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 480 Volts Switchboard2.02 Enclosed Safety Switches2.03 Fuses2.04 Transformers2.05 Busway2.06 Panelboards2.07 Enclosed Circuit Breakers2.08 Motor Control Center2.09 Motor Starters2.10 ContactorsPart 3 - EXECUTION3.01 Examination, Installation, and Field Quality Control3.02 Cleaning• 16411 UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS AND DUCTBANKS (2.15.97)Part 1 - GENERAL1.01 Section Includes1.02 System Description1.03 Submittals1.04 References1.05 Project Record DocumentsPart 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 Raceways2.02 Concrete2.03 Reinforcing2.04 Expansion Joints2.05 Construction JointsPart 3 - EXECUTION3.01 Installation3.02 Field Quality Control• 16412 MANHOLES (2.15.97)Part 1 - GENERAL1.01 Related Documents1.02 ScopePart 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 Manholes2.02 Manhole Cast Iron Cover and Rim2.03 Grounding Rod2.04 Vertical and Horizontal Support Frame2.05 Special Fittings2.06 End BellsPart 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 Top Surface3.02 Bottom Surface3.03 Grounding Rod3.04 Repairing Damage3.05 Elevation3.06 Water Penetration

xix


3.07 Collar3.08 Support Frames• 16413 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING (2.15.97)Part 1 - GENERAL1.01 Related Documents1.02 ScopePart 2 - PRODUCTSPart 3 - EXECUTION• 16450 SECONDARY GROUNDING (2.15.97)Part 1 - GENERAL1.01 Section Includes1.02 System Description1.03 Submittals1.04 Regulatory Requirements1.05 Project Record DocumentsPart 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 Ground Rods2.02 Grounding AccessoriesPart 3 - EXECUTION3.01 Installation3.02 Field Quality Control• 16480 480V UNIT SUBSTATION (2.15.97)Part 1 - GENERAL1.01 Scope of Work1.02 Related Sections1.03 Submittals1.04 Operation and Maintenance Data1.05 References1.06 Quality Assurance1.07 Delivery, Storage, and HandlingPart 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 General2.02 Manufacturers2.03 Transformer2.04 Medium Voltage Air InterrupterSwitches (Indoor)2.05 480 Volts Main Distribution SwitchboardPart 3 - EXECUTION3.01 Examination3.02 Installation3.03 Field Quality Control3.04 Adjusting• 16500 LIGHTING (2.15.97)Part 1 - GENERAL

1.01 Section Includes1.02 Submittal1.03 Regulatory Requirements1.04 General Requirements1.05 Maintenance1.06 References1.07 Qualifications1.08 Delivery, Storage and Handling

xx


1.09 Coordination1.10 Project Record DocumentsPart 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 Demolition2.02 Interior Luminaries and Accessories2.03 Exterior Architectural Luminaries and Accessories2.04 Exterior Roadway Luminaire and Accessories2.05 Lamps2.06 Ballasts2.07 Exit Signs2.08 Poles2.09 Splices, TapsPart 3 - EXECUTION3.01 Examination and Preparation3.02 Installation3.03 Adjusting and Cleaning3.04 Coordination3.05 Acceptance• 16600 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM (2.15.97)Part 1 - GENERAL1.01 Scope of Work1.02 Quality Assurance1.03 Shop Drawings1.04 WorkmanshipPart 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 General2.02 Materials2.03 Conductors2.04 Air Terminals2.05 Fasteners, Clamps, Etc.2.06 Ground Rods2.07 Test WellPart 3 - EXECUTION3.01 Installation• 16610 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM (UPS) (2.15.97)Part 1 - GENERAL1.01 Section Includes1.02 System Description1.03 Applicable Standards1.04 Submittals1.05 Environment Conditions1.06 Quality Assurance

1.07 WarrantyPart 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 System Requirements2.02 Manufacturer2.03 Electrical Characteristics2.04 ComponentsPart 3 - EXECUTION3.01 Installation3.02 Testing

xxi


• 16620 STAND-BY ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM (2.15.97)Part 1 - GENERAL1.01 Section Includes1.02 Related Work1.03 Submittals1.04 Regulatory RequirementsPart 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 Description2.02 Materials and ComponentsPart 3 - EXECUTION3.01 Installation3.02 Generator Tests3.03 Warranty• 16630 STANDBY DIESEL ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM (2.15.97)Part 1 - GENERAL1.01 Related Documents1.02 Summary1.03 Definitions1.04 System Description1.05 Submittals1.06 Quality Assurance1.07 Delivery, Storage, and Handling1.08 Extra MaterialsPart 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 Manufacturers2.02 System Service Conditions2.03 Engine Generator System2.04 System Performance2.05 Engine Generator Set2.06 Engine2.07 Engine Cooling System2.08 Fuel Supply System2.09 Engine Exhaust System2.10 Combustion Air-Intake System2.11 Starting System2.12 Control and Monitoring2.13 Generator, Exciter, and Voltage Regulator2.14 Electric Motors2.15 Outdoor Generator Set Enclosure2.16 Finishes2.17 Source Quality Control

Part 3 - EXECUTION3.01 Installation3.02 Identification3.03 Field Quality Control3.04 Cleaning3.05 Demonstration3.06 Commissioning• 16726 SECURITY CAMERAS EQUIPMENT (7.15.97Part 1 - GENERAL

xxii


1.01 Section Includes1.02 Regulatory Requirements1.03 General Requirements1.04 Qualifications1.05 Project Record DocumentsPart 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 Exterior Equipment and Accessories2.02 Camera Equipment and Accessories2.03 Splices, TapsPart 3 - EXECUTION3.01 Examination and Preparation3.02 Installation3.03 Adjusting and Cleaning3.04 Coordination3.05 Acceptance• 16782 SECURITY CAMERAS (EXTERIOR) (6.15.97)Part 1 - GENERAL1.01 Section Includes1.02 Regulatory Requirements1.03 General Requirements1.04 References1.05 Qualifications1.06 Project Record DocumentsPart 2 -Products2.01 Exterior Architectural Cameras and Accessories2.02 Exterior Cameras and Accessories2.03 Poles2.04 Splices, TapsPart 3 - Execution3.01 Examination and Preparation3.02 Installation3.03 Adjusting and Cleaning3.04 Coordination3.05 Acceptance• 16783 SECURITY CAMERAS (INTERIOR) (6.15.97)Part 1 - GENERAL1.01 Section Includes1.02 Regulatory Requirements1.03 General Requirements1.04 Qualifications

1.05 Project Record DocumentsPart 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 Exterior Architectural Cameras and Accessories2.02 Interior Cameras and Accessories2.03 Splices, TapsPart 3 - EXECUTION3.01 Examination and Preparation3.02 Installation3.03 Adjusting and Cleaning3.04 Coordination3.05 Acceptance

xxiii


• 16900 MEDIUM VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL TESTINGSERVICES (2.15.97)Part 1 - GENERAL1.01 Scope of Work1.02 Submittals1.03 Qualifications of Testing Agency1.04 Safety and Precautions1.05 Local Conditions Covering Work1.06 Response Time1.07 Technical Standards and Library1.08 University of Maryland Rights of Inspection and Test1.09 Testing and Inspection Procedures1.10 Test Equipment and Test Equipment Calibration1.11 PCB Analysis Unit Prices1.12 Demand Visits1.13 Test Results1.14 Test Firm's Liability Insurance1.15 Charges1.16 Facilitites Services• 16910 CONTROLS (2.15.97)Part 1 - GENERAL1.01 Sections Includes1.02 SubmittalsPart 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 Control Switches and Stations2.02 Photocell Switch2.03 Relays2.04 Time Switch2.05 Control Device EnclosuresPart 3 - EXECUTION3.01 Installation3.02 Adjusting• EXAMPLE SCHEDULES AND DETAILS (2.15.97)

17. Central Control and Monitoring System (CCMS) (7.15.97)

18. BUILDING COMMISSIONING (7.15.97)

xxiv

FOREWARD (6.15.97)

The University of Maryland, College Park Campus (UMCP), is maintained by theDepartment of Physical Plant (DPP). DPP is therefore concerned about thefunctional aspect of the University's buildings and grounds. They should be lowin maintenance, energy efficient, and, in general, provide good value for theUniversity with regard to life cycle costs as well as initial costs. It is notintended that this document limit the creative aspect of a design; however, itis DPP's intent to bring about a standardization of certain aspects in allcampus facilities.

These Standards and Guidelines are, for the most part, organized in theConstruction Specification Institute's (CSI) format, using it's master formatlist of section names. Only sections for which the University has guidelines orstandards have been included; other guidelines and standards will be added asthe need arises. When a section follows the masterformat list of section namesand numbering system, and when a project specifications manual is required for aproject, the designer MUST utilize them as presented. The designer may add tothe CSI format specifications provided in this document, but SHALL NOT reduce orremove the requirements listed in the specifications. The designer may receiveother UMCP documents (referenced herein). This Manual is not intended to diluteor contradict other UMCP standards. Any conflicting information shall bebrought to the attention of the Assistant Director, Plant Engineering,Department of Physical Plant for clarification/resolution.

The Department of Physical Plant in conjunction with the Departments ofArchitecture, Engineering, and Construction, Environmental Safety, Police,Business and Communications Services, Campus Parking, Resident Life, and DiningServices through participation in several committees worked to develop andrefine this document.

Perodic supplements in the form of additions or replacements will be published.The sections that have been either added or modified will be identified in boldunder the revisied Table of Contents followed by the revision date in parens.The same revision date also appears at the end of the heading of the respectivesections. PLEASE NOTE that in some cases, only a few sheets will have beenmodified; in which case only selected pages need to be replaced in the Manual.

ENDPURPOSE: (11.15.96)

Compiled by the Department of Physical Plant (DPP), these Standards andGuidelines are intended to serve as a guide for renovation and new constructionprojects at the University of Maryland College Park. They are the result ofexperience gained over a number of years and reflect the University's judgementabout what is needed to obtain optimum lifetime performance from it's buildingsin terms of first time cost and maintenance.

The design and construction of buildings at the University of Maryland poses aunique challenge to project designers. It is the University's intent to createfacilities that shall remain useful for 50 or more years. It requires acommitment to the taxpayers and users to understand the two major differencesbetween a building built at taxpayers' expense and used by an institution and abuilding built for private industry use:

1. The building shall remain in use for 50 to 100 years.

2. The cost of operation is not passed onto the tenants or depreciated.

First, because of the long life expectancy and changing academic environment,the infrastructure of a building must be designed for flexibility and change.Interstitial space has to be large enough to accommodate mechanical andelectrical system additions/modifications brought on by an increase in thedensity of use and the increased demands of technology. Mechanical rooms,though not viewed programmatically as assignable space, are assigned to theDepartment of Physical Plant for the operations and maintenance of a facility.Proper maintenance must be possible without requiring mechanics to jeopardizetheir safety or shut down major parts of a facility in order to performmaintenance. Adequate space must be provided to allow for maintenance withoutthe use of special equipment.

Secondly, the State of Maryland system has not historically provided maintenancefunds for either equipment or personnel to maintain a facility at the levelsprescribed by the Department of General Services' guidelines. Many times,equipment and finishes that are viewed as economical to replace in the privatesector cannot be replaced in the state system due to the lack of maintenancedollars for personnel or materials.

It is therefore extremely important that the project designers recognize thesefacts and do the most to provide proper analysis in the selection of finishes,windows, doors, and equipment.

END

PROCESS (7.15.97)

In an effort to avoid "gold plating" of UMCP's building systems and given therapidly changing environment within the campus buildings, everyone involved inboth the formulation and review of the DCFS has focused on: reducing the use of

high cost finishes on interior architectural systems (which typically changesseveral times during the building's life), looking to build to the intent ofstate & federal regulatory requirements, and minimizing the specification ofproprietary items. On the other hand, also consistent with the administration'sobjectives, projects will continue to use the life-cycle costing approach tospecify building systems - roofing, masonry, plumbing, electrical, and HVACsystems. Exceptions to the above will be made, as appropriate, on a project-by-project basis only.

Nine subcommittees (Architecture, Interior Design & Egress; Commissioning;Division 15; Environmental Controls; Enivronmental Permitting; Exterior & SiteConsiderations; Fire Alarms; Fire Suppression Systems; and Health Safety &Security) were established to conduct a critique of the entire document based onthe above criteria as well as create new and/or applicable guidelines andstandards. The thoroughness of the process is also important to note. Anychange or addition to the DCFS requires the review/recommendation of therespective Subcommittee prior to being submitted to the Technical Committee forreview/change and approval in order to be incorporated into this document.

In addition to the above efforts, an Environmental and Fire ProtectionConsulting Team was hired to insure that the DCFS criteria, includig pendingguidelines related to environmental safety, fire protection, and life safetyissues, are reasonable and do not unnecessarily impose additional constructioncosts based on applicable regulations and best management practices. TheConsultants also reviewed the document to identify issues that are notadequately addressed and provided relevent examples for consideration by UMCP.

The Consultant's findings indicated that there are few design criteria relatedto environmental safety, fire protection and life safety issues which wouldresult in unnecessary and excessive costs. The expertise provided by theConsultants were either incorporated in the DCFS in accordance with the abovereview process or required additional review by the respective Subcommittee.

Since this is a "living" document, comments, observations, recommendations fromall members of the UMCP Community as well as outside professionals are welcomeand should be forwarded to: Assistant Director, Plant Engineering, Departmentof Physical Plant, Service Building 003, University of Maryland College Park,College Park, MD. 20742

END1. BUILDING GOALS AND DESIGN PRINCIPLES (7.15.97)

A. Building Goals:

Both the Department of Physical Plant (DPP) and the Department of Architecture,Engineering, and Construction (DAEC), are entrusted with providing UMCPbuildings which incorporate a high degree of:

1. Functional Efficiency2. Innovative and Appropriate, Design3. Contextual Harmony with the Site and Neighborhood4. Appropriately Selected Materials and Systems5. Health and Safety Characteristics6. Accessibility for the Disabled7. Life Cycle Value

These Architectural and Engineering Design Standards have been compiled toestablish general and, in some cases, specific design policies as a guide fordesigning new facilities, as well as altering or renovating existing structures.ANY DEVIATION FROM THESE STANDARDS MUST BE SUBMITTED TO, AND APPROVED IN WRITINGBY, THE DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL PLANT AND THE DEPARTMENT OF ARCHITECTURE,ENGINEERING & CONSTRUCTION ON THE FORM FOLLOWING THIS SECTION.

These Design Standards supplement the job specific Facility Program. Should therequirements of these Design Standards conflict with other information orrequirements of the project and/or site conditions, the Designer will beresponsible for obtaining resolution with DPP and for proceeding in accordancewith a written waiver from DPP.

B. Design Principles:

UMCP buildings, new and renovated, must provide the functional, aesthetic,environmental, and safety needs of the using-agency "client" and therequirements of governing authorities, with a reasonable balance between initialcost and life-cycle value. UMCP is dedicated to improving the quality of itscampus and buildings through planning, architectural, and engineering serviceswhich must:

1. Ensure the highest degree of professionalism from the Design Team todevelop and implement innovative and functional design concepts, in harmony withthe site environment, and appropriate to the project needs;

1. BUILDING GOALS AND DESIGN PRINCIPLES (7.15.97)

2. Assure that design concepts for repair, alterations, and renovations areexecuted with the same professional consideration as that for new facilities.

3. Implement reliable procedures for controlling project estimates,construction costs, life-cycle factors, and time schedules;

4. Establish thorough quality-control corrdination during all phases of thedesign process;

5. Respond to governing codes and standards ensuring environmental health andsafety; and

REQUEST FOR DEVIATION FROMUMCP'S DESIGN CRITERIA/FACILITY STANDARDS

In accordance with Division 1, Building Goals & Design Principles, A. BuildingGoals, we request the following deviation from the UMCP Design Criteria/FacilityStandards Manual.

DEVIATION:

JUSTIFICATION: (To include value engineering analysis)

Requested by:____________________________

Title:____________________________

Firm:____________________________

Date:____________________________

APPROVED*: DAEC Design Manager______________________ (If applicable)

DPP Assistant DirectorPlant Engineering______________________

Date______________________

* At a minimum, A Request for Deviation must be approved by the DPP AssistantDirector, Plant Engineering. In the event that approval is denied, theapplicant may request reconsideration from the Directors of DPP and DAEC,jointly.

DPP Director______________________

DAEC Director______________________

1. BUILDING SERVICES AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS (11.15.96)

The spaces identified in this section shall not be used as access to otherspaces.

A. Housekeeping Zone Closets:

1. Provide a minimum of one (1) 4'-6" x 8'-0" housekeeping closet withdouble doors on each floor of a building (see attached floor plan for layout ofcloset and the Table identifying number of closets required). The followingshall be standard equipment in each housekeeping closet:

a. 36" X 36" floor mounted pre-cast mop-ceptor.b. 36" shelf above mop-ceptor.c. Mop strip above mop-ceptor.d. Mop-ceptor faucet shall have threaded spout with pail hook and 6 foot hosewith bracket.e. One electrical outlet.f. One light fixture switched to door opening.g. Trap primer and accessories.

2. Floors and walls (to at least 4'-0" high above finished floor) shall becovered with hard, water proof surfaces, preferably ceramic tile.

3. One additional closet shall be provided that is large enough to house anautomatic scrubber (48" x 60" x 48" high) in buildings of 40,000 GSF or larger.For units that do not utilize sealed batteries, the electical lighting, fans,wiring, etc., shall comply with the requirements of the National Electrical Codefor "Classified Locations". The exhaust fans shall operate 24 hours per day.

4. Only equipment identified in this section shall be located in custodialclosets. Installation of HVAC, electrical, telephone or plumbing equipment isnot acceptable.

5. A set of double doors is required for each housekeeping closet. Each door(minimum 30" each) shall swing out into the corridor.

B. Housekeeping Central Storage Room:

1. A 200 GSF storage room (minimum) located adjacent to a loading dock orservice entry is required in buildings of 40,000 GSF or larger.

1. BUILDING SERVICES AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

C. Housekeeper's Room:

1. Provide one 100 GSF room per building (minimum), located adjacent tohousekeeping central storage room.

2. The size of this room increases in increments of 15 GSF for eachadditional 20,000 GSF of building.

D. Preventive Maintenance Shop:

1. Provide one 100 GSF room per building (minimum), located adjacent toprimary mechanical room(s) and loading dock or service entry.

E. Preventive Maintenance Storage:

1. If a building is 40,000 GSF or larger, a 200 GSF room (minimum) separatefrom, but adjacent to, the maintenance shop, is required. The size of this roomincreases in increments of 20 square feet per each additional 20,000 GSF ofbuilding.

1. BUILDING SERVICES AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS (5.1.96) HOUSEKEEPING ZONE CLOSET

LEGEND

1 Dimensions: 8' long,4 1/2' deep.

2 Shelving 10" deep,with bracket supports.

3 Fluorescent fixturewith switch mountedoccupancycontrol that utilizes180 degreefield of view.

4 Two 30" doors, withvents and lockable.

5 Utility floor sink, (note: off-center)

with stainless steel lipcover.

6 Bibb faucet with support hanger.

7 4 foot length of hose.

8 Tool holder.

9 Walls ceramic to 4' min., painted enamel (including ceiling)

above 4'.

10 Locationforcustodialcartor waste hamper.

11 Locationfor 2-bucket(or 3-bucket)mopping outfit.

12 Location for floor machine or vacuum.

13 Floor-- hard, water-proof surface,

preferably ceramic tile.

SCALE: 1/2"



Zone Closets are the basic work and supply room for individual housekeepers andshould be located adjacent to restrooms. Housekeeping Central Storage is the

storage room for the building and should be convenient to both the serviceentry, loading dock, and the elevator. Housekeeper Room is the lunch, meeting,and office facility. It should be adjacent to the Central Storage Room.Maintenance Shop is the basic work area for the building maintenance. It shouldbe located adjacent to the service entry and main mechanical space. MaintenanceStorage Room is the supply storage area for maintenance and should be locatedadjacent to the Shop and service entry.

END

1. CODES (4.15.97)

All design shall comply with accepted engineering practices in compliance withthe following codes unless specific approval is obtained for variance. When aspecific project warrants variance the request is to be submitted in writing toDAEC early in the design stage.

Although the following list contains major codes and standards which currentlyapply to construction for the University, it is not to be considered allinclusive. All other standards, codes and regulations imposed by the Departmentof General Services or the University which may be initiated subsequent to theprogram submittal must be adhered to. All references utilized are to be themost current editions, approved or adopted by the State and local agencies,including all applicable revisions or appendices.

In addition, all designs shall comply with Governor's Executive Order.01.01.1992.11 Building Performance Standards for State Buildings which outlinesthe following; "All State agencies shall utilize and apply the buildingperformance standards set forth in the State's Model Performance Code at COMAR.05.02.01 and the State Fire Prevention Code at COMAR 12.03.01 promulgatedpursuant to Article 38A, § 3 of the annotated Code of Maryland, as amended forall construction, alteration, remodeling, and renovation of all buildings thatare owned, leased, operated, or controlled by the State." In summary, the ModelPerformance Code includes the BOCA Building Mechanical (ICC International), andEnergy Conservation Codes; and the State Fire Prevention Code includes NFPA 101and the BOCA Fire Prevention Code.

A. The B.O.C.A. National Building Code

B. The ICC International (B.O.C.A. National) Mechanical Code

C. The B.O.C.A. Energy Conservation Code

D. Standards of the National Fire Protection Association

E. National Electrical Code

F. Maryland Occupational Safety & Health Administration

G. State of Maryland Fire Prevention Code

H. Americans With Disabilities Act - AccessibilityGuidelines for Buildings and Facilities - 1990

I. Maryland Building Code for the Disabled

J. State of Maryland's Department of General Services, Procedures forImplementation of Energy Conservation

K. Washington Suburban Sanitary Commission (WSSC)

Plumbing and Gas Fitting Regulations

1. CODES (4.15.97)

L. State of Maryland's Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators,and Moving Walks (ANSI/ASME A17.1)

M. The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.

N. American National Standards Institute: "National Electrical Safety Code"- ANSI C-2 and ANSI C-37

O. 29 CFR S1910 & S1926

P. Maryland Department of Transportation, Maryland State HighwayAdministration - Standard Specifications for Construction and Materials

Q. Maryland Department of the Environment (MDE)

END1. ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY (EH&S) IN FACILITY DESIGN(7.15.97)

A. EH&S in Project Development

The University's project development process for any facility consists ofprogramming, design, and construction elements. During each of these phases,systems safety analysis is an essential vehicle for integrating EnvironmentalHealth and Safety (EH&S) values into the built environment. This riskmanagement role requires an informed understanding of the University's riskmanagement posture and a commitment to cooperative interaction within the entireproject team (including representatives from various University Departments)during all project phases.

1. Safety Objectives

Safety shall be integrated in those design processes which envision, develop,and deliver University facilities. Timely identification of hazards duringproject development not only reduces liability to all parties (i.e.,contractual, regulatory, tort) but also avoids "fixes" which can wreak havocwith project budgets and schedules during subsequent phases. This goal is to beaccomplished using "systems safety" analysis; a method which applies engineeringor management principles, criteria, and techniques to augment all aspects ofsafety within the constraints of effectiveness, time, and cost throughout thefacility life cycle.

2. Program Development

During programming, a Preliminary Hazard Analysis (PHA) is conducted by theproject team to anticipate, recognize, and evaluate hazardous conditions andtheir implications to facility design. This may include, but is not limited to,a Phase I Environmental Site Assessment, a Phase II Environmental SiteAssessment, and/or a Facility Regulatory Compliance Audit. Potential hazardsshould be informally prioritized (usually in a subjective manner) to supporttheir practical control within the constraints of the project budget.Applicable criteria documents are then identified, or formulated by the projectteam, which offer safe alternatives for eliminating specific hazards orcontrolling their associated risks. The PHA should clarify the University'srequirements to reduce or eliminate unacceptable risks by conducting a safetyoverview for the facility concept including;

1. ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY (EH&S) IN FACILITY DESIGN(11.15.96)

a. Review of germane safety experiences related to operations (e.g., Phase IEnvironmental Site assessment).

b. Categorization and prioritization of known hazards.

c. Investigation of identified hazards to define potential control models.

d. Identification of relevant regulatory requirements.

e. Recommendation for remedial action.

3. Design Development

In the design phase, submittal packages are to be presented for review byUniversity representatives at each milestone submittal stage. This reviewprocess ensures continuous improvement during design by encouraging teaminteraction on issues of safety and by verifying compliance with safety designcriteria, such as applicable codes, regulations, and standards. Specific safetysubmissions (e.g., ladder details, industrial ventilation designs) may berequired at the design phase level to assess the feasibility and efficacy ofproposed solutions. Where unique conditions affecting facility safety areencountered (i.e., ones which are not adequately addressed throughinterpretation of published standards), expertise may be sought through theproject team or applicable regulatory authorities to assess, for example;

a. Appropriate safety standards and compliance verification.

b. Residual hazards unique to the application.

c. Special safety precautions unique to the installation.

d. Safe handling requirements for hazardous materials.


4. Construction

During the construction phase, site inspections are performed by Universityrepresentative, not only to review the Contractor's worker safety program but toconfirm that specific safety features designed into the building program arebeing installed and constructed to specifications. Safety inspections arecoordinated through the Department of architecture, Engineering, andConstruction's (DAEC) Construction Manager who will coordinate input from allappropriate internal and external University constituencies. The constructionphase completes the project cycle through a "building commissioning" inspectionprocess and periodic warranty inspections.

B. EH&S Codes, Regulation, and Standards

Consistent with the Governor's Executive Order 01.01.1996.03 - RegulatoryStandards and Accountability, the design shall comply with the latest approved

edition of applicable Federal, State, and local codes, regulations, andstandards involving Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S) in the delivery ofUniversity facilities.

1. General

This section sets forth governmental regulations and fundamental building codeswhich are included and incorporated herein by reference and made a part of theUniversity's "Design Criteria/Facilities Standards (DCFS) Manual." Requirementsinclude;

a. Adherence during design to conditions set forth in applicable codes,regulations, and standards.

b. Securing notices, permits, licenses, inspections, releases, and similardocumentation, as well as payments, statements, and similar requirementsassociated with compliance with codes, regulations, and standards in the designof campus facilities.

1. ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY (EH&S) IN FACILITY DESIGN (11.15.96)

c. Discernment of EH&S standards of care and best management practices,outlined herein which will assist in considering areas of EH&S compliance.Provisions shall be included in programmatic and design documents to addressregulatory issues with reference to applicable standards as well as the "GeneralDuty Clause" of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970. Further,designs shall envision EH&S provisions which avoid contractual or tortliabilities (e.g., professional error or omission).

2. Codes and Regulation

Except to the extent that more explicit or definitive requirements are writtendirectly into the DCFS Manual, all applicable codes, regulations, and standardshave the same force and effect (and are made a part of the Manual by reference)as if copied directly into the DCFS Manual, or as if published copies are boundherewith.

3. Regulatory Requirements

Compliance with the following regulatory standards is mandated by Federal orState law.

a. Federal Department of labor (DOL)/Occupational Safety and HealthAdministration (OSHA) Regulations.

1. Occupational Safety and Health Act of 19702. Title 29 CFR Part 1910 General Industry Standards3. Title 29 CFR Part 1926 Construction Industry Standards

b. Maryland Department of Health and Mental Hygiene (DHMH)/Division of Laborand Industry (DOLI)/Maryland Occupational Safety and Health (MOSH) Regulations.

1. Annotated Code of Maryland, Title 5 Occupational Safety and Health2. Code of Maryland Regulations, COMAR Title 09, Subtitle 12

a. COMAR 09.12.20 - .24 Maryland OSH Act, Generalb. COMAR 09.12.31 MOSH Incorporation by Reference of Federal Standards


c. COMAR 09.12.33 Access to Information About Hazardous and Toxic Substancesd. COMAR 09.12.35 Confined Spacese. COMAR 09.12.36 Field Sanitationf. COMAR 09.12.38 GIS for Personnel Platforms Suspended from Cranes,Derricks, and Hoists

c. Federal Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)

1. Title 40 CFR Part 61, Subpart M - Asbestos NESHAPs2. Title 40 CFR Parts 260 through 265 and 268 - Resource Conservation andRecovery Act (RCRA)

a. Part 260 Hazardous Waste Mgmt Systems: Generalb. Part 261 Identification and Listing of Hazardous Wastec. Part 262 Generators of Hazardous Wasted. Part 263 - Transportation of Hazardous Wastee. Part 264 - Owners and Operators of Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, andDisposal Facilitiesf. Part 265 - Interim Storage Standards for Owners and Operators of HazardousWaste Treatment, Storage, and Disposal Facilitiesg. Part 268 - Land Disposal Restrictions

3. Title 40 CFR Part 112 - Oil Pollution Prevention

d. Maryland Department of the Environment (MDE)

1. Code of Maryland Regulations, COMAR Title 26

a. COMAR 26.02.07 Procedures for Abating Lead Containing Substances formBuildingsb. COMAR 26.10.02 -.11 Oil Pollution and Tank Management


2. COMAR Title 26, Subtitle 11 - Toxic Air Pollutants

a. COMAR 26.11.02 Air Quality Permits, Approvals, and Registrationb. COMAR 26.11.06 General Emissions Standards, Prohibitions, andRestrictions.c. COMAR 26.11.21 Control of Asbestos

3. COMAR 26, Subtitle 13 Hazardous Waste Regulations

4. COMAR 26.16.01 Accreditation and Training for Lead Paint AbatementServices

e. Federal Department of Transportation (DOT)

1. Hazardous Substances Title 49 CFR Parts 171 - 177

4. Mandatory codes

Governor's Executive Order 01.01.1992.11 - Building Performance standards forState Buildings, mandates adherence to the following codes in Universityfacilities;

a. BOCA Building Code (Latest Edition)b. ICC International Mechanical Code (Latest Edition)c. WSSC Plumbing Code (Latest Edition), in College Parkd. Local/State/ICC Plumbing Code (Latest Edition), for other campusese. NFPA Codes and Standards (Latest Adopted Edition)

C. Contractual Provisions for Reliable EH&S Design

The following industry standards of care shall be incorporated into programmaticor design documents where such standards have application to the work.

1. Environmental Site Assessment

ASTM E 1527-93 - Standard Practice for Environmental Site Assessments: Phase IEnvironmental Site Assessment Process


2. General Building Ventilation

a. ASHRAE 62-1989 - Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Qualityb. ASHRAE 55-1981 - Thermal Environmental Conditions for HumanOccupancyc. ASHRAE Handbooks - HVAC Applications(Latest Editions) RefrigerationFundamentalsSystems and FundamentalsEquipment3. Specialized Ventilation

a. ACGIH Handbook - Industrial Ventilation: A Manual of RecommendedPractice, 22nd Editionb. ANSI/AIHA Z9.3-1994 Standard for Spray Finishing Operations

4. General Laboratory Ventilation

ANSI/AIHA Z9.5 - American National Standard for Laboratory Ventilation(1993)

5. Eyewash/Safety Shower Stations

ANSI Z358.1-1990 - American National Standard for Emergency Showers andEyewash Stations

6. Laboratory Design For Biosafety

a. Containment Labs - CDC/NIH 3rd Edition Biosafety in Microbiologicaland Biomedical Laboratories (Current Edition)b. NIH Guidelines - Guidelines for Research Involving Recombinant DNAMolecules(Current Edition) - Primary Containment for Biohazards: Selection, Installation, Use ofBiological Safety Cabinets (Current Edition)


c. BL3 Agricultural USDA, Agricultural Facility Research Service (ARS), ConstructionProject Design Standard, ARS Manual 242.1 (Current Edition)

D. Best Management Practice In EH&S

During project development, the Project Team shall identify potential sources ofpollution or other damage to the environment that may occur during facilitiesconstruction. When a potential source of environmental degradation isidentified, suitable provisions shall be included in technical specifications toeliminate or minimize damage. Additionally, the following environmentalpolicies affecting facilities development must be adhered to;

1. Institutional Standards of Care in EH&S

The following risk management programs at UMCP shall be consulted in relation toapplicable EH&S design and construction issues. Many of these documents areavailable for review at the University's Department of Environmental Safety(DES) Website. http:www.inform.umd.edu/des.

a. Department of Environmental safety (DES)

1. Asbestos Management Plan2. Biosafety Manual3. Chemical Hygiene Plan

4. Confined space Entry Plan5. Hazardous Waste Management Manual6. Laboratory Safety Guide7. Lead-Based Paint Management Plan8. Lockout/Tagout Program

b. Department of AEC - Safety Analysis Unit

1. Specifications for Industrial Hygiene Services2. Hazardous Waste Management Requirements on construction (Section 02067)

2. Prohibited Building Materials

a. The use of the following materials is prohibited on all UniversityProjects;

1. Products containing asbestos2. Interior products containing urea/formaldehyde


3. Products containing polychlorinated biphenols (PCBs)4. Solder or flux containing greater than two-tenths of one percent (0.2%)lead and domestic pipe or fittings containing greater than eight percent (8%)lead5. Paint containing greater than six-one hundredths of one percent (0.06%)Lead by weight

b. Due to concerns for Indoor Environmental quality, the application offibrous absorptive materials (e.g., ductliners) to ductwork interiors isstrongly discouraged as a means to control noise. Duct liners shall be limitedto the minimum application required to achieve programmatic noise criteria andshall be surface cleanable. Alternative technologies are preferred over the useof fibrous absorptive materials in the airstream of ductwork. Serviceable soundattenuation devices are preferred over the wholesale use of interior ductliners.

3. Control of Airborne Health Hazards

a. Construction operations which may result in the diffusion of dust andother perticulates, toxic gases or other harmful substances in quantitieshazardous to health shall be safeguarded by means of temporary local exhaustventilation or other protective measures to ensure the safety of the public.Where applicable, physically isolate adjacent occupied areas with temporarypartitions, mechanical system isolation, or other practical engineeringcontrols.

b. Prior to building commissioning, indoor air shall be purged with outdoorair. Exhaust airborne particulates and wet pollutant emitters to the buildingexterior in a manner which precludes those health effects commonly associatedwith exposure to construction-related pollutants. Air purging shall be phasedprior to furniture installations to avoid absorption of airborne pollutants andformation of a sink for remission of construction-related pollutants.


4. Lead-Based Paint During Building Alterations

Pre-1980 buildings scheduled for alterations which impact painted surfaces shallbe surveyed for lead content consistent with regulatory requirements and theUniversity's specifications for Industrial Hygiene services. In facilities usedas residential facilities or child care centers, lead-based paint must be abatedto the satisfaction of Maryland Department of the Environment (MDE). Approvedencapsulation products allowed for use in the abatement of lead-painted surfacesare available from MDE.

5. Asbestos in Existing Buildings

Pre-1985 buildings scheduled for alterations which impact building materialsshall be surveyed and assessed for asbestos conditions consistent withregulatory requirements and the University's specifications for IndustrialHygiene services. Where damage or disturbance is anticipated duringconstruction, appropriate corrective action must be designed into the project.Where feasible, designs which avoid or minimize disturbance through in-placemanagement techniques are preferred over wholesale removal.

6. Radon Mitigation

a. New Construction: Where the potential for radon release is identifiedthrough geotechnical studies, measures consistent with the ICC InternationalMechanical Code (IMC) 401.9 shall be proposed to mitigate indoor radonconcentrations below levels which create a health hazard.

b. Alterations: Existing buildings scheduled for slab or structural wallalterations shall be measured for radon levels, where directed by Universityrepresentatives. The University will provide previous radon readings whereavailable. Radon levels exceeding those which require mitigation shall bemanaged consistent with IMC.

7. Guidance Documents

Following are some select guidance documents related to noteworthy EH&S issuesin facilities development.


a. Occupational Safety and Health Administration

1. Stairways and Ladders, OSHA Document 3124 (93)2. Lead in Construction, OSHA Document 3142 (93)

3. Fall Protection in Construction, OSHA 3146 (95)

b. Environmental Protection Agency

1. Office Equipment - Design, Indoor Air Emissions, and Pollution PreventionOpportunities2. Proposed Model Standards and Techniques for control of radon in NewBuildings (FR4/12/93, Vol 58, #68)3. Building air Quality: A Guide for Building Owners and Facility Managers(12/91)4. Standardized EPA Protocol for Characterizing Indoor Air Quality in LargeOffice Buildings (6/94)

c. Maryland Occupational Safety and Health (MOSH)

1. MOSH Guides for Evaluating Indoor Air Quality (7/89)

d. Maryland Department of the Environment

1. Renovating Old Paint Safely: 8 Keys to Maryland's Lead AbatementRegulations2. Lead Paint Hazard Fact Sheets 1-7 (6/92), 8 (1/94)3. MDE Approved Encapsulation Products

e. National Institute of Building Sciences

1. Model Guide Specs for Asbestos Abatement2. Model Guide Specs for Lead Paint Risk Reduction


f. American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists

1. Threshold Limit Values (TLVs) for Chemical Substances and Physical Agentsand Biological Exposure Indices (BEIs), Latest Edition2. Guidelines for the Assessment of Bioaerosols in the Indoor Environment(1990)

g. American Industrial Hygiene Association

1. Industrial Hygiene Audit: manual for Practice (94)

h. American Society for Testing and Materials

1. Provisional Standard for Environmental Regulatory Compliance Audits, PS 112. Provisional Standard for the Study and Evaluation of an Organization'sEnvironmental Management Systems, PS 123. Guide for Risk-Based Corrective Action Applied at Petroleum Release Sites,E 1739

i. National Safety Council

1. Ergonomics: A Practical Guide, 2nd Edition (1993)

j. National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA)

1. Mechanical Cleaning of Non-porous Air Conveyance System Components,Standard 1992-01

END

1. LIST OF ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS (5.1.96)

ACI American Concrete Institute

ADA Americans With Disabilities Act

A/E Architect/Engineer

ADSB Architectural Design Standards Board

AIA American Institute of Architects

AISC American Institute of Steel Construction

ANSI American National Standards Institute

APA American Planning Association

APPA Association of Physical Plant Administrators

ASTM American Society for Testing Materials

ARB Architectural review Board

ASLA American Society of Landscape Architects

BER Budget Expenditure Request

BOCA Building Officials and Code Administrators

BOD Beneficial Occupancy Date

BPW Board of Public Works (State Board: Governor, Comptroller, &Treasurer).

BSU Bowie State University

CA Capital appropriation (type of State Funding)

CBFR Capital Bond Fund Requisition

CCMS Central Control and Monitoring System

CDT Contractor's Design Team

CE Civil Engineer

CEW Cost Estimate Worksheet

CFR Capital Fund Requisition


CIC Computer Implementation Committee

CIP Capital Improvement Projects

CM Construction Manager Management (A unit of DAEC)

CO Change Order

COB Close Of Business

COP Certificate of Participation

CPM Critical Path Method

CPTL Complete Project Tracking Log

COMAR Code Of Maryland Annotated Regulations

CQC Construction Quality Control

CR Capital Renewal (also called Facilities Renewal)

CS Construction Supervisor

CSI Construction Specifications Institute

CVRP Contractor and Vendor Request For Payment

DAEC Department of Architecture, Engineering and Construction (formerlyE&A, DEAS)

DBFP Department of Budget and Fiscal Planning

DCBS Department of Communication & Business Services

DD Design Development (Phase of A/E Services)

DEAS Department of Engineering & Architectural Services (see DAEC)

DES Department of Environmental Safety

DGS Department of General Services (State)

DIM Design Initiation Meeting

D-LOG Project No., Work request No.


DM Deferred Maintenance

DM/P&D Design Manager/Programming & Design (A unit of DAEC)

DNR Department of Natural Resources

DPP Department of Physical Plant (UMCP)

DPS Department of Procurement and Supply

DTR Design Technical Review

E Equipment

E&A Engineering and Architecture (see DEAS)

EE Electrical Engineer

EPA (aka USEPA) Environmental Protection Agency (US)

ES Environmental Safety

F&A Finance and Administration (a unit of DAEC)

FAS Financial Accounting System

FC Finance Committee (UMCP)

FEI Federal Employee ID#

FF&E Furniture, Fixtures, and Equipment

FPWG Facilities Planning Working Group (UMCP Sub-Committee of FinanceCommittee)

FRP Facilities Renewal Program

FSD Full Size Detail

FSU Frostburg State University

FY Fiscal Year

GC General Contractor


GCL General Construction Loan (Type of State Funds)

GFE Government-Furnished Equipment

GFM Government-Furnished Material

GPSSB General Professional Services Selection Board

GSF Gross Square Footage

HEGIS Higher Eduction General Information Survey

ICA Intercollegiate Athletics (UMCP)

ICBO International Conference of Building Officials

ID Interior Design

IDC Indefinite Delivery Contract

ID&E Interior Design and Equipment (a unit of DAEC)

IFB Invitation For Bid

IFCP Institution Funded Construction Program

IS Information Services

JV Journal Voucher

LASP Landscape Architecture and Site Planning (a unit of DAEC)

LRFPC Long Range Facilities Planning Commission

MARC Maryland Annual Request Ceiling

MBI Maryland Biotechnology Institute

MDE Maryland Department of Environment (State)

MG Mechanical Engineer

MDNR Maryland Department of Natural Resources (State)


MFRI Maryland Fire and Rescue Institute

MHEC Maryland Higher Education Commission

MOM Minutes Of Meeting

NASF Net Assignable Square Footage

NCP Non-Capital Project

NEC National Electric Code

NFPA National Fire Protection Association

NIC Not-in-contract

NPC Notification of Project Completion

NTP Notice To Proceed

NTS Not To Scale

OAPP Office of the Associate Provost for Planning

ORPB Office of Resource Planning and Budget

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act

PA Planning Appropriation

PC Project Coordinator

PCB Poly-Chlorinated- Biophenyis

PCM Production Control Manager

PCO Project Close-Out

PCS Procurement for Contractual Service

PCU Production Control Unit

PD Preliminary Design (Phase of A/E Services)

PM Project Manager, Project Management (a unit of DAEC)


PO Project Order

P&O Programming & Design (a unit of DAEC)

P&S Procurement and Supply

RAE Reference Administrative Service

RDPWR Request for Determination of Prevailing Wage Rates

RFA/ORS Request for Alternation/Other Reimbursable Expenses

RFE Request For Estimate

FRI Request For Information

RFP Request For Purchase, Request For Proposal

RFS Request For Services

SCD Substantial Completion Date

SCUB Satellite Central Utilities Building

SD Schematic Design (Phase of A/E Services)

SDC System Development Charges (WSSC)

SFCP System Funded Construction Program

SRC Survey Research Center

SSD Small Scale Drawing

SSU Salisbury State University

T&M Time and Material

TBD To Be Determined

UMAB University of Maryland at Baltimore

UBC Uniform Building Code


UMAES University of Maryland Agricultural Experiment Station

UMES University of Maryland Eastern Shore

UMBC University of Mayland Baltimore Campus

UMCEES University of Maryland Center for Environmental and EstuarineStudies

UMCP University of Maryland College Park

UMSA Univeristy of Maryland System Administration

UMUC University of Maryland University College

UON Unless Otherwise Noted

UPB Unit Price Book

VCAF Vice Chancellor for Administration and Finance

VPA Vice President for Administration

V.I.F. Verify In Field

WAC Work Acceptance Conference

WCC Work Control Center

WIC Work Input Control, Work Initiation Conference

WO Work Order

WOCS Work Order Contracting System

WRA Water Resource Administration

WRN Work Request Number (D-LOG)

WSSC Washington Suburban Sanitary Commission

END

1. MAINTENANCE OPERATION REQUIREMENTS (4.15.97)

A. Adequate space is required in and around each building for the followingmaintenance and operation functions:

1. Elevator Shafts2. Elevator Mechanical Rooms3. Duct and Service Shafts4. (Building) Equipment and Boiler Rooms5. Telecommunication Closets for SwitchingEquipment6. Electrical Closets7. Housekeeping Closets8. Maintenance Storerooms9. Maintenance Shop10. Loading Dock11. Service Parking Spaces (minimum of 3-5) near Building Entrances12. Dumpster/Dumpster Pad adjacent to Building Loading Dock

B. Parking for Service Vehicles shall be provided as follows:

1. Space for buildings with 25,000 GSF or less.2. 1 additional space for each additional 50,000 GSF.Maximum of 5 spaces.

C. All interior spaces shall be identified by name and number.

D. All maintenance spaces shall have (as a minimum) concrete floors whichhave been painted and covered with an epoxy sealer to achieve a non-slip finish.

E. Floor drains are required in building equipment and boiler rooms. Floorsin these rooms shall be sloped to the floor drains. Interior floor drains shalldrain to the sanitary sewer system. Areaway drains shall drain to the stormsystem.

Coordination with DAEC is required to determine the ultimate discharge location(i.e. sanitary vs. storm sewer) for floor drains in rooms where hazardousmaterials or other liquids are stored.

F. Electrical equipment shall be installed on housekeeping pads.

G. Mechanical and electrical rooms should be accessible from the exterior ofthe building via 8' exterior double doors and directly accessible from hallwaysfor ease of access by DPP personnel. Entrances through other rooms are notacceptable.

END

1. STRUCTURAL (2.15.97)

During the life span of a typical campus building many minor and majoralterations are necessary as the requirements of the University change. Thecapability to accommodate alterations must be incorporated into the buildingfrom the outset. Structural systems should be designed to provide some leewayfor increase in load concentrations in the future. They should also be designedto facilitate future alterations, e.g., the cutting of openings for new verticalelements, such as piping, conduit, and ductwork.

A. Codes and Standards

The codes and standards listed here are intended as guidelines only. The listis not meant to restrict the Consultant from using additional guides orstandards.

1. American Concrete Institute: Building Code Requirements for ReinforcedConcrete and Commentary (ACI 318 and ACT 318R).

2. American Concrete Institute: ACI Manual on Concrete Practice.

3. American Concrete Institute: Building code Requirements for MasonryStructures (ACI 530) and Appendix A: Special Provisions for Seismic Design andSpecifications for Masonry Structures (ACI 530.1).

4. American Institute of Steel Construction: Manual of Steel Construction.

5. American Iron & Steel Institute: Cold-formed Steel Design Manual.

6. American Welding Society: Structural Welding Code AWS D1.1.

7. American Welding Society: Structural Welding Code, Reinforcing Steel, AWSD1.4.

8. American Aluminum Manufacturers' Association: Aluminum Handbook.

9. Steel Deck Institute, Inc.: Design Manual for Composite Decks, FormDecks, and Roof Decks.

10. Steel Joist Institute: Specifications.

11. Seismology Committee, Structural Engineers' Association of California:Recommended Lateral Force Requirements and Commentary.


12. American Institute of Timber Construction: Timber Construction Manual.

13. National Forest Products Association: National Design Specifications forStress Grade Lumber and Its Fastenings.

14. American Society of Civil Engineers: Minimum Design Loads for Buildingsand Other Structures, ASCE 7.

B. Loads

1. Floor and Roof Loading

The Consultant shall provide, as a minimum, a uniformly distributed live load of100 pound per square foot in all areas of the building, unless otherwise notedin the Facility Program. Roofs shall be constructed for a minimum of 30 poundsper square foot. In areas requiring special attention to floor loading, e.g.,library stacks, heavy equipment and machinery, etc., the Consultant shallinvestigate the specific support requirements of these areas and design forthese spaces accordingly. In no event shall the design live load be less thanwhat is required by the applicable codes.

Do not use live load reductions for horizontal framing members and columns, orload-bearing walls supporting the top floor or roof.

2. Wind and Snow Load

For the purpose of code, wind, and snow load determination, UMCP buildings aredesignated as "standard occupancy" structures with corresponding ImportanceFactor I and Ip equal to 1.0.

C. Structural Systems

1. Steel Framing Systems

a. Unshored composite steel beams deflect under the weight of concrete slabsat the time of placement. In order to achieve a level floor, additionalconcrete may need to be poured. Where unshored construction is used, theadditional dead load caused by the increased concrete thickness should beaccounted for in the structural design and specification.


b. Shored composite steel beams do not deflect under concrete placement,resulting in less cost of material for concrete and steel. These savings mayoffset the costs of shoring. Once the shoring is removed, the floor deflects.This type of construction results in a floor that is less level than an unshoredsystem.

c. Cambered composite beams and girders may produce the most level floors. Acamber should be considered for beams longer than 25 feet. The camber shouldequal the deflection calculated for the combined dead load of wet concrete,steel deck and steel beams. Superimposed dead and live loads should be excludedfrom the calculation.

2. Concrete Framing Systems

a. Cast-In-Place Systems that have fewer limitations in cutting openingsduring future alterations are preferred over other systems.

b. Precast floor framing systems should not be used for office buildingsunless the design can be demonstrated to adapt well to future changes inlocations of heavy partitions or equipment. Precast systems may be consideredfor low-rise structures such as parking garages, industrial buildings, andstorage and maintenance facilities.

c. Pre-tensioning and Post-tensioning as with precast floor framing, shouldnot be used unless the design can be demonstrated to not impede futureflexibility. Post-tensioned beams may be used where code allows in beams.

D. Stability and Serviceability Criteria

1. Progressive Collapse

The design structure must not be subject to progressive collapse, as defined inthe BOCA National Building Code. The failure of a beam or slab should notresult in failure of the structural system below or in adjacent bays. In caseof column failure, the damage should be limited to the bays supported by thatcolumn.


2. Vibration of Floor Systems

Transient vibration induced by passing traffic or footfall should be minimized.

3. Corrosion Protection

a. Structures in salt environments must have a positive means of corrosionprotection. Structures requiring protection include concrete foundationsexposed to saline ground-water, parking decks, bridges, and pavements where de-icing salts are used, and structures exposed to salt-laden air.

b. Steel. Structural steel exposed to the elements must have a protectivecoating on all steel surfaces. Small, isolated structural steel elements mayhave hot dipped, galvanized zinc coating or coal tar epoxy paint. Largerexposed steel structures, such as parking, should use a two-coat systemconsisting of an organic zinc rich urethane or epoxy primer, shop applied overblast cleaned surfaces followed by a field applied finish coat.

c. Concrete. Make provisions for crack control and employ the followingmethods, alone or in combination, according to the severity of the condition:

1. Epoxy coated reinforcing bars.

2. Concrete surface sealers.

3. Corrosion inhibiting concrete additives.

4. Microsilica concrete used in lieu of additives.

D. Concrete Elements in Parking Structures. Protect the concrete in parkingstructures or below building levels by using corrosion inhibiting additives,epoxy coated reinforcing bars, and a concrete surface sealer. Epoxy coatedreinforcing bars should be used for the top bars of the concrete beam and slabconstruction and the stirrups of beams and spandrel beams. They should not beused for the bottom bars in beams nor for the reinforcement of columns andwalls.


4. Construction Tolerances

Concrete Floor Slab Finish Tolerances should be measured in accordance with ASTME1155 and should comply with ACI 117: Standard Specification for Tolerances forConcrete Construction and Materials.

5. Protection of Adjoining Property

a. Protective measures, including those required by local code, must be takento avoid the effect of the structure on adjoining buildings both during andafter construction.

b. Sheeting, Shoring, and Underpinning, protecting the banks of theexcavation or adjoining buildings must be made the full responsibility of theconstruction contractor.

c. Footings should not project beyond property lines.

E. Attachment of Nonstructural Elements

All nonstructural elements, components, and equipment located within a buildingor on the site must be anchored to withstand gravity and wind loads.

1. Exterior Cladding

a. Exterior cladding must have connections and joints that permit relativemovement between stories. Connections should have sufficient ductility androtation capacity to preclude the possibility of brittle failure in connectionwelds or fracture in concrete. Inserts in concrete should be attached to, orhooked around, reinforcing steel.

b. Slotted or oversized holes at cladding connections should be used topermit movement parallel to the plane of the building skin.

c. Window frames should be positively anchored to resist lateral loads.Clearance and flexible mountings should be provided to permit thermal movementand minimize glass breakage in storms and earthquakes.


2. Partitions

a. Nonstructural, rigid partitions must be supported by the structure in sucha way that they cannot inadvertently become load-carrying elements.

b. Masonry walls should be isolated from the structure of the floor above bya gap and be restrained by continuous or intermittent steel angles at the top ofthe wall on both sides or by steel straps extending into the grout of the wall.Masonry walls should be isolated from concrete columns by flexible joints.

c. In full height walls, the top of a steel stud should be separated from thetrack to allow for vertical deflection of the slab.

d. Building expansion joints must be carried through crossing partitions.

3. Ceiling Systems

Suspended Grid Systems must support light fixtures that are not supportedindependently. Suspended ceilings, including air diffusers, light fixtures andspeakers, must be braced as required. Suspended ceilings must be isolated fromwalls which extend above the ceiling to the building structure.

4. Monolithic Ceiling. Gypsum board ceiling should be fastened with largehead nails or screws. Building expansion joints must be carried through allmonolithic ceilings.

F. Furnishings and Equipment

1. Fixed Casework and Equipment.

Fixed casework and built-in equipment, such as storage racks and built-inbookcases 5 feet or more in height, should be anchored to floor and walls.Where cabinets or shelving are hung from walls, their weight must be included inthe partition design.


2. Mechanical and Electrical Equipment

Equipment Anchorage. Mechanical, electrical, and plumbing equipment listedbelow should be anchored to prevent overturning or sliding due to lateralforces. For lateral loads due to wind, the provisions of the BOCA NationalBuilding Code should be followed.

Air-handling UnitsBattery RacksBoilersChillersControl PanelsCooling TowersEmergency GeneratorsHeat ExchangersMotorsPanelboardsPumpsSwitchgearTanksTransformersUninterruptible Power SuppliesVessels

G. Alterations in Existing Buildings and Historic Structures

Alteration requires ingenuity and imagination. It is inherently unsuited torigid set of rules. Each case is unique. It is recognized that totalcompliance with standards may not be possible in every case. Where seriousdifficulties arise, creative solutions that achieve the intent of the standardare encouraged and should be presented for the review and approval of DAEC.

END

2. BIKE LANES (2.15.97)

A. In addition to specific project requirements, all new road constructionand road replacement or improvement projects on the College Park Campus shallprovide for minimum four (4) foot bike lanes adjacent to the curb or a minimum14 foot usable lane width. Physical hazards such as excessive drop-offs at thegutter pan, open joints, unsafe drain grates or utility covers will not beallowed in the area to be used by bicycles.

B. Bike lanes shall be developed in accordance with the latest edition of thefollowing Design Guidelines and Standards:

1. North Carolina Bicycle Facilities Planning and Design Guidelines

North Carolina Department of TransportationOffice of Bicycle and Pedestrian TransportationP. O. Box 25201Raleigh, North Carolina 27611-5201Telephone number: 919-773-2804Facsimile number: 919-715-4422

2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials(AASHTO), Guide for the Development of Bicycle Facilities (1991)

3. AASHTO Standard - Specifications for Highway Bridges, Fourteenth Edition(1989)

4. AASHTO Roadside Design Guide (1989)

5. AASHTO Maintenance Manual (1987)

END

2. EXTERIOR CONSIDERATIONS (8.1.96)

A. Provide termite treatment as required (particularly for existing facilityrenovations).

B. Pest control contracts are required during the construction phase forrodent control.

C. Include exterior steps, porticos, and adjacent plazas in the design of newprojects as well as renovations.

D. Connect building downspouts to campus storm drain system. Specify castiron boots minimum of 4' above ground.

E. Trees, shrubs, plants, sod, seed, etc. shall be coordinated by DPP GroundsMaintenance Division.

F. Sidewalks shall be at least eight (8) feet wide unless otherwise specifiedby the University. Minimize the use of steps; ramps conforming with ADA arepreferred.

G. Walks for fire vehicle access shall be in accordance with state fire code,state building code, and UMCP design guidelines for fire protection and safety.

H. Footings to be a minimum of 2 feet 6 inches below finished grade and reston undisturbed soil.

I. Properly sign and number building(s) and rooms.

J. Exterior signs shall be placed in such a manner to eliminate theneed for mowing beneath or around the sign.

K. A minimum of one (1) 3/4" freeze proof hose bib every 100 feet. and two(2) weather proof duplex electrical outlets shall be located on each face of abuilding.

L. Provide sign height to eliminate interference with pedestrian traffic.

M. Provide positive slope away from buildings. Include adequate drainage toeliminate water from ponding at building entrances.

N. Design exterior building features to discourage pigeon roosting.

O. Roadway, crosswalks, and street markings shall be as required from MSHAspecifications.

P. Restrict the use of raised, interior parking lot islands.

2. EXTERIOR CONSIDERATIONS (8.1.96)

Q. Exterior painted surfaces should be discouraged and maintenance freeexterior surfaces encouraged.

R. Avoid types of plant materials that could promote safety, security ormaintenance problems. Also Reference 2. Fire Apparatus AccessibilityGuidelines.

S. Do not provide mowing strip next to building surfaces.

END

2. FIRE APPARATUS ACCESSIBILITY (8.1.96)

A. Introduction

The development of the sites around buildings and groups of buildings has amajor impact on fire protection provided by fire suppression forces. Fires andemergencies will occur wherever humans are present, and when emergencies occurwithin buildings, the problems become magnified. A minimal response time to thescene of an emergency is vital. The response patterns of emergency equipmentare determined by time/distance relationships with surfaces, vehicular barriers,and water supply. The University maintains the responsibility for insuringproper access for emergency vehicles on the campus.

Fire Apparatus Access Design Guidelines reflect a number of variables, such asbuilding design and occupancy, geographical location, and water supply, whichaffect the nature and scope of fire suppression operations.

B. Purpose

The purpose of Fire apparatus Access Design Guildlines is to insure provision ofnecessary access by emergency vehicles, personnel, and equipment of any scene ofemergency on the College Park Campus.

C. Scope

The Fire Access Design Guidelines are intended for the construction of newbuildings and site development and for the renovation or change of existingbuildings and sites, as fire apparatus access must be maintained and improved.The guidelines are intended to be flexible, requiring coordination with othersite development requirements. The guidelines attempt to define the intent ofthe State Fire Prevention Code for fire lanes.

D. Mandatory Codes

The Maryland State Fire Prevention Code adopts by reference the BOCA NationalFire Prevention Code which provides that "the code official shall require anddesignate public or private fire lanes as deemed necessary for the efficient andeffective operation of fire apparatus. Fire lanes shall have a minimum width of18 feet." (Section F-311) Where buildings are under construction, alteration ordemolition, fire department access and fire lane requirements are defined bySection F-315. The State Building Code (BOCA National) provides an option toincrease building area provided there is access to an open space by a street orfire lane 18 feet wide (Section 506).


E. Reference Standards

The latest edition of the following code and standards include fire laneinformation and guidance:

NFPA 1 Fire Prevention CodeNFPA 241 Safeguarding Construction, Alteration and Demolition OperationsNFPA 1141 Fire Protection in Planned Building Groups

F. Related Guidelines

Water Service and Fire Hydrants

1. Definitions

a. Access Control means the method used to limit access, such as breakable orremovable bollards, gates or control arms.

b. Entry Point means the area of transition from one type of fire lane toanother.

c. Fire Department Connection means piped inlet or outlet which is used bythe fire department to supply water to a fire protection system.

d. Fire Hydrant means a valved connection on a water supply system which isused to supply water to the Fire Department.

e. Fire Lane means a roadway, driveway, sidewalk or other area necessary forthe passage or positioning of fire apparatus, personnel, or equipment. A firelane is a Street (Type I), Fire Access Road (Type II), Fire Access Sidewalk(Type III), or Fire Access Surface (Type IV), Access Control, Entry Point, orarea of Fire Protection Water Supply.

1. Type I means a paved surface open to the passage of all vehicles at alltimes. (Street)

2. Type II means a paved surface open to the passage of fire apparatus andemergency vehicles, but closed to the general public or controlled to allow onlyauthorized entry. (Fire Access Road)


3. Type III means a paved surface ordinarily used for pedestrian traffic, butrequired for emergency access. (Fire Access Sidewalk)

4. Type IV means a ground cover not 100% paved, but available for emergencyaccess. (Fire Access Surface)

f. Fire Protection Water Supply is the prescribed amount of water requiredfor a building, hazard, or fire protection system calculated by the methods andstandards of the Washington Suburban Sanitary Commission, Insurance ServicesOffice and the National Fire Protection Association. Fire Protection WaterSupply includes Water Mains, Fire Hydrants, and fire Department Connections.

g. High Rise Building Means a building or structure defined in the High RiseBuilding Safety Law or the State of Maryland. The Law defines all buildingsfour (4) or more stories or 45 feet above the lowest grade as High-RiseBuildings.

1. High-Rise Buildings above 75 feet are fully sprinklered.

2. High-Rise Buildings below 75 feet = fully sprinklered -OR- accessibilityprovided on the sides (50%) of the building perimeter by a street (minimum 21feet in width) and accessible to allow fire department aerial equipment to reachthe building to 75 feet in height.

2. Fire Lane Structure

a. Fire Lanes shall be structurally capable of supporting minimum vehicularweights of twenty-five (25) tons (35 tons is preferred) in all weather-conditions.

b. Fire Lanes shall be clear of all obstructions overhead to a minimum heightof 13 feet 6 inches (14 feet is preferred) above grade.


c. Fire Lanes shall provide a complete surface adequate for turning fireapparatus. The turning path shall have a 30 foot minimum inside turning radiusand an 18 foot path width increasing to 22 feet at the widest part of the turn.

d. Fire Lane slopes and gradients shall not restrict fire apparatus movementor position, but provide adequate drainage. (Should not exceed 10% and 3%within 100 feet of intersections)

e. Fire Lanes shall be structured and maintained clear of all obstructions orimpediments.

3. Fire Lane Design

a. Fire Lanes shall be designed as required by the Maryland High-RiseBuilding Safety Law where the law applies.

b. Fire Lanes shall be installed within ten (10) feet of each building on allsides except as noted below:

1. Fire Lanes shall be installed on a minimum of two sides of a building (50%of the perimeter) where no more than three (3) levels or thirty (30) feet existabove the lowest grade level.

2. Fire Lanes shall be installed on a minimum of one side of a building (25%of the perimeter) where no more than three (3) levels or thirty (30) feet existabove the lowest grade level and the building is fully sprinklered. Exception:A building may require a wet standpipe or additional access where large groundspaces are provided.

3. Fire Lanes shall be installed on a minimum of two sides of a building (50%of the perimeter) exceeding three (3) levels or thirty (30) feet above thelowest grade level and the building is fully sprinklered and a compete wetstandpipe system is available for fire department use.


c. No less than two (2) Fire Lanes (primary and secondary) shall be providedto reach each building or building complex. Any combination of fire lane typesmay be used to provide fire apparatus access to a building within noted traveldistance and use restrictions. Exception: Additional Fire Lanes may berequired where a deficiency of Fire Protection Water Supply or an extra hazardexist.

d. Fire Lanes shall be marked as required to permit legal enforcement asidentified below:

1. Curbs shall be painted yellow and stenciled in red "NO PARKING FIRE LANE".

2. Signs shall be red letters on white background "NO PARKING FIRE LANE".

3. A maximum spacing of 75 feet between signs or stencils is required.

4. Fire Lane Type I - Street

A street shall meet the same minimum requirements as Fire Access Roads.

5. Fire Lane Type II - Fire Access Road

a. Fire Access Roads shall be provided to every building where no more thanthree (3) levels or thirty (30) feet exist above the lowest grade level and setback more than 400 feet from a Public Road.

b. Fire Access Roads shall be provided to every building exceeding three (3)or more levels or thirty (30) feet above the lowest grade level and set backmore than 200 feet from a street.

c. Any dead-end more than three hundred (300) feet long shall be providedwith a turn-around at the closed end of at least ninety (90) feet in outsidediameter.

6. Fire Lane Type III - Fire Access Sidewalk

a. Fire Access Sidewalks leading toward a Fire Lane at a building shall be noless than ten (10) feet in width increasing in width to accommodate turns.


b. Fire Access Sidewalks at a building shall be no less than 18 feet inwidth. No obstruction is permitted where aerial fire apparatus positioning isrequired.

c. Fire Access Sidewalks may be used as a secondary fire access to everybuilding set-back no more than four hundred (400) feet from a street or FireAccess Road.

7. Fire Lane Type IV - Fire Access Surface

a. Fire Access Surfaces shall be the same minimum dimensions as a Fire AccessSidewalk.

b. Fire Access Surfaces may be provided in lieu of Fire Access Sidewalks as asecondary means of access.

c. Fire Access Surfaces shall not exceed two hundred (200) feet traveldistance.

d. A Fire Access Surface may be used as a border for a Fire Access Sidewalkat a building, provided that a minimum sidewalk width of ten (10) feet ismaintained.

e. The boundaries of a surface shall be obvious or marked so that the firedepartment can readily see the limits of the surface.

8. Entry Points

a. Entry Points shall be of sufficient size to allow fire apparatus turninginto a fire lane on a completely paved surface without the necessity of stoppingand backing up. (note 2.c.)

b. Curb cuts or drop roll top curbs shall be provided at Entry Points whenthe elevation difference is more than (4) inches in height.

c. No less than two (2) Entry Points, as separate and remote from each otheras possible, shall be provided for fire apparatus access to every building,building complex, or courtyard.


9. Access Control

a. Access Control devices shall be approved (in accordance with the projectprocedure) for each individual application.

b. Use only the minimum number of bollards required for access control.

1. Bollards shall not present a hazard when removed.

2. Bollards shall be the UMCP standard breakable or removable bollard(Reference SECTION 2 SITE STANDARDS).

c. Each Access Control device shall have a simple and uniform method ofoperation. No more than one (1) locking method shall be provided on each AccessControl Device. Locks and keyways shall be "UMCP FD-1."

d. Any swinging gate shall swing in the direction of entry or in bothdirections.

e. No more than one (1) Access Control may be provided for any Fire Lane orcombination of fire lanes to a building or building complex.

10. Fire Protection Water Supply

a. Sufficient numbers and types of Fire Lanes shall exist to deliver theamount of water required by calculated fire flow demand to the building,building complex, or hazard.

b. Fire Hydrants shall be located on Fire Lanes as required by this section.

1. Fire Lanes shall be arranged so that the distance from Fire Hydrants tobuildings is minimal, but not more than two hundred (200) feet for the firsthydrant (primary) and four hundred (400) feet for the second hydrant(secondary).

2. Where the same Fire Hydrant is used for a number of buildings, the FireHydrant shall be located at a Fire Lane intersection.


3. Fire Hydrants shall not be located closer than fifteen (15) feet to anEntry Point. Avoid obstructions to fire hydrant operation or visibility.

4. Fire Hydrants at Entry Points with Access Control shall be located at theexterior (public) side of the Access Control.

c. Fire Lanes shall be arranged so that the distance from a Fire Lane to aFire Department Connection is no further than 100 feet.

d. Fire Department Connections shall be visible and unobstructed. Theplanting plan shall be arranged not to degrade visibility or make obstructionsover time.

11. Construction, Alteration and Demolition Plans and Temporary Fire Access

a. Utilize existing fire lanes and access.

b. Observe guidelines above.

c. Follow the information and guidance of NFPA 241.

END

2. FIRE HYDRANTS AND ASSOCIATED WATER MAINS (8.1.96)

GENERAL

A. SCOPE

Design of new water service and fire protection and alterations to existingwater service and fire protection.

B. RELATED WORK

Coordinate design of all other water systems, including but not limited todomestic services, irrigation, and fire suppression systems.

C. MANDATORY CODES AND STANDARDS

1. State of Maryland Fire Prevention Code (BOCA Fire Prevention Code --Section 516)2. State of Maryland Model Performance Code (BOCA National Building Code --Section 917)3. WSSC - Washington Suburban Sanitary Commission (Note: Projects not inthe jurisdiction of the Washington Suburban Sanitary Commission (WSSC),substitute local water authority, State of Maryland Plumbing Code, International(BOCA) Plumbing Code and NFPA 24 as applicable).

D. REFERENCE STANDARDS

1. AWWA - American Water Works Association2. ICC - International Code Council (BOCA) Plumbing Code3. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems4. NFPA 14 - Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems5. NFPA 24 - Recommended Practice for Private Fire Service Mains and TheirAppurtenances6. NFPA 291 - Standard for Fire Flow Testing and Marking of Hydrants7. NFPA 1963 - Standard for Fire Hose Connections8. State of Maryland Plumbing Code

E. RELATED GUIDELINES

1. Fire Apparatus Access Design Guidelines2. Fire Sprinkler and Standpipe Systems Design Guidelines


F. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1. The campus receives water supply from WSSC and by legal agreement,complies with WSSC rules and regulations, including, but not limited to designstandards and specifications.

2. The campus facilities are serviced by two methods: metered and unmetered.

a. Metered: The contiguous campus is connected to WSSC by a number ofunderground fire flow bypass meters. The double meters record ordinary domesticflow and when large volumes are demanded, open a second, larger size meter.

b. Unmetered: Individual buildings and locations generally not on thecontiguous campus have unmetered systems where all fire protection systems aresupervised for flow with an executed fire supervision agreement with WSSC. Thealternative ia a meter set in the building or an outside shed constructed forthe purpose.

3. The campus system between the WSSC meters and the various buildings andsite facilities is the "campus on-site" system, and consists of mains up to 12inches in diameter of various ages and conditions. Individual buildings andlocations not on the campus are "on-site" systems for those buildings orcomplexes and usually consist of a single main.

4. The campus on-site system is the underground distribution from WSSC metersfor all campus building and facilities including, but not limited to, domestic,irrigation, mechanical, fire protection systems, and fire hydrants. Individualbuilding or complex on-site systems provide services required for the individualbuilding or facilities.

5. The campus on-site system with multiple supply point meters, loops, andgrids minimally performs at 2,000 gallons per minute (gpm) at 20 pounds persquare inch (psi) fire flow over almost all the system. Individual building orcomplex facilities were provided fire flow in accordance with the calculatedfacility requirements.


G. WATER SERVICE

1. Sufficient fire flow shall be provided for the individual project asdetermined by a recognized standard method. Fire flow is additive to all otherdemand flows. The campus on-site system extension by loop, grid, or individualfire hydrant shall result in not less than 2,000 gpm at 20 psi residual.Individual buildings or complexes shall meet minimum WSSC criteria (1,000 gpm atthe last fire hydrant and 500 gpm additional at the adjacent fire hydrant at notless than 20 psi residual).

2. The minimum size of additions or replacement mains to the campus on-sitesystem (loop or grid) is 8-inch. Mains to single fire hydrants are minimum 6-inch but must maintain minimum fire flow. The minimum size of on-site mains toindividual buildings shall be as calculated and meet WSSC criteria (minimum 8-inch where the fire flow requirement is over 1,000 gpm).

H. VALVES

1. In the campus on-site system, gate valves shall be provided tosectionalize the system so that any outage will minimally affect fireprotection.

a. Valves shall be provided for each hydrant lead-in connection so that nomore than one fire hydrant may be out of service at any time.

b. Valves shall be installed so that fire hydrants and fire suppressionsystems for an individual building will not be out of service at the same time.

c. Valves shall be installed on each side of a tee or cross to maintain theloop or grid flow.

2. Valves shall be located in streets, sidewalks or other paved surfaces.Where a paved surface is not possible, valve boxes shall be set in a 12 inch by12 inch by 4 inch deep reinforced concrete square.

3. Valve box covers shall be marked "WSSC WATER" where owned and maintainedby WSSC and "WATER" on the campus on-site system and where owned or maintainedby the University.


I. FIRE HYDRANTS

1. The number and spacing of fire hydrants provided shall be sufficient forthe calculated fire flow and distribution requirements.

a. The campus on-site system requirement is approximately 300 feet betweenfire hydrants. Individual building or complex fire hydrant spacing is projectdependent (WSSC criteria for dense, built-up areas is 250 to 300 feet).

b. Provide additional fire hydrants if the building is more than 300 feetfrom an existing campus on-site fire hydrant or public (WSSC) fire hydrant.

c. Fire hydrants should be available so that the first hydrant is no morethan 200 feet from the building and the second fire hydrant no more than 400feet from the building.

d. A fire hydrant shall be within 100 feet of a fire protection system firedepartment connection (siamese).

2. Fire hydrants shall be located only on streets and fire lanes as follows:

a. Locate at street and fire lane intersections but not within 15 feet of theintersection.

b. Locate fire hydrants on public sides of street or fire lane accesscontrols (gates, bollards).

c. Locate fire hydrants 2 feet from curbs and streets (per WSSC detail).Exceptions shall not be granted except in case of unusual site conditions.

d. The pumper connection shall directly face the street or fire lane.Elevations of the center line of the pumper connection shall be between 12 and24 inches above finished grade.

e. Locate fire hydrants so there are no obstructions to operation orvisibility.

3. Fire hydrants shall be as specified by WSSC.


4. Fire hydrants shall be painted as follows:

a. WSSC owned and maintained are grey with green tops (WSSC specifications).

b. UMCP on-site campus system (metered) are chrome yellow (paint #_________or equal) with black (paint # ___________ or equal) tops and caps (2,000 gpm andover at 20 psi). (Note: for fire hydrants under 2,000 gpm, the cap and topcolors are as listed in NFPA 291).

c. UMCP individual building or facility fire hydrants (unmetered) are red(paint #_______ or equal).

5. Unmetered fire hydrants under the WSSC fire supervision agreement areelectrically supervised as follows:

a. Waterflow alarm (pressure) switch (listed or approved) in NEMA 4 enclosurestrapped securely to the hydrant barrel above grade. The switch is providedwith a 1/2 inch tap into the hydrant barrel.

b. Metallic conduit, minimum 3/4 inch rigid with conductors.

c. Underground to building. Connect to building monitoring system or firealarm system unless contracting with commercial alarm company (depending onproject location and scope).

J. CONSTRUCTION, ALTERATIONS, AND DEMOLITION

1. Design water service and fire hydrants to be installed, in service, andaccessible to fire department apparatus before construction begins orcombustibles are present on the site.

2. Design installation to minimize outages of existing fire protection.

3. Design replacement fire protection to be installed prior to demolition ofexisting fire protection.

4. Require that fire hydrants not in service be provided with a secure signor marking which states "OUT OF SERVICE" or install a secured opaque covering.

END

2. IRRIGATION SYSTEMS (5.1.96)

A. GENERAL

1. Irrigation Piping

a. Irrigation piping shall be pvc Sdr-21 except for the following.

• Pipes under sidewalks shall be Sch.-40.• Pipes under roadways shall be Sch.-80.

b. Sch.-40 or Sch.-80 pipes shall be 1 size larger than the Sdr-21, so thatG.P.M. requirements below can be met.

c. Pipe over 3" no matter the Scd. or Sdr.rating shall be gasketed due toexpansion and contraction during winter and summer months.

2. Main Lines

a. Main lines shall be sized 100% larger than largest zone on the system.

b. Main lines under 2" going under sidewalks shall be the next size equal toor over the A.W.W.A. guidelines and consist of PVC Sch.-40. for strength and noteffect the designed system as stated above except for 6" pipe and over. Pipe 6"and over will be sized to the next available size.

c. Piping Sch.-80 shall be piped the next size larger than the Sdr.-21 aslong as it meets system requirement above. Reference see requirement for 6"pipe and over 2.a. above.

d. Systems shall be designed at no more than 70 PSI after all device and pipefriction losses have been accounted for, or a pump is in the plans to make upthe pressure to an adequate level.

e. Systems shall have a starting PSI of 80 PSI, unless a 16 hour observationof source from 4 am to 8 pm Monday through Friday proves differently. Testingshall be done during the spring months (April - June). No testing shall beaccepted if conducted during a holiday.

3. Solenoid Valves

a. Solenoid valves shall be connected with the tee from main to a 45? elbowat least 8" above main line but under 12" from grade.2. IRRIGATION SYSTEMS (5.1.96)

b. Backflow preventers and meters shall have 2 ball valves each, one in frontof each device, one behind each device. For easy access there shall be oneunion in front of each device and one union behind each device.

c. Meters and backflow preventers shall meet W.S.S.C's requirements regardingroom in front, behind, and below each device.

d. Backflow devices and meters shall be the same size as the irrigation main.

e. Pipes from potable water to backflow and meter to the undergroundirrigation main will be copper type K at the time it shall be changed to PVC.

f. No system pipes will be used to support these devices, a separate rackshall be installed.

g. Spray or rotor system that is 45 psi or less can have a drip system addedon as long as the pressure to run system stays 45 psi. If this is utilized evenprecipation rates shall be maintained and a 200 mesh filter shall be installedat point of drip connection with lateral and a pressure regulator shall beinstalled before zone valve.

B. Drip Irrigation System

1. Drip Irrigation

Shall have polybutylene, polyethylene or PVC Sdr-21 pipe only, and be a loopedsystem, designed at 45 PSI or less. In addition it shall have:

a. 200 mesh or disk filter before pressure reducerb. Pressure reducer before electric solenoid valvec. Vacuum relief valve at highest elevation of systemd. Flush valve at lowest elevation of system

e. Pressure reducing solenoid valve (see Valves).

2. The potable main installations shall be the same as A.3.e above, exceptwhen approved by University Department of Physical Plant Grounds MaintenanceDepartment.


3. Can be adapted to existing or in conjunction with spray or rotor zone aslong as above are met, and will not need a separate solenoid valve.

4. Emmiters shall have been tested by Center for Irrigation Technologies(CIT) for 5 years and have a Coefficient Value of 0.03% (CV) as given by CIT.

C. Spray Heads

1. Spray heads shall have nozzle-turret sizes to match precipitation rates+/- .027 in/hr. and not use more than 3.7 GPM at 30 PSI nor exceed 7.86 in/hr.precip. rate. In addition, spray heads shall have:

a. Internal check valve that hold up to and over 8 feet in elevation. Inaddition, it must be serviceable from top of head.

b. Stem pressure regulator to prevent excessive water run-off saving waterand to maintain all heads on system at a even pressure.

c. Pop-up head sizes 4-6-12 inches in height.

d. Trajectory of 25?. In addition, spray heads shall have been tested by CITwith a Coefficient Value not to exceed 1.3%cv.

2. Spray systems shall have been evaluated against a comparable drip system,and will only be used if drip system is found not to be effective and systemswill have a drip system around zones next to roads and sidewalks.

D. Medium Rotors

1. Under no circumstances will golf or large rotors or impacts of any type orsize be used.

2. Medium rotors shall pop up at least 4" to 6" and not exceed 20 GPM. Inaddition it shall have a:

a. Radius of 38', but not more than 62'

b. Spacing of 38', but nor more than 74'.

3. System heads shall have a 200% or physical head to physical head coverage,not have a precip. rate over .95 in/hr, and operate between 30 but not more than80 PSI system pressure. In addition it shall have:

a. One (1") inch female npt pipe threads


b. At least 4 nozzles or turrets but no more than 6 sizes

c. Adjustable arc from 40? - 360? in 10 degree increments, and have adedicated 360 full circle non adjustable head

d. At least a 5 year warrantee. In addition, it shall conform to SectionC.2. above.

E. Controllers

1. Controllers shall be TC-2 compatable and UL listed and shall have a:

a. Rain shutdown program programmable from 1-99 days

b. Electrical input of 117 VAC +/- 10%

c. Output voltage of 26.5 VAC at 1.5 A.

d. Station load of 24 VAC

e. Diagnostic circuit breaker that skips over overloaded circuits

f. Backup power supply fuse and holder

g. program backup non-volatile

h. Self-contained 10 year lithium memory

i. Battery backup 9 VDC nicad rechargeable with an established life of 3-5days without power during outage

j. Lifetime lightning and surge protection warrantee

k. Cycle and soak program without having to tie up another program or starttime

l. Programmable day on day off

m. Four programs with 8 start times per program, programmable in quarter hourincrements

n. 365 day calendar that adjust for leap year

o. Non-volatile memory for Time, Program, and Program retention

p. Master valve on/off by station2. IRRIGATION SYSTEMS (5.1.96)

q. Station status indicator lights and sensor status indicator light

r. Programmable under battery power

s. Vandal and weather resistant cabinets and key lockable door

t. Odd/even/cyclical programming schedules

u. Water budget program programmable in 10% increments from 0-200%

v. Test program variable from 1-99 minutes with a default of 2 minutes.

2. Controllers shall be installed with a power cut off switch for controlleronly and 2 outlets within 1' from controller and be connected to a ground faultbreaker. Breaker information shall be printed on front cover with buildingname, room, and panel number.

3. Controllers installed inside or on outside of building shall be 5' fromfloor or grade, and have a clearance of 30" on all sides and in front of foraccessibility.

4. Controllers shall have three (3) lightning rods spaced 8' apart in atriangle formation. These rods should be covered by 6" round valve boxes.

F. Small Rotors

1. Small rotor shall have a minimum of 4 but no more than 6 nozzles orturrets and not use more than 9.46 GPM, and operate at pressures of 25 but nomore than 65 PSI, and shall have a:

a. Precip rate of at least .25 but no more than 1.26 in/hr.

b. Spacing no less than 16' but no more than 50'

c. Trajectory low angle 11?-15? and normal 23?-25?

d. Have Arc adjustments from 25? to 350? and a separate 360? head non-adjustable. All rotors to be adjustable wet or dry

e. Three (3) year warrantee

f. Conform with ASAE S398.1 and have been tested by CIT.


G. Electric Valves

Electric valves shall be pressure regulating and heavy duty plastic and have a:

1. Course threaded solenoid

2. Pressure regulating range of 15-100 PSI

3. Thumb wheel adjustment.

H. Miscellaneous

1. Under no circustance will water be allowed to hit sidewalks or road.

2. Systems shall have one (1) reduced pressure backflow preventer and one (1)meter, both of which shall pass WSSC permit requirements.

3. Valves will be installed with 7 fittings, 1 tee from main 4-45's, 2 maleadapters only, with the valve resting 8" above the pipe.

END

2. REFORESTATION (11.15.96)

Section 1 of the Forest Conservation Act (Chapter 255, Laws of Maryland 1991)contains the provisions of the Forest Conservation Program, includingconservation thresholds, afforestation and reforestation standards, andrequirements for forest stand delineation and forest conservation plans. TheProgram provides for the applicability of its requirements to any public orprivate subdivision plan or application for a grading or sediment control permitby any person, including a unit of State or local government, on areas 40,000square feet or more. These provisions are codified as Natural ResourcesArticle, Sec. 5-1601--5-1613, Annotated Code of Maryland.

Section 2 of the Act amends Natural Resources Article, Sec. 5-103 (the"Reforestation Act"). Section 5-103 required units of State government andpersons using State funding for construction activities to minimize the cuttingor clearing of trees and to contribute up to $500 an acre to a ReforestationFund if the area cut or cleared was one acre or more. Section 2 amends Section5-103 by increasing the reforestation fee to 10 cents per square foot of thearea required to be planted. For any publicly financed construction activity..., the requirements of the Forest Conservation Program apply.

All projects shall be developed in accord with the Forest Conservation Act andits pertinent Regulations, 1991. A thorough review of the statute, theregulations, and the Forest conservation Manual are necessary for a completeunderstanding of the law. These responsibilities can be extensive. Copies ofall of these documents may be obtained from the Division of State Documents,P.O. Box 2249, Annapolis, MD 21404-2249.

Additional information may be obtained by contacting:

Department of Natural ResourcesPublic Lands - Forestry Division201 Babtist Street Suite #22Salisbury, MD 21801-4979Phone: 410-543-6745

END

2. PAVEMENT AND DRAINAGE CONSTRUCTION AND PARKING (2.15.97)

A. Within the development of any requirement for parking, approximately 1% ofthe total number of parking spaces shall be designated and configured to permitthe parking of motorcycles. The designated area for motorcycle parking shall

have a concrete base. This pad shall be based on a dimensioned area of 4'-0" x8'-0" for each required motorcycle space.

B. Unless otherwise specified in the construction documents all road andparking pavement construction and all storm drainage shall conform to the latestspecifications, standards and details of the Maryland State HighwayAdministration (MSHA). Permanent and temporary roadway signage, striping,marking, signals or other control devices shall conform to MSHA standards or tothe latest edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published bythe Federal Highway Administration.

C. Bicycle racks shall be provided where appropriate.

END2. PARKING STANDARDS (8.15.97)The following information has been established as standards for UMCP lot andspace designations and configurations must be approved by the Department ofCampus Parking.

A. Garages:

1. Minimum space size of 8.5' x 16'2. Height Clearance-minimum of 6'8"

3. Elevator Shafts-Designed to allow access to clean the outside of the carwindow, or have contractor provide a system which will allow for cleaning of thewindows4. Elevator Pits-Design pit with Oil/Grit Separation system (see item C.).5. Washdown capabilities for both cleaning and general maintenance include:

a. The washdown process consists of a University mobile vehicle equipped witha storage tank which accepts a 1-1/2 inch threaded hose connection to fill thetank. The maintenance process consists of a 3/4 inch threaded hose connectionfor normal Physical Plant and Grounds maintenance.

b. Each parking level shall contain the following hose bibb installations:

1. Washdown Hose bibbs shall be located 150 feet apart, a minimum of two (2).Supply piping shall be 1-1/2 inch type L copper with a 1-1/2" threaded hoseconnection outlet.

2. One (1) maintenance hose bibb located at or near the center of structure.Suply piping shall be 3/4" I.D. type L copper with a 3/4" htreaded hoseconnection outlet.

3. All hose bibbs shall be tamper proof with a slotted or square operator keyand shall have an integral vacuum breaker with a standard hose thread andinclude a cap and chain.

4. Design will include a positive shut-off valve located at an accessible(and identified) location to drain hose bibb piping system in months whenfreezing temperatures are expected.

5. Hose bibbs shall terminate 30 inches from the finished floor and be protectedby a permanent bollard(s).

2. PARKING STANDARDS (8.15.97)

6. Floor Drains-2' X 2' minimum7. Ramp Drains-Continuous Trench Drain at base of each ramp, minimum 6 inchpipe.8. Stairwells and Elevator Shafts - all glass foor safety9. Add-on capability - all future design work should investigate possibilityof building the garage with the ability to add additional levels in the future.

B. Surface Lots

1. Space sizes and configurations - to be determined by DCP. All motorcyclepads will be in concrete.

Minimum space sizes are as follows:

a. Faculty Staff - 8.5' x 16'b. Students - 8' x 16'

2. Drive Lanes

a. Two way - 24' minimumb. One way - 13.5' minimum with angled (60?) parking

3. All spaces to be striped with traffic yellow non-lead base paint.

4. End Islands - painted, no concrete.

5. Disabled - number of spaces and marking in accordance with ADA standards.

6. Sign & Sign Standards - See attached specification pages 3 & 4.

7. Meter Pole Standards - See attached specifications page 5.

C. Oil/Grit Separators in Garages

Typically oil/grit separators would not be included in the storm drain system ingarages. Instead, an automatic system to recover oil spills or discharges fromhydraulic elevator pumps shall be provided whenever the sumps drain by gravityor by a self activating pump. An oil recovery system would not be required incases where the elevator sump area is manually pumped to the drain system.


END

2. PERT TELEPHONE (POLICE EMERGENCY REPORTING TELEPHONES) INSTALLATION CRITERIA (4.15.97)

A. The number, type (free-standing or wallmounted) and location of PERTtelephones will be recommended by the Consultant to the University on a project-by-project basis.

B. Free Standing Emergency Telephone

1. The Contractor shall furnish and install an outdoor emergency telephone(manufactured by Code Blue Corporation, Stock No. Code Blue 1 (CB 1)), withvandal resistant security unit with speakerphone with keypad and University ofMaryland Software, blue light and strobe. Furnish with nicklad 2000 finish inMidnight Blue to match existing on campus in location shown on the drawings.Installation requirements include the following:

a. A concrete foundation for the communication tower of 24" in diameter and aminimum of 36" deep with a slight slope from center. Stub-up electrical andcommunication conduit (two 1-1/2") including a 8' x 5/8" copper ground rod inthe center of foundation as shown on the attached drawing.

b. A dedicated (unswitched) 120 volt, 20 ampere electrical power circuit inconduit from the University designed location to the location of thecommunication tower.

c. A 1" conduit with six (6) 24 AWG, filled telephone cable from theUniversity designed location to the communication tower. Reference Section

2. Referencing the attached Drawing #11000, installation instructions for theCode Blue Emergency Lighting and Communications Tower include:

a. Install 3/4" - 10 x 24" long anchor bolts below grade with 4" projectingabove grade. Use provided template for proper positioning within concretefoundation. Position inline with the communications instrument of the tower.


b. After installing one 3/4" nut and one washer on each anchor bolt (1-7/8"to 2" above grade to top of nut) and after removing the cover plate of theaccess opening, install the tower onto the bolts with the communicationsfaceplate toward the walkway. Install second set of nuts and washers. Tightenthe upper nuts, then the lower nuts.

c. Lift and remove the conical reflector disc over the lens opening andinstall the area lighting assembly. Plug in the power line from the lightingassembly to the receptacle cord found inside the tower (secured to the baseplate). No mechanical attachment is required between lighting and tower housingassemblies.

d. Install a clear glass, medium base High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamp.The installed lamp must complement the ballast accordingly.

e. Reinstall conical reflector with the cone point aiming downward.

f. Plug in the power line of the top strobe assembly to the receptacle cordsecured by raceway in the HID lighting area. Set the strobe assembly down intothe tower aligning all side holes, then screw in place using the furnished 1/4"- 20 x 3/4" long countersunk tamper resistant screws.

g. The communications faceplate is to be screwed to the vertical face of therecessed area with the furnished tamper resistant screws.

h. Install communications equipment. Wire incoming power and communicationlines (from conduit within poured concrete base) into the tower's respectivecables provided with the tower. Internal grounding stud is provided oppositeservice opening.

i. Re-attach the cover plate at the service opening with the tamper resistantscrews provided.


j. To insure proper grounding of all electrical components, a grounding strapis required by the National Electric Code. Install an insulated #10 AWGstranded wire to be connected between the electrical conduit (within theconcrete base) and the grounding bolt (within the tower). For ease ofinstallation, attach the strap to the conduit before erecting the tower. Oncethe tower is bolted into place, attach the other end of the strap to thegrounding bolt.

k. The PERT Telephone must comply with the Americans With Disabilities Act.Mounting height of the speakerphone buttons should be positioned between 34" and48" above grade level. This positions the bottom ledge of the backplate between29.5" and 39.5" from grade level.

l. Reference Section 2. Tree Protection for additional installationrequirements.

C. Wall-Mounted Emergency Telephone

1. The Contractor shall furnish and install an outdoor, wall-mountedEmergency Telephone (manufactured by Code Blue Corporation, Stock No. Code Blue2 (CB2)), with vandal resistant security unit with speakerphone with keypad andUniversity of Maryland software, blue light and strobe.

2. Referencing the attached Drawing, #12000, installation instructions forthe Code Blue 2 Emergency Lighting and Telephone include:

a. The Code Blue 2 wall-mounted telephone can be wired either from behind theunit (through the wall) or via external conduit from the bottom. Two, 1.25 inchdiameter clearance holes have been provided at each location. Installation canbe completed either by removing the light bracket from the back plate or withall assemblies remaining together.

b. Route all power and telephone circuit conduits through the two, 1.25"conduit clearance holes.

c. Mount the backplate using the appropriate wall anchors in the four drilledholes. If the light bracket was removed, re-attach it to the backplate. Ifwiring from the bottom, complete conduit installation to the unit.

2. PERT TELEPHONE (POLICE EMERGENCY REPORTING TELEPHONES)INSTALLATION CRITERIA (4.15.97)

d. Install the outer shell to the backplate assembly, install security cableto both assemblies, complete wiring and secure outer shell to the backplate withthe security hardware provided by the manufacturer.

3. No exposed conduit is permitted in any new construction and unless properapproval is received from the University, the same applies to retrofit projects.

END2. SANITARY SEWER AND WATER LINES (2.15.97)

A. Buildings shall be designed to permit gravity flow of sanitary and stormdrainage. Where sewage ejectors or sump pumps are required, they shall be:

1. Located to have sufficient headroom to pull the pump shaft straight upthrough the floor plate.

2. Provided with lifting eyes or trolley beams to facilitate the removal ofthe equipment.

3. Provided with emergency power if failure of the pump should floodelectrical or mechanical equipment.

4. Provided with a high level alarm, that is interfaced to the building'sCCMS.

B. Pipes penetrating exterior walls below grade must be installed properly toprevent breakage due to building settlement or expansive soil.

C. Inverts shall be shown on all drawings.

D. All connections to campus distribution systems or public utilities shallbe precisely located by dimensions or coordinates.

E. Depth of piping shall be shown and installed below all freeze lines(minimum) and inverts shall be shown at manholes and other critical points.

F. Access shall be provided to all working parts of plumbing devices. Do notpermanently seal in wall any plumbing items requiring periodic maintenance.

G. Cleanouts shall be located at each 90 degree bend and every 50 feet instraight runs of 3" or larger piping.

H. Plumbing riser diagrams must be drawn in isometric form and there must beone for each riser on the project. Risers must be shown on all plans.

I. All domestic water applications shall be separated from non-potableconnections via a back flow preventer (PRZ); acceptable manufacturers/seriesinclude: Watts 909 Series, FEBCO 800 Series, and Wilkens (Zurn) 500 Series.PRZ installations shall be installed per plumbing code in the horizontal run ata height of 4 feet.

J. Sanitary sewer and water lines shall be designed in accordance with WSSCguidelines.

END

2. SEASONAL ISSUES (8.1.96)

A. Contractor shall maintain emergency vehicle access to the constructionsite al all times. Snow, mud, debris, unsuitable driving surfaces, lockedgates, and other obstructions shall not be allowed to interfere with access tothe site.

B. Contractor shall police construction site of trash and maintainconstruction material in a secured fashion so as to prevent them from beingblown from the site during periods of high winds.

C. Contractor shall maintain security lighting in the area of construction sothere is adequate lighting in all pedestrian and parking areas adjacent to theconstruction site.

D. Contractor shall not interfere with University special events bydisrupting traffic, engaging in operations with loud noise, or allowing debristo remain in roadways. Special events are primarily but not limited to

Commencement and class registrations. The University will provide dates andtimes of any special events at the time of bid.

E. Account for conditions/restrictions such as, sun orientation, wind, leafaccumulation, snow drifting, noise and environmental factors. Prevent abnormalaccumulation of leaves, and snow due to wind direction in relation to buildinglocation. Consider mowing requirements and grass cuttings when siting andorienting buildings or site amenities.

END

2. SITE CONSTRUCTION SIGNS (4.15.97)

A. During construction, various signs become necessary for parking, trafficcontrol, direction to project site, detours, construction material deliveries,pedestrian and property signs, vehicle directions, etc.. Therefore, on aproject-by-project basis, the construction specifications must include therequirement that the contractor provide, install, and maintain all such signsthat are of standard sign materials and finishes as required by the MarylandDepartment of Transportation State Highway Administration Standards for Highwaysand Incidental Structures or approved equal as determined by the University ofMaryland and OSHA Title 29 CFR part 1926, Subpart G - Signs, Signals, andBarricades.

B. Upon completion of the project, the Contractor must remove all such signsand deliver them to the University as directed.

END2. SITE STANDARDS (10.15.96)

Site standards have been established for the following:

A. BenchesB. Bike RacksC. Bollards1. Steel Removable/Non-Removable2. Wooden Breakaway3. Pedestrian Bollard and ChainD. Cigarette UrnsE. Concrete Dumpster Pads1. Plan View2. SectionF. Concrete StepsG. Curbs1. Bituminous Concrete Curb2. 6" and 8" Concrete Curb and Gutter3. 8" Mountable Curb4. 4" Concrete Landscape CurbH. Electric Parking Gates1. Single Gate (out)2. Double Gate (in/out)I. Fencing1. Board-on-boardJ. HandrailsK. KiosksL. Outdoor Drinking FountainsM. Paving1. Concrete Pavers

2. Concrete Walks3. Bituminous Asphalt Paving4. Brick on ConcreteN. Picnic TablesO. Planting Details1. Trees

2. ShrubsP. Ramps for Persons with Disabilities (PWD)1. PWD Ramp, Plan View2. PWD Ramp, SectionQ. Security GatesR. Trash ReceptaclesS. Tree Grates

A. BENCHES (6' - 8')

1. Material: Teakwood2. Manufacturer: Country Casual; 17317 Germantown Rd., Germantown,Md. 20874 (301)-428-3434or Park Place; Washington, D.C. (202-342-6294)3. Model: Windermere

2. SITE STANDARDS (10.15.96)

4. Description: A teak wooden bench without back rest and armrests; intended for low traffic/high visual quality areas.5. Performance: The Windermere style has strong, durableconstruction and hardwood to resist carving and vandalism; slats with spacers toallow air movement for comfort and long life; angled brackets for securing topads and galvanized hardware throughout.6. Related Details: N/A

B. Bike Racks

1. Material: 1-1/2" schedule 40 (.148" wall) black iron pipeO.D. - 1.90".2. Manufacturer: Fabricated3. Model: Fabricated4. Description: Black arched schedule 40 pipe with concretefootings. Space racks 4' on center. Paint pipe with one (1) coat red primer andtwo (2) coats flat black enamel paint.5. Performance: Durable and can be used with any type bike lock.Placed near major building entrances.6. Related Details: Brick paving with concrete band. (See drawing on p. 9).

C. Bollards

C.1. Steel Removable/Non-Removable Vehicular

1. Material: Painted schedule 80 steel pipe.2. Manufacturer: Fabricated3. Model: Fabricated

4. Description: Removable: Bollards constructed of heavy-dutysteel painted black with a security padlock.Non-Removable: Painted heavy-duty steel installed and filled completely withconcrete.


5. Performance: Removable vehicular bollards are for high useservice areas. Non-Removable bollards are placed around utility features toprevent damage, i.e. dumpsters, gas meters, hydrants.6. Related Details: See drawings on pages 10 and 11.

C.2. Wooden Breakaway

1. Material: Pressure treated No. 2 Southern Yellow Pine posts.2. Manufacturer: Fabricated3. Model: Fabricated4. Description: 6" X 6" wooden post, unpainted and modified toserve as a bollard. Install in #6 crusher run.5. Performance: Bollards are routed and sawcut at the base toallow breakaway access for emergency vehicles.6. Related Details: See drawing on page 12.

C.3. Pedestrian Bollard and Chain

1. Material: Pressure treated No. 2 Southern Yellow Pine posts.2. Manufacturer: Fabricated3. Model: Fabricated

4. Description: 4" X 4" wooden posts connected by a 3/16" self-colored coil steel chain.5. Performance: Control of pedestrian foot traffic.6. Related Details: See drawing on page 13.

D. Cigarette Urns

1. Material: Concrete Urn2. Manufacturer: Shemins Nursery Burtonsville, Md. (301-421-1220)3. Model: P-8600 - white concrete finish.4. Description: Ornate white concrete urns. Placed near highvolume pedestrian areas.5. Performance: Aesthetically compatible with the white columns ofthe building facades. Fill with white sand.6. Related Details: N/A.


E. Concrete Dumpster PadE.1. Plan ViewE.2. Section

1. Material: See item 6. below2. Manufacturer: See item 6. below3. Model: See item 6. below4. Description: See item 6. below5. Performance: See item 6. below6. Related Details: See drawings on pages 14 and 15.

F. Concrete Steps

1. Material: See item 6. below2. Manufacturer: See item 6. below3. Model: See item 6. below4. Description: See item 6. below5. Performance: See item 6. below6. Related Details: See drawing on page 16.

G. CurbsG.1. Butuminous Concrete CurbG.2. 6" and 8" Concrete Curb and GutterG.3. 8" Mountable CurbG.4. 4" Concrete Landscape Curb

1. Material: See item 6. below2. Manufacturer: See item 6. below3. Model: See item 6. below4. Description: See item 6. below5. Performance: See item 6. below

6. Related Details: See drawings on pages 17, 18, 19, and 20.

H. Electric Parking GatesH.1. Single gate (out)H.2. Double Gate (in/out)

1. Material: Steel housed bases, wooden arms, a programmablecontrol unit and detector loops.2. Manufacturer: Federal A.D.P. - a subsidiary of Federal SignalCorporation; Hinsdale, Ill.(1-800-521-9330).3. Model: #G90 with "Passport" card control units and"Poppke" arm spring connectors.4. Description: Electric single or 2 gate system with wooden arms,"Poppke" spring connectors, "Passport" programmable card control units anddetector loops.


5. Performance: Restrict parking areas by unauthorized vehicles.Programmable card control unit for convenient access with wooden arm and "Poppe"spring connector for heavy abuse and easy replacement.6. Related Details: See drawings on pages 21 and 22.

I. FencingI.1. Board-on-Board

1. Material: See item 6. below2. Manufacturer: See item 6. below

3. Model: See item 6. below4. Description: See item 6. below5. Performance: See item 6. below6. Related Details: See drawing on page 23.

J. Handrails

1. Material: Moulded steel with flat black paint finish.2. Manufacturer: Acme Iron Works, Inc. Tuxedo, Md.3. Model: Style #104 or similar style

4. Description: Moulded steel with red enamel primer and blackflat paint finish. Moulded top bar, 1/2" square pickets spaced 4" O.C. and alamb's tongue.5. Performance: Placed on steps of more than three treads and asrequired by ADA Standards.6. Related Details: See drawing on page 24.

K. Kiosks

1. Material: 24" diameter concrete pipe with 2" x 4" No.2pressure treated Southern Pine.2. Manufacturer: Fabricated3. Model: N/A4. Description: 24" diameter (inside) concrete pipe, open top with3/16" steel mesh cover, attached with 4 anchor bolts. Boards attached to pipewith two circular brackets. Metal materials shall be galvanized and wood shallbe sanded and stained.


5. Performance: Sturdy, relatively easily maintained and placed atintersection of heavily used pedestrian walks.6. Related Details: See drawing on page 25.

L. Outdoor Drinking Fountains

1. Material: Exposed concrete, stainless steel exterior metalcomponents.2. Manufacturer: Haws or approved Equal.3. Model: #3177FR/#3060FR4. Description: Single Fountain: Cylinder, exposed aggregatefinish. Banner free fountain, "L" shaped exposed aggregate finish.5. Performance: Single fountain/barrier-free fountain, freezeresistant valve system.6. Related Details: N/A

M. PavingM.1. Concrete PaversM.2. Concrete WalksM.3. Bituminous Asphalt PavingM.4. Brick on Concrete

1. Material: See item 6. below2. Manufacturer: See item 6. below3. Model: See item 6. below4. Description: See item 6. below5. Performance: See item 6. below6. Related Details: See drawings on pages 26, 27, 28, and 29.

N. Picnic Tables

1. Material: See item 6. below2. Manufacturer: See item 6. below3. Model: See item 6. below4. Description: See item 6. below5. Performance: See item 6. below6. Related Details: See drawing on page 30.


O. Planting DetailsO.1. TreesO.2. Shrubs

1. Material: See item 6. below2. Manufacturer: See item 6. below3. Model: See item 6. below4. Description: See item 6. below5. Performance: See item 6. below6. Related Details: See drawings on pages 31 and 32.

P. Ramps for Persons with Disabilities (PWD)Q.1. PWD Ramp, Plan ViewQ.2. PWD Ramp, Section

1. Material: See item 6. below2. Manufacturer: See item 6. below3. Model: See item 6. below4. Description: As per ADA5. Performance: See item 6. above6. Related Details: See drawings on pages 33 and34.

Q. Security Gates

1. Material: See item 6. below2. Manufacturer: See item 6. below3. Model: See item 6. below4. Description: See item 6. below

5. Performance: See item 6. below6. Related Details: See drawing on page 35.

R. Trash Receptacles

1. Material: Electrostatically, polyester, power-coated steelreceptacle with plastic liner.2. Manufacturer: Victor Stanley, Inc. P.O. Drawer 330, Dunkirk, Md.(301)-855-8300)3. Model: S-42 Ironsides4. Description: All steel bars and structural support, 39-1/2" x23-3/4" spunsteel concave lid with 32 gallon highdensity plastic liner.5. Performance: Durable, vandal-proof, with easy lift-out linercontaining drainage holes. Vinyl coated steel aircraft cable attaches lid toreceptacle. Attach base to concrete surface through center anchor bolt hole.6. Related Details: N/A2. SITE STANDARDS (8.1.96)

S. Tree Grates

1. Material: Cast Iron2. Manufacturer: Neehan Foundry Company or Equal.3. Model: As specified4. Description: 90 degree round with cast iron angle frame.5. Performance: Install flush with adjacent surfaces.6. Related Details: See drawing on page 36.

2. SITE STANDARDS

2. SITE STANDARDS

2. SITE STANDARDS

2. SITE STANDARDS

END2. SOIL PREPARATION (11.15.96)

A. The top 18" of soil at the project site shall be tested to determine it'ssuitability as a component of the planting media. If it is determined to besuitable, the contractor shall be required to remove and stockpile the top 18"of soil in areas that are to be regraded or otherwise disturbed. This includesstaging areas and areas where equipment or materials is stockpiled.

B. If the top 18" is found not to be suitable, it must be amended to meetminimum specifications listed in item #2 prior to placement on site. Inaddition, soil prepared for backfilling shall be protected from compaction andcontamination.

1. Landscape installation shall be accomplished by companies that are skilledin landscape installation and planting must be accomplished during the

appropriate season. The successful bidder shall have on staff a "CertifiedProfessional Horticulturalist" or Registered Landscape Architect and show proofof having satisfactory completion of similar size landscaping projects in bothdollar value and size of plant material to be installed.

2. Stripped soil used for the planting media shall be tested by thecontractor and amended if necessary to meet specifications prior to placement onthe site. Soil shall be a sandy loam or silt loam in texture with a minimum of3% organic matter, stones and debris no larger than 2", pH of 5.0 - 7.0, andsoluble salts not greater than 500ppm. Suitable soil shall then be mixed withcompost not to exceed 1/3 by volume and blended so the mixture is uniform.

3. Placement of the backfill planting media shall be done so there is noequipment driven over the top soil. This will require that utilities beinstalled at specified depth and landscape plants be placed onto the sub-gradebefore installation of soil backfill. After utilities and plants have beeninstalled, place soil and compact as specified starting from one end of the siteand working away from finished areas.

END

2. STEAM ACCESS OPENINGS (MANHOLES)

A. Minimum size: 10' x 10' x 8'B. Minimum size lids: 24" (larger as required) - 2 requiredC. Minimum number of vents: 2D. Sump with steam driven pump (where applicable) connected to storm drain(to keep manhole dry).E. Insulation: Foam Glass Insulation with Pitt Wrapping (interior of manholeonly).F. Construction Material: Precast Concrete

END

2. STORMWATER MANAGEMENT AND SEDIMENT AND EROSION CONTROL (4.15.97)

A. Design Documents shall be submitted for sediment & erosion control andstormwater management (or submit an application for stormwater management (SWM)waiver) for approval to the Maryland Department of the Environment (MDE), WaterManagement Administration, 2500 Broening Highway, Baltimore, Maryland inconformance with the requirements of the following two publications:

Stormwater Management Guidelines forState and Federal Projects; and

Erosion and Sediment Control Guidelinesfor State and Federal Projects.

Both publications are issued by the Maryland Department of the Environment(MDE), Water Management Administration.

B. Quantitative and qualitative stormwater management, as required by theMaryland Department of the Environment, shall be included in the site drainagedesign. Stormwater Management must be addressed on a project if more than 5,000square feet of surface area is disturbed.

The University of Maryland College Park campus is comprised of over 1,000 acres.Accordingly, the particular approach to meeting stormwater managementrequirements at UMCP often is somewhat different from that which would beappropriate for a smaller self-contained site. It is therefore necessary thatthe approach to meeting SWM requirements be coordinated with the Universitybefore submittal to MDE.

Furthermore, early coordination with the reviewing agency (MDE) is essential topreclude delays. In general, a site/grading plan adequately developed toprovide a complete sediment control plan and stormwater management planincluding required supporting calculations must be submitted at or immediatelyfollowing the Design Development submittal stage.

C. Erosion and sediment control practices shall be in conformance with:

1994 Maryland Standards and Specifications for Soil Erosion and Sediment Control

published jointly by Water Resources Administration, Soil Conservation Serviceand State Soil Conservation Committee. Sediment and erosion control approvalmust be obtained from MDE if more than 5,000 square feet of surface area or morethan 100 cubic yards is disturbed.

END2. TREE PROTECTION (8.1.96)

A. Tree protection requirements are to be included in the constructioncontract. Prior to beginning any construction activity, the following steps arerequired to protect trees from damage:

1. Identify trees which will remain on the site. This includes not onlythose trees within the limit of work but also those which may have critical rootzones within the area. This includes:

• Chemical and fuel storage• Chemical waste of any kind• Concrete washout areas• Construction office placement and subcontractors offices• Construction parking• Construction vehicle corridors• Crane placement and crane corridors for moving material (if applicable)• Limb clearance of buildings and other features approved by University• Material storage• Other sub-contractors working areas must be approved by University• Painting procedures and clean-up

• Soil stockpiling• Steel make-up areas• Trash stockpiling and hauling sites

The roots of a healthy tree growing in uncompacted soil has a root system asmuch as five times the spread of the canopy. This is the area which must beinitially considered.

2. Provide written report by a certified arborist identifying rootevaluations of the trees which are in potential conflict with construction todetermine the critical root zones.

3. Provide written report by a certified arborist indicating the best methodsof construction which will minimize the impact on the critical root zone. Obtainspecifications from the arborist for tree protection as required for thespecific project in question with penalties to the contractor if the protectedareas are violated.

2. TREE PROTECTION (8.1.96)

4. Specifications will include the requirement that inspectors andcontractors be trained as to the reasons why intrusion into the critical rootzone will be detrimental to the trees' survival. Training should occur prior tothe start of construction.

B. Do not store materials, soil, equipment, etc. within the Critical RootZone (CRZ) of trees which are to remain.

C. Provide, install and maintain a four (4) foot high temporary fence aroundthe CRZ.

END

2. TRASH DUMPSTERS/PADS (6.15.97)

A. Trash dumpsters/dumpster pads shall be located adjacent to, or as part of,loading dock area or receiving areas. In the event the facility does not have aloading dock/receiving area, the dumpster pads are to be located in a mannerthat does not distract from the aesthetic attributes of the facility and itssurrounding site, but is located relatively adjacent to the facility and inaccord with the following drequirements for placement and configuration.

B. Trash dumpster pads shall have a concrete base and apron designed tosupport an impact load of 25 tons. The pad shall have concrete filled steelbollards for protection and centering at rear and sides as necessary. UMCP usesstandard front-end loader dumpsters which are 8'-2" (98") in width. The insidedistance between side bollards if they are specified, shall be a minimum of 9'-0" (108"), but preferably 10'-0" (120"). In order to specify the minimum width,the specifications should include a straight path for the trash truck of atleast 45'-0" feet for trash truck access. If the trash truck must pick up thedumpster box at any angle, rather than a direct straight approach, then theinside distance between bollards must be 10'-0" (120"). Also reference Section2.E., Site Standards, Dumpster Pad for section detail.

C. The dumpster(s) shall be accessible to building housekeepers from theloading dock level to eliminate the need to lift heavy trash bags above headheight.

D. Trash Dumpster Siting shall address the following:

1. Do not place in proximity with:

a. Outside air intakes for mechanical ventilation systems.

b. Other locations which may create a public nuisance such as- operable windows- designated smoking areas- food service handling areas- lunchbreak/picnic areas- storm drain inlets

2. Comply with Applicable Standards:

a. ASHRAE 62-1989/5.5 (Ventilation systems)b. ICC/IMC 401.7.1 (Intake openings)c. COMAR 26.11.06.08 (Nuisances)d. OSHA 29CFR1910.141 (g) (2) & 29CFR1910.141 (H) (Sanitation)

END

2. UTILITIES (6.15.97)

A. New and existing demands on utilities in the building area are to beexamined. A recommendation as to alignments and new connections are to be

submitted at an early design stage of the project. Any impact on the capacityof the existing utilities to the on-site and campus-wide utility network shallbe brought to the attention of the University.

B. A complete system design of all new utility extensions from the points ofthe connection with existing systems to the building site is required. Thisincludes establishing the precise location and size of all underground utilitiesand/or services in the construction area performing a thorough investigation ofall existing utilities, (location and capacities) in order to properly designand locate the new utility services.

C. With the development of building details, the adequacy of all existingutilities based on the anticipated increase in load to serve the newconstruction must be determined. If deficiencies are present, an upgrade of theinsufficient utility systems must be included in the project's scope.

D. New and existing demand shall be coordinated with the Department ofPhysical Plant through DAEC to insure that all issues are considered (adequatecapacities at tie-in points and this area of campus, etc.). Calculationsshowing usage for each utility shall be furnished.

E. The design of water and sanitary utilities are to meet the requirementsand approval of the Suburban Sanitary Commission for areas within WSSCjurisdiction.

F. The storm drainage system and components shall be designed in accordancewith Maryland State Highway standards. Closed systems shall be designed andconstructed to adequately convey a ten (10) year storm.

G. Underground Utilities

1. Primary telephone and electrical underground utility lines shall beencased in concrete.

2. Use utility vaults for multiple use utility trenches.

3. Place steam lines under paved surfaces where possible.

4. Use removable concrete pavers over utility lines where posssible.

END

2. WETLANDS AND FLOODPLAIN (4.15.97)

The identification of regulated wetlands and floodplain areas within the sitelimits is required in accordance with Maryland Department of the Environment(MDE) or U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (COE) regulations and guidelines. Theidentification of such areas shall be the first priority of the site design andthe existence of these areas shall be brought to the immediate attention of theUniversity.

Any disturbance within a nontidal wetland or its buffer is subject to regulationas is construction within the 100-year floodplain. Approval from theappropriate reviewing agency(s) is necessary for any such disturbance orconstruction.

END

07270 FIRESTOPPING (8.15.97)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

One Sub-contractor shall be responsible for the furnishing and installation ofall building firestopping. This includes, but is not limited to, the following:

A. Through-penetration firestopping in fire-ratedconstruction.

B. Construction-gap firestopping at connections of the same or differentmaterials in fire rated construction.

C. Construction-gap firestopping occurring within fire rated wall, floor orfloor-ceiling assemblies.

D. Construction-gap firestopping occurring at the top of fire rated walls.

E. Through-penetration smoke-stopping in smoke partitions.

F. Construction-gap smoke-stopping in smoke partitions.

1.02 RELATED WORK

All related work shall be properly coordinated with the installation offirestopping including the following as a minimum:

A. Concrete (Division 3)

B. Masonry Units (Section 04200)

C. Sprayed-on fireproofing (Section 07256)

D. Expansion joint seals (Section 07900)

E. Gypsum Board (Section 09250)

F. Fire Protection (Division 13)

G. Mechanical (Division 15)

H. Electrical (Division 16)


1.03 REQUIREMENTS

The latest editions to the following publications shall apply as a minimum butnot be all inclusive to the design and installation of firestopping.

A. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

1. UL Fire Resistance Directory (ULFRD)

2. Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials (UL 723)

3. Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops (UL 1479).

B. American Society For Testing And Materials Standards: ASTM E-814: StandardTest Method For Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.

C. Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Corporation (FM), Approval Guide.

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

1. NFPA 101 -- Life Safety Code

2. NFPA 70 -- National Electric Code

E. Maryland State Fire Prevention Code (COMAR 12.03.01 and 12.03.02)

F. Building Officials and Code Administrators International, INC. (BOCA).

1. BOCA National Building Code

2. BOCA National Fire Prevention Code

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Assembly: Particular arrangement of materials specific to given type ofconstruction described or detailed in referenced documents.

B. Barriers: Time rated fire walls, smoke barrier walls, time ratedceiling/floor assemblies, and structural floors.

C. Firestopping: Methods and materials applied in penetrations andunprotected openings to limit spread of heat, fire, gasses and smoke.


D. Penetration: Opening or foreign material passing through or into barrieror structural floor such that full thickness of rated materials is not obtained.

E. Construction Gaps: Gaps between adjacent sections of walls, exteriorwalls, at wall tops between top of wall and ceiling, and structural floors orroof decks, and gaps between adjacent sections of structural floors.

F. System: Specific products and applications, classified and numbered byUnderwriters Laboratories, Inc. to close specific barrier penetrations.

G. Sleeve: Metal fabrication or pipe section extending through thickness ofbarrier and used to permanently guard penetration. Sleeves are described as partof penetrating system in other sections and may or may not be required.

1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Design Requirements

A. Fire-rated construction: Maintain barrier and structural floor fireresistance ratings including resistance to cold smoke at all penetrations,connections with other surfaces or types of construction, at separations

required to permit building movement, and sound or vibration absorption, and atother construction gaps.

B. Smoke barrier construction: Maintain barrier and structural floorresistance to cold smoke at all penetrations, connections with other surfacesand types of construction, and at all separations required to permit buildingmovement and sound or vibration absorption, and at other construction gaps.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Division 01, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Product data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data includingthe following:

1. Detailed specification of construction and fabrication.

2. Manufacturer's installation instructions.

3. Samples of materials prior to delivery to site. Samples shall be labeledfor identification.


C. Shop drawings: Shop drawings shall be submitted to the University ofMaryland, Department of Architecture, Engineering, and Construction for approvalprior to delivery of materials to the site. Indicate dimensions, description ofmaterials and finishes, general construction, specific modifications, componentconnections, anchorage methods, hardware, and installation procedures, plus thefollowing specific requirements.

1. Details of each proposed assembly identifying intended products andapplicable UL System number, or UL classified devices.

2. Manufacturer or manufacturers representative shall provide qualifiedengineering judgements and drawings relating to non-standard applications asneeded.

D. Certifications: Contractor shall furnish certified statements from thematerial manufacturer with shop drawings indicating that the materials meet thespecification requirements.

E. Quality control submittals: Statement of qualifications.

F. Applicators' qualifications statement: List as required by Item 1.07.A.

G. Mock-up: Provide mock-up of different types of firestopping to beinstalled. Shall be approved before work may proceed.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer's qualifications: Firm experienced in installation orapplication of systems similar in complexity to those required for this project,plus the following:

1. Acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer.

2. Minimum two years experience installing firestop systems.

3. Successfully completed at least 5 comparable scale projects using thissystem.

B. Local and State regulatory requirements: Submit forms or acceptance forproposed assemblies not conforming to specific UL Firestop System numbers, or ULclassified devices.


C. All firestop systems shall have a F (Flame) rating and T (Temperature)rating conforming to the applicable codes and standards.

D. Obtain firestopping materials from a single manufacturer for eachdifferent product required.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Packing and shipping:

1. Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legiblemanufacturer's identification.

2. Coordinate delivery with scheduled installation date, allow minimumstorage at site.

B. Storage and protection: Store materials in a clean, dry, ventilatedlocation. Protect from soiling, abuse, moisture, and freezing when required.Follow manufacturer's instructions. Remove damaged and deteriorated materialsfrom the site.

1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Existing conditions:

1. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correctunsatisfactory conditions before proceeding.

2. Proceed with installation only after penetrations of the substrate andsupporting brackets have been installed.

3. Coordinate work with other trades.

B. Environmental requirements:

1. Furnish adequate ventilation if using solvent.

2. Furnish forced air ventilation during installation if required bymanufacturer.

3. Keep flammable materials away from sparks or flame.

4. Provide masking and drop cloths to prevent contamination of adjacentsurfaces by firestopping materials.

5. Comply with manufacturing recommendations for temperature and humidityconditions before, during, and after installation of firestopping.


1.10 WARRANTY

Submit copies of written warranty agreeing to repair or replace joint sealerswhich fail in joint adhesion, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, orgeneral durability or appear to deteriorate in any other manner not clearlyspecified by submitted manufacturer's data as an inherent quality of thematerial for the exposure indicated. The warranty period shall be two years fromdate of substantial completion.

Part 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING OF FIRE-RATED CONSTRUCTION

A. Systems or devices listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory undercategories XHCR and XHEZ may be used, providing that it conforms to theconstruction type, penetrant type, annular space requirements, and fire ratinginvolved in each separate instance, and that the system be symmetrical for wallapplications. Systems or devices must be asbestos-free.

B. Additional requirements: Withstand the passage of cold smoke either as aninherent property of the system, or by the use of a separate product included asa part of the U.L. system or device, and designed to perform this function.

C. Acceptable manufacturers and products.

Those listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance directory for the U.L. System involved.

D. All firestopping products must be from a single manufacturer. All tradesshall use products from the same manufacturer.

2.02 CONSTRUCTION-GAP FIRESTOPPING OF FIRE-RATED CONSTRUCTION

A. Firestopping at construction gaps between edges of floor slabs andexterior wall construction.

B. Firestopping at construction gaps between tops of partitions and undersideof structural systems.

C. Firestopping at construction gaps between tops of partitions and undersideof ceiling or ceiling assembly.

D. Firestopping of control joints in fire-rated masonry partitions.

E. Firestopping expansion joints.


F. Acceptable manufacturers and products - those listed in the U.L. FireResistance Directory for the U.L. System involved.

2.03 SMOKE-STOPPING AT SMOKE PARTITIONS

A. Through-penetration smoke-stopping: Any system complying with therequirements for through-penetration firestopping in fire-rated constructionprovided that the system includes the specified smoke seal or will provide asmoke seal. The length of time of the fire resistance may be disregarded.

B. Construction-gap smoke-stopping: Any system complying with therequirements for construction-gap firestopping in fire-rated construction, isacceptable, provided that the system includes the specified smoke seal or willprovide a smoke seal. The length of time of the fire resistance may bedisregarded.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Fill, void or cavity materials: As classified under category XHHW in theU.L. Fire Resistance Directory.

B. Forming materials: As classified under category XHKU in the U.L. FireResistance Directory.

Part 3 - Execution

3.01 EXAMINATION

Verification of conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is tobe performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.

A. Verify barrier penetrations are properly sized and in suitable conditionfor application of materials.

B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

Clean surfaces to be in contact with penetration seal materials, of dirt,grease, oil, loose materials, rust, or other substances that may affect properfitting, adhesion, or the required fire resistance. Prepare surface asrecommended by the manufacturer.


3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install penetration seal materials in accordance with printed instructionsof the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory and in accordance with manufacturer'sinstruction.

B. Seal holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an effective smokebarrier.

C. Where floor openings without penetrating items are more than four inchesin width and subject to traffic or loading, install firestopping materialscapable of supporting same loading as floor.

D. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subject to traffic.

E. Place firestopping in annular space around fire dampers beforeinstallation of damper's anchoring flanges which are installed in accordancewith fire damper manufacturers recommendations.

F. Where large openings are created in walls or floors to permit installationof pipes, ducts, cable tray, bus duct or other items, close unused portions ofopening with firestopping material tested for the application. See U.L. FireResistance Directory.

G. Install smoke stopping as specified for firestopping.

H. Refer to manufacturer's specifications for mixing and applications offirestopping. Material shall completely fill the void spaces.

I. Insulated Pipes and Ducts: Cut and remove thermal insulation where pipesor ducts pass through firestopping material. Replace thermal insulation with amaterial of equal thermal insulating characteristics and equal firestoppingcharacteristics.

J. Building fire barriers (fire rated walls, floors, and ceilings) and smokebarriers required to have protected openings shall be permanently identifiedwith signs or stenciling in a manner acceptable to the University of MarylandDepartment of Architecture, Engineering, and Construction, Safety AnalysisGroup. Such identificationshall be above any decorative ceiling and in concealedspaces. Suggested wording: FIRE AND SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS.


3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Examine penetration sealed areas to ensure proper installation beforeconcealing or enclosing areas.

B. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by the University ofMaryland, Department of Architecture, Engineering, and Construction, SafetyAnalysis Group.

C. Perform under this section patching and repairing of firestopping causedby cutting or penetration by other trades.

3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean up spills of liquid components.

B. Neatly cut and trim materials as required.

C. Remove equipment, materials, and debris, leaving area in undamaged, cleancondition.

END

7. JOINT SEALANTS

All joint sealant materials shall be of the highest quality and shall meet thequalifications for the intended use.

END

7. ROOFS AND MOISTURE CONTROL (11.15.96)

Tailoring of this guide specification is required to fit the type of roofdesignated to meet the specific design conditions. Additional data and specificguidance for a project shall be obtained from the various manufacturersspecified. One copy of the contractor's submittal will be forwarded to DPPthrough Department of Architecture, Engineering, and Construction.

A. General

1. Specify copper or stainless steel flashing.

2. Specify sloped metal caps on parapet walls. Coping shall be minimum 20 oz.copper or 32 gage factory finish aluminum, installed with continuous cleats.Each roof shall be covered by a 20 year, no dollar limit, manufacturer'srenewable guarantee covering the complete roofing system including flashing.Longer warranties may be appropriate depending upon the type of roof specifiedand accepted by DPP.

3. Roof top equipment shall be raised a minimum of 18" from top of finishedroof to bottom of unit for access during roof replacement.

4. Provide minimum 30# live load for roofs.

5. Metal Coping

a. Specify a slope of one (1) inch slope per foot (to the roof side) on thetop of coping.

b. If parapet wall is to be covered by a metal coping, specify a continuoustreated wood blocking, covered by a layer of building paper and metal coping tobe cleated on both sides.

6. Gravel Stop and Counter-Cap Flashing

a. Specify copper or lead coated copper, all seams and miters to be soldered.

b. Face of metal flashing to be cleated 30 inches on center.

7. ROOFS AND MOISTURE CONTROL

7. Roof Drains, Through-Wall Scuppers and Overflow Drainage Systems

a. Specify all roof drains and through - wall scuppers (not overflowscuppers) to be sloped 2 ft. on center using taper insulation or taper edgestrip for positive drainage. However, through-wall scuppers are not encouraged.

b. Install a copper gravel stop 1 inch x 4 inches and 36 inches squareminimum, set in flashing cement around roof drains on built-up aggregate roofingsystems. Apply a reflective aluminum coating from gravel stop to drain clampingring.

c. All through wall scuppers shall empty into a conductor head and downspout.

d. All overflow scuppers shall be set high enough above the finished roof toensured that water doesn't drain through the overflow with a normal rainfall.

B. Built-up Roofing Specifications

1. Substrate

a. Provide a minimum roof slope of a 1/4" to 1/2" per foot using light weightfill or taper insulation toward drainage system (gutters, roof drains, orthrough wall scuppers).

b. Slope built-up roof 6' square with taper insulation toward roof drain andinstall gravel stop 3' square minimum.

c. Specify conventional standard 4 ply fiberglass felt built-up roof systemwith an aggregate finished surface using #7 stone conforming to ASTM # A - 4/7,minimum.

d. Provide walk out access to all roof levels for maintenance personnel byuse of penthouse stairs or scuttle trap doors and stairway. Access ladders

from one level to another are required.


2. Insulation

a. The thickness shall be such that the insulation's only value is equivalentto a minimum of a R-18 value. This value is for the insulation only, not thecomplete roofing system value.

b. All insulation shall be installed conforming to U.L./F.M class 1/90approval guide.

3. Base Flashing

a. All base flashing, shall be a minimum of 8 inches high from the finishedroof surface.

b. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing, and seal the top of all baseflashing with approved roofing cement and fabric before applying metal counterflashing or metal cap flashing.

4. Finished Surface

a. Clean gravel or slag (embed in bitumen flood coat) meeting ASTM D 1863,which applies to aggregates specified for use in bituminous roofing.

b. White mineral surfaced cap sheet over ply sheets of the built-up roofingsystem.

5. Guarantee

a. The contractor shall provide the University with a written standardroofer's guarantee, applicable to any leaks or failures due to defectivematerials or workmanship, occurring in the roof system or flashing within twoyears from date of completion of the roof work. This does not include anylimiting penal sum.

b. The material's manufacturer shall provide the University with a 20 yearunlimited labor and material guarantee similar to that offered by Schuller inits "Signature Series, No Dollar Limit, (NDL) Watertite Roofing System".


6. Access

a. Provide access to all roof levels by means of penthouse doors, accessladders, or roof hatch.

C. Slate Roofing System

1. Slate shall be 1/4 inch thick Buckingham, Vermont, Evergreen or equal andshall conform to physical requirements of grade S1 classifications.

2. Winter/Guard or equal shall be installed on hips, ridges, rakes, roofpenetrations, eaves, and low pitched roof slopes (between 2/12 and 4/12).

3. Install snow guards on all "A" frame substrate roofing systems to protectentrances and gutters.

4. Guarantee

A written guarantee shall be furnished that states the materials used are instrict accordance with the specifications, and that any and all repairs requiredon the roof due to defective materials or workmanship furnished under thecontract shall be made without cost to the owner for a period of five years.

D. Shingle Roofing System

1. Shingle shall be 25 year class A fiber glass composition.

2. Winter/Guard or equal shall be installed on hips, ridges, rakes, roofpenetrations, eaves, and low pitched roof slopes (2/12 and 4/12).

3. Install snow guards on all "A" frame substrate roofing systems to protectentrances and gutters.

4. The contractor shall provide the University with a written standardroofer's guarantee, applicable to any leaks or failures due to defectivematerials or workmanship, occurring in the roof system or flashing within twoyears from date of completion of the roof work. This does not include anylimiting penal sum.

5. The material's manufacturer shall provide the University with a 25 yearunlimited labor and material guarantee for a Watertite Roofing System.

END

8. DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Doors

1. Exterior and interior single doors shall be 1-3/4 inch thick, 3 feet wide,and 7 feet high, minimum.

2. Where required for maintenance purposes, the width may be enlarged to 4'-0" wide; however the 7'-0" height shall not be modified.

3. Specify pre-finished, pre-machined, solid wood (staved) core doors.

4. Particleboard core doors are not acceptable.

5. If gypsum core doors are required for fire rating, wood edges shall beincreased to provide solid backing for hardware such as hinges, locksets, anddoor closers or through-bolts shall be used for fastening.

6. Fire doors shall have 3 inch x 33 inch wire glass for a 1-1/2 hours "B"labeled doors. Wire glass shall be square in shape, not diamond.

B. Frames

1. Door frames should be standard metal frames where ever possible; however,to allow for architectural considerations frames can be modified with the priorapproval of Department of Architecture, Engineering, and Construction.

2. Hollow metal frames shall have welded corners; 16 gage interior and 14gage exterior. Include 3 silencers for single doors and 2 silencers for doubledoors.

3. Storefront assemblies are not desirable. If store front assemblies areacceptable by DPP then a 8" high (minimum) base is required.

END

8. GLASS AND GLAZING

A. All glass shall be installed in accordance with code requirements.

B. Insulated glass shall be specified to reduce heat gain and heat loss.

END

8. HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS (5.1.96)

This section applies to the Lock Function for the following rooms:

• Offices, Conference Rooms, and Libraries (office function locks).

• Mechanical Rooms, Custodial Rooms, Storage Rooms, and Computer Rooms(store room function locks).

• Classrooms and Laboratories (classroom function locks).

A. Mortise Locksets

1. Only the following manufacturers will be used for Mortise Locksets.

a. Corbin/Russwin ML2200b. Yale 8700 Seriesc. Sargent 7800 Series

2. Lockset Specifications

a. 2-3/4" backsetb. 2 piece anti-friction latch bolt with a 3/4" throwc. 1" Throw Deadboltd. Deadlock Latche. Escutcheon Trimf. Lever Handg. Face plate 1-1/4" x 8"h. Strike ASA 4-7/8" x 1-1/4" x 1-1/8" lip

B. Door Closers

Only the following manufacturers will be used for door closers

1. LCN 4040 Reg. Arm-Fire Doors2. LCN 4040 Cush -n- Stop Arm-Exterior Doors3. LCN 1460 or 1461 for Handicapped areas-Bathroom, Classroom, and Publicarea doors.

C. Handicapped Automatic Door Control Closers

1. Only the following manufacturers will be used for door closers.

a. Keane Monroe 2000 Seriesb. Keane Monroe #59H Press wall switch

2. All door closers are to be thru-bolted in doors.


D. Cylinders

1. Only the following manufacturers will be used for cylinders.

a. Best Mortise Cylinder #1E74 (for Mortise Lockset and inside cylinderdogging on Von Duprin panic bars).

b. Best Rim Cylinder #1E72 for panic bars.

2. All Best cylinders and Locksets are to be 7 pin interchangeable cores.

3. All Best cylinders to be supplied with brass construction cores.

E. Hardware

Manufacturers shall be as specified for the following pieces of hardware. Nosubstitutes will be accepted.

1. Exit Devices: Von Duprin Series

a. #EL99 for wood and metal doorsb. #EL33 for glass doors

c. All electrical devices shall have a power transfer #EPT 1024d. Power supply #MP842

2. Panic Bars: Von Duprin Series

a. Von Duprin Series CD99b. Von Duprin Series CD33c. Von Duprin Series 5754 Center Mullion x 1408 Striked. Von Duprin Series 4954 Center Mullion x 299 Strike

3. Door Specifications: Von Duprin Series

a. Glass Doors, narrow type

• outside trim 3308• Center Mullion #5754


b. Wood and Metal Doors

• CD99 Series• Center Mullion #4954 x 299

c. Fire Rated Doors

• 99 LBE-F

4. No concealed or surface type vertical rod device.

5. All devices are to be thru-bolt in door.

END

8. WINDOWS

A. Aluminum clad wood windows have been designated as the UMCP windowstandard. Exterior surfaces shall have a 70% Kynar factory finish. Windowsthat are operable are preferred.

B. Windows and skylights shall be designed with maintenance and security inmind.

C. Aluminum windows are acceptable as required by the specific design and inwith prior approval of DPP. However, they must be capable of acceptinginsulated glass up to 1" in thickness.

D. Include provisions in accordance with OSHA requirements for cleaningwindows.

END

9. ACOUSTICAL QUALITY CONSTRUCTION (6.15.97)

Sound abatement is an important consideration in the design of a project. Thedesign of the facility must ensure that all offices, classrooms, and labs willbe insulated from unreasonable outside sources of noise. Mechanical andelectrical rooms, and other major noise and vibration sources, (including noisegenerated by vehicular traffic) should be separated from spaces that would besensitive to such intrusion. Whenever possible, walls should extend to the slababove, other interstitial spaces should be closed, and penetration of utilitiesshould be sealed to provide the desired acoustic isolation. The HVAC systemshould use ducted returns. Relative to sound attenuation, plenum returns areundesirable. Mechanical and electrical rooms are to be constructed of masonrywalls with slab-to-slab construction.

In addition, anticipated noise levels that will be generated by equipment andoccupants of the building shall be determined and sound transmissioncoefficients (STC's) of walls, floors, and other elements of enclosure needed tomaintain acceptable noise levels shall be specified. The noise levels within aspace should not exceed 40 dB for executive offices and conference rooms, 45 dBfor general offices, 40 dB for classrooms, and 55 dB for laboratories. Theminimum Sound Transmission Coefficient (STC) levels must be 45 STC betweenoffices, 35 STC between a laboratory and adjacent spaces, and 45 STC betweeninstructional space and all other spaces (measurements with doors closed).

END

9. CEILING FINISHES (6.15.97)

A. Acoustical 2' x 2' lay-in ceiling tiles shall be specified for allinterior areas with the exception of restrooms.

B. Non-directional fissured pattern acoustical tile such as Model #560-U.S.G.Auratone Fissured (Class A) is acceptable.

END

9. DRYWALL CONSTRUCTION (6.15.97)

A. It is preferable for drywall partitions to be full height, floor tounderside of pad or roof above, in areas requiring security and to comply withcode.

B. Drywall studs and runners shall not be less than 22 gage material.

C. Single layer drywall installations shall be a minimum of 5/8 inchesthickness and 16" O.C.

D. Fire-rated walls shall be specified in accordance with code requirements.

END

9. FLOOR FINISHES (6.15.97)

A. Durable as well as appropriate floor finishes throughout a building areessential. Maintenance and safety are of the highest priority.

B. Interior concrete floor areas, which are scheduled to receive paint, shallbe painted and sealed with a non-slip epoxy finish. Concrete floors shall becleaned and etched prior to painting using muriatic acid as required bymanufacturer's recommendations.

C. Resilient tile shall be acceptable for classrooms, offices, corridors,administrative areas, departmental/college areas, elevator cab interiors, fastfood service areas, custodial storage rooms, and copy rooms for ease ofmaintenance. Resilient tile floors shall be cleaned, sealed, and polished bythe construction contractor in accordance with the manufacturers specifications.

Vinyl composition tile shall be asbestos free. For any installation involvingexisting VAT, refer to Section 1, Environmental Health and Safety.

D. Flex-tuff or equal, entrance and vestibule mats shall be installed in allpublic entrances.

E. Carpet shall be acceptable for aisles of lecture halls andDean's/Departmental Chairperson's offices/suites only. Provide molded nosingfor lecture hall aisles when carpet is specified. Carpet installed in locationsother than identified above will not be maintained by Physical Plant.Departments will be responsible for cost of carpet replacement.

The grade of carpet quality shall be determined by space needs. Specify carpetwith the following characteristics, as a minimum and unless projectrequirements dictate otherwise.

1 A minimum face weight of 20 ounces per yard of commercial quality nylon,type 6.6, with soil resistance.2 100% synthetic backing with permanent moisture barrier to eliminateabsorption (below grade installations).3 2.0 KV electrostatic propensity or lower, anti-static.4 Direct glue down installation using adhesive recommended by carpetmanufacturer.5 Fiber Colorfast.6 10 year warranty on wear and edge ravel (delamination) and color-fastnessto light.

9. FLOOR FINISHES (6.15.97)

7 Conform to applicable code for flame/fuel/smoke rating requirements inaccordance with latest ASTM requirement. Carpet shall meet ADA minimumcoefficient of friction of .6 for accessible ramps.8 Concrete shall be sealed prior to carpet installation.9 Discontinued products or end-of-runs are unacceptable.10. Extra materials (5% or 50 square yards minimum) are required for each typeand color of carpet specified and shall be delivered to the Department ofPhysical Plant.11. Each type of carpet shall be from one dye lot only.

F. Vinyl rubber rolled goods are acceptable for elevator cab interiors.Preformed stair treads are preferred for stairs. A diamond pattern provides amore maintainable surface and is preferred.

G. Terrazzo is acceptable for vestibules/entrances, corridors, food serviceareas except food preparation and lobbies.

H. Quarry tile with double abrasive grain, is acceptable for food preparationareas, serving areas behind counters, laundries, and dishwashing areas. Goutshould be sealed.

I. Wood flooring is acceptable for dance floors, handball courts, basketballcourts, racquetball courts, gymnasiums, and other sports activity areas and alsowhere required for acoustical treatment.

J. Seamless flooring and coved base shall be acceptable for animal carefacilities and "clean" rooms.

END

9. WALL FINISHES (6.15.97)

A. Carefully consider the use of each space and specify a durable as well asappropriate finish to minimize maintenance. Painted drywall is the preferredfinish for maintenance reasons. Wall covering will not be maintained orreplaced by Physical Plant.

B. Walls specified to receive wallcovering shall be sealed prior toapplication of wallcovering. Adhesive used shall be as recommended by

manufacturer of wallcovering. Extra materials (minimum of 5%) shall be labeledand submitted to customer. Cleaning and maintenance instructions shall also besubmitted to customer.

C. Glazed CMU block is recommended for corridor walls with coved base andbullnose corners.

D. Include corner guards on exterior corners in heavy traffic areas. Masonrywalls are preferred for academic buildings (specify bullnose corners).

END

10. CHALK BOARDS AND BULLETIN BOARDS (10.15.96)

A. Chalkboards and bulletin boards must comply with UMCP Design Criteria.

B. Provide one (1) bulletin board outside each classroom.

1. Model: Claridge #958-W 4' x 4', or approved equal.

Claridge #962-W 4' x 8', or approved equal.

Hardwood Frame - 1-3/4"

2. Color: #2100 - NuTAN

END

10. EXTERIOR BUILDING SIGNS (8.1.96) THIS REPLACES - SIGNS (EXTERIOR)

Currently, the UMCP standard sign is to be of the shape, size, and material asspecified in the detail drawing on the following page (page 2.). The castalumimum letters presented on page 3. are for special building names and are tobe used when appropriate and as directed on a project-by-project basis.

10. EXTERIOR BUILDING SIGNS (8.1.96)

END

10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS (9.15.96)

PART I - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

The specification and design requirements contained herein include thefurnishing, assembly, construction, and installation of fire extinguishers andfire extinguisher cabinets.


All requirements of the State of Maryland and Offices of the State Fire Marshalshall apply to the specifications and design requirements, including thefollowing:

A. Maryland Fire Prevention Code (latest edition)

B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL), Fire Protection Equipment

C. Maryland Occupational Safety and Health Act

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 10, Standard for theInstallation, Maintenance and Use of Portable Fire Extinguishers (latestedition)

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Submit the manufacturer's product data for each type of fire extinguisher, andfire extinguisher cabinet. All submittals shall be approved by the Universityof Maryland College Park Department of Architecture, Engineering, andConstruction Safety Analysis Group.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Dry Chemical ("ABC"). Multi-purpose dry chemical stored pressured fireextinguishers, steel cylinder (12 year hydrostatic test interval), all metalvalve, handle and syphon tube assembly, readable pressure gauge, red in color,rechargeable, and flexible discharge hose.

1) 10 lb size: U.L. Rating 4A-60B:C, Amerex Model #441 or approved equalshall be installed in all areas unless specifically specified.

2) 5 lb size: U.L. Rating 2A-40B:c, Amerex Model #424 or approved equalshall be installed in all lab areas.


3) 2 1/2 lb size: U.L. Rating 1A-10B:C, Amerex Model #418 or approved equal.

4) 20 lb size: U.L. Rating 20A-120B:C, Amerex Model #423 or approved equal.

B. Carbon Dioxide (CO2). Class "BC" purpose carbon dioxide fireextinguishers, brass metal valve, aluminum cylinder (5 year hydrostatic testinterval), red in color, rechargeable, and flexible hose with horn (horn only on5 lb).

1) 5 lb size: U.L. Rating 5B:C, Amerex Model #322 or approved equal.




C. Combustible Metal ("D"). Class "D" purpose stored pressure fireextinguishers, all metal valve, steel cylinder (5 year hydrostatic test

interval), yellow in color, rechargeable, quickly detachable extensionapplicator with flexible hose, and 30 lb capacity.

1) Sodium Chloride Agent: Amerex Model #570 or approved equal.

2) Copper Agent: Amerex Model #571 or approved equal.

D. Dry Chemical ("BC"). Class "BC" purpose potassium bicarbonate (Purple K)stored pressure fire extinguishers, steel cylinder (12 year hydrostatic testinterval), all metal valve, handle and syphon tube assembly, readable pressuregauge, red in color, rechargeable, and flexible discharge hose.

1) 10 lb size: U.L. Rating 80B:C, Amerex Model #460 or approved equal shallbe installed in all commercial kitchen areas.

2) 5 lb size: U.L. Rating 30B:C, Amerex Model #A479T or approved equal.

3) 2 1/2 lb size: U.L. Rating 10B:C, Amerex Model #A410T or approved equal.



E. Pressurized Water ("A"). Class "A" purpose water stored pressure fireextinguisher, stainless steel cylinder (5 year hydrostatic test interval), allmetal valve, handle and syphon tube assembly, readable pressure gauge,rechargeable, flexible hose, 2 1/2 U.S. gallon capacity, and U.L. Rating 2A.Amerex Model #240 or approved equal.

F. FFFP Foam ("AB"). Class "AB" purpose FFFP stored pressure fireextinguisher, stainless steel cylinder (5 year hydrostatic test interval), allmetal valve, handle and syphon tube assembly, readable pressure gauge,rechargeable, flexible hose, 2 1/2 U.S. gallon capacity, and U.L. Rating 3A:20B.Amerex Model #252 or approved equal.

G. Halon. Halon fire extinguishers will not be permitted.

2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS: All fire extinguishers located in areasaccessible to the public (ie. corridors, lobbies, public assembly areas and openoffice areas) shall be placed in a fire extinguisher cabinet.

A. Fire extinguisher cabinets for recessed indoor installations:

1) Cabinets shall be 18 gauge steel, red baked enamel with red trim mountedin a semi-recessed position. Larsens Model #2712 or approved equal.

2) Cabinet doors shall be 18 gauge red steel, mounted on continuous pianohinges. The door shall be provided with a tamper-proof lock, two keys, withbreak away acrylic panel. When the panel is broken, the cabinet door shall beopened from the inside by tripping the door lever. Larsens Door Style with lockand "Break-A-Way acrylic panel" or approved equal.

3) Cabinet trim shall be 18 gauge red steel or painted red under the paintingdivision. The return trim for the semi-recessed mounting shall not be less than1-1/4 inches. Larsens Semi-recessed type suffix "RK, RL, or RM."

4) The minimum interior dimensions shall be 12 inches in width, 27 inches inheight, and 8 inches in depth. Larsens Model #2712 or approved equal.


5) Cabinet key shall be CH751.

B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets for interior and exterior surface mountedlocations.

1) Cabinets shall be weather resistant 20 gauge, white or red baked enamelaluminum with break away acrylic panel front with pull handle and aluminumlocking bar. Lock shall be tamper proof and supplied with 2 keys. Whitecabinets shall be lettered in red with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" Larsen'sModel #AL 2409-SM with Break-A-Way acrylic panel or approved equal.

2) Minimum interior dimensions shall be 10 inches in width, 24 inches inheight, and 6 inches in depth.

3) Lock key shall be CH751.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES

A. Wall Mounting Hangers shall be Amerex Model #1007 or approved equal.

B. Indicating Signs for areas where fire extinguishers will not be readilyvisible (ie. warehouses, shop areas, large laboratories) shall be red in colorwith red letters printed inside a white arrow with the word FIRE printedhorizontally on top and the word EXTINGUISHER printed vertically below, 4 inchesby 18 inches, flexible vinyl with adhesive backing. Seton Model #37809 orapproved equal.

PART III - Execution Fire Extinguisher Cabinets

3.1 Fire extinguisher cabinets shall be provided in sufficient number andlocation but shall not exceed the minimum requirements of NFPA Standard 10.

3.2 The maximum travel distance from any point to an extinguisher cabinetshall not exceed 75 feet on each floor. Stairways shall not be considered intravel distance to extinguisher cabinets. The maximum travel distance shall bedecreased to the minimum requirements in NFPA Standard 10 for any flammableliquids or other special hazards.

3.3 Cabinets shall be physically located to be highly visible, unobscured, andunobstructed by open doors or other objects. Cabinets shall be located below oradjacent to manual fire alarm stations.


3.4 Cabinets shall be designed and installed so that the top is no higher than48 inches from the floor and the bottom of the cabinet no lower than 12 inchesfrom the floor.

3.5 Where construction does not allow the installation of recessed cabinets(penthouses, mechanical rooms, etc.), surface mounted cabinets shall bespecified. Surface mounted cabinets shall meet the requirements of II-B above,except that they shall be surface mounted type.

3.6 Cabinets are not required in labs areas, shop areas, and any other area asapproved by the University. Fire extinguishers not placed in cabinets shall bemounted on hangers as specified in Section 2.3 of this Specifications and asindicated in NFPA 10.

END

10. INFANT CHANGING STATIONS (9.15.96)

One set of men's and women's toilet rooms on the first (main building enhancelevel) floor of all new construction are to include a horizontally mountedinfant changing station that complies with ADA.

Acceptable manufacturers include: Baby Changing station by Koala Bear Kare andDiaper Deck by American Infant Care Products (AICP), or approved equal. Thecolor to be determined on a project-by-project basis.

END

10. INTERIOR GRAPHICS/SIGNAGE (11.15.96) THIS REPLACES - SIGNS (INTERIOR)

The design shall include an identification and directional system to communicateinformation essential to the operation of the new facility. Theinterior/exterior graphic system is to assist individuals moving to and withinthe facility. Particular attention must be given to the needs of individualswith disabilities to permit their access to the building from parking areas andwalkways and to move freely throughout the building.

It is imperative that the interior graphic system meets critical maintenance,replacement, and anti-vandalism specifications with regard to location andmethod of application, as well as design specifications for material, color,texture, dimensions, and letter type (reference sign detail, page 5). Theserequirements also apply to painted wall graphics.

The development of the interior signage system and all supplementary graphicsspecific to the project shall be coordinated with the DAEC. The specific roomnumbering assignments are to be conducted by DAEC at the completion of theSchematic Design Phase. All rooms shall be numbered on the drawings using theUniversity room numbering system. The University's system is outlined below.The design is to be in accordance with the following references:

A. Interior Room Numbering Standard and Identification System

In order to properly identify rooms, assign space and maintain a computerizedspace inventory and key control, the following room numbering and identificationsystem is in use at the College Park Campus (reference example, page 6).

1. Each floor within a building is to be assigned a group of 4-digit numbers.The first digit will indicate the floor of the building, the second willindicate the wing, and third and fourth will indicate the room number in thatwing.

2. The four digit number may have an alpha prefix indicating a sub-basement(SB0123), basement (B0123) or mezzanine (M1123), or an alpha suffix indicating apart of one room or space (1123A).

3. Small rectangular buildings will be numbered using 4-digits, where thefirst digit will indicate the floor, the last two digits shall indicate the roomnumber and the second digit shall be "one".

10. INTERIOR GRAPHICS/SIGNAGE (10.15.96)

4. Each room entered from a public corridor will have a separate room number.Rooms with more than one door opening into the corridor will have the samenumber plate. Where spaces are not entered from a public corridor, but fromanother space, they will be assigned the same room number with an alpha suffix.Note: In the alpha suffix system, letters "I" and "O" are not assigned. Whenthe letter "Z" is passed, continue with AA, BB, etc. Room number suffixes willbe assigned in a clockwise direction with even numbered rooms on one side andodd numbered rooms on the opposite side.

5. The room numbering system must be flexible enough to accommodate physicalchanges which may occur during the life of the building. The most frequent

changes will be the subdivision of larger rooms into smaller rooms. In caseswhere long rooms run parallel with the corridor, a block of numbers will bereserved so that if future subdivisions do occur, numbers will be available forthe spaces without renumbering the entire wing.

6. The numbering system should reflect a general location within thebuilding. This can be done most easily by "stacking" room numbers as much aspossible. For instance, room 1101 should be in the same relative position inthe building as room 2101 and 3101. All corridors, lobbies, elevators, lifts,and stairways will be numbered starting from 99 and going down, i.e., 1199,1198, 1197, 1196, etc.

7. All building support areas will be marked with a sign identifying its roomuse. Building support areas include: mechanical, electrical, elevator andtelephone equipment rooms, custodial closets, and toilets.

a. For these support spaces all drawings are to reflect the followingabbreviations:

- Mechanical equipment rooms - ME- Electrical rooms, transformer vaults - EE- Elevator machinery - X- Telephone equipment - TE- Custodial closets - CU- Men's Rooms - MT- Women's Rooms - WT- Bathroom - T


b. All signage for these spaces will be worded as follows to provideuniformity:

- Mechanical equipment rooms - "MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT"- Electrical rooms, transformer vaults - "ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT"- Elevator machinery - "ELEVATOR EQUIPMENT"- Telephone equipment - "TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT"- Custodial closets - "CUSTODIAL"- Men's Rooms - "MEN'S TOILET"- Women's Rooms - "WOMEN'S TOILET"- Bathroom - "TOILET"

B. Assignment of Room Numbers to New Buildings

Design drawings shall incorporate room numbering in accord with the UMCP RoomNumbering Standard identified above. Before working drawings are completed, thedoors that are scheduled to have room # plates and/or room i.d. signs shall beidentified.

Only in rare instances will the design drawings reflect other than the assignedroom numbers on the final working drawings. Permission for any deviation fromthe above procedure must be obtained from DAEC. Even if a deviation from thisprocedure is permitted, the completed building shall have the proper room

number plates and room identification signs installed as a part of the generalcontract. If numbers other than the final room numbers, are used on thedrawings to facilitate construction, a small scale key drawing for inclusion inthe working drawing set showing the actual numbers for each space shall beprepared.

At the completion of construction, all "As Built" floor plans (architectural,mechanical, electrical, and structural) shall reflect the room numbers asinstalled by the contractor.


C. Assignment of Room Numbers for Renovation Projects

Before any renovation begins, DAEC will mark room numbers on two (2) set ofplans in accordance with the Standard Room Numbering and Room IdentificationSystem, indicating what room numbers and room identification sign are required.One set will be used to incorporate the information on the working drawings, andthe second set will be distributed to Physical Plant's Lock Shop.

At the completion of the renovation, "As Built" drawings, verifying work doneand installation of the required room number plates and room identificationsigns shall be prepared.

The cost for the fabrication and installation of room number plates and roomidentification signs will be included in the cost of renovation.


Example, Room Numbering System

Small rectangular buildings will be numbered using 4-digits where the firstdigit will indicate the floor, the last two digits shall indicate the roomnumber and the second digit shall be "one".

SB0200-SB0299-+ +-----+ +-----+ +-SB0300-SB0399 B0200-B0299 ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ B0300-B0399 0200-0299 +-¦ ¦ ¦ ¦--¦ 0300-0399 1200-1299 ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ 1300-1399 etc. -+ +------------------------¦ +-etc. ¦ ¦ +-SB0100-SB0199 ¦ ¦ ¦ B0100-B0199 ¦ ¦--¦ 0100-0199 +------------------------+ ¦ 1100-1199 +-etc.

Each room entered from a public corridor will have a separate room number.Rooms with more than one door opening into the corridor will have the samenumber plate. Where spaces are not entered from a public corridor, but fromanother space, they will be assigned the same room number with an alpha suffix.Note: In the alpha suffix system, letters "I" and "O" are not assigned. Whenthe letter "Z" is passed, continue with AA, BB, etc. Assign room numbersuffixes in a clockwise direction.

+------------------------------------------+ Odd number on ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ B ¦ ¦ one side of ¦ 1101 ¦ 1103 ¦ 1105 ¦ 1107A +-- --¦1109 ¦ corridor ¦ ¦ ¦ +--- -------¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ 1107 ¦ ¦ +--- ------ ------- ------ ---------- --¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ +------------ ----------- ----------------¦ Even number on ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦

opposite side ¦ 1102 ¦ 1104 1104A ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ +------------------------------------------+

END

10. MAILBOXES (5.1.96)

If required as part of a project, coordination between the user, Department ofPhysical Plant, and the Department of Architecture, Engineering, andConstruction is required to determine specific requirements and acceptablemanufacturers.

END

10. RESTROOM REQUIREMENTS (6.15.97)

A. Restroom facilities must be designed for ease of maintenance.

B. Graffiti resistant finishes shall be specified where possible.

C. Specify all stainless steel or chrome plated brass fittings for longlasting quality.

D. Each restroom shall have individual exhausts to prevent soundtransmission.

E. Floors and walls (to at least 4'-0" above finished floor) shall be coveredwith ceramic tile.

F. Partitions shall be solid plastic (similar to "Polypro FR" and "SanatacClass B FR"), mounted to walls using continuous wall brackets and continuoushinges. The head rail shall be a heavy duty anti-grip design to preventvandalism. Partition shall meet the interior finish requirements of NFPA 101.(Note: The required fire test is ASTM E-84, which is the same as ANSI 2.5,CAN/ULC S102M, NFPA 255, UBC 42-1, UL723; Flame Spread Max. 200 and SmokeDeveloped Max. 450).

G. Provide two (2) 120 V receptacles on a separate 20 amp service spacedalong wall above lavatories and adjacent to wall mounted mirrors. Specify GFCIreceptacles.

H. Wall mounted lavatories with drained indentation for soap are preferred.Acceptable manufacturers: American Standard, Kohler or Crane. Countertoplavatories will be considered on a case by case basis by DPP.

I. At a minimum, one lighting fixture to be connected on emergency power.

J. Public restroom lavatories shall have 29 inches clear from floor tounderside of lavatory apron to allow regular lavatories to serve the disabled.Special wheelchair lavatories are not to be used.

K. Provide floor mounted water closets with elongated bowls and sloan flushvalves. Contact Department of Physical Plant for acceptable manufacturers.

L. Each restroom shall have at least one floor drain. Floor drains should belocated under stall partitions where one is not likely to walk. Access to trapprimers is required. Slope floor to drains.

10. RESTROOM REQUIREMENTS

M. Specify wall mounted (not recessed) sanitary napkin waste receptacles,Rubbermaid Model No. 6140 or Rochester Midland Model No. 33W (or equal), inwomen's rest rooms (one per stall). All restroom equipment shall be included inconstruction contract.

N. Provide at least one (1) electric hand dryer in each restroom andone (1) Kimberly-Clark Capacitor Paper Towel Dispenser No. 09755.

O. The following University standard toilet tissue dispensers and liquid soapdispensers shall be specified:

1. A Kimberly-Clark jumbo roll tissue dispenser No. 09556 shall be mounted amaximum of 36 inches from the rear wall to the center of the dispenser, 19inches above the floor and a minimum of two (2) inches clear below the handrailin wheelchair stalls.

2. Flush valve levers shall be located on the wide side in wheelchair stallsfor easy reach.

3. Kimberly-Clark Capacitor Paper Towel Dispenser No. 09755 shall be mountedsuch that the dispenser is accessible from a wheelchair and the lever should notexceed 48 inches from the floor.

4. Kimberly-Clark No. 91132 Skin Care 800 ml. Soap Dispensers to be mountedsuch that the top is 45" from the floor, accessible by wheelchair, and the levelnot to exceed 48".

The design drawings shall locate the equipment and identify any wall supportrequirements associated with installation.

P. Provide separate stainless steel framed mirrors at least 18 inches X 36inches over each lavatory. Continuous mirrors will be considered on a case-by-case basis.

10. RESTROOM REQUIREMENTS (6.15.96)

END11. FOOD SERVICE FACILITIES (6.15.97)

INTRODUCTION

The material contained on the pages that follow, represent the experiencedgained for creating new and renovating Food Services Facilities. Specifically,it includes the following material:

11400 Food Service Equipment Specification15010 General Mechanical RequirementsPlanning Guide for Food Service Facilities as prepared by the Prince George'sCounty Health Department (24 pages).

These standards and guidelines apply to the Department of Dining Services'Facilities as well as any kitchen or pantry that is built to insure safe foodhandling.

In lieu of separating the above material into its respective CSI section, forease of access and use, it has been incorporated in one section of thisdocument. It is also important to note that references have been made to othersections of the DCFS.

11. - FOOD SERVICE FACILITIES (6.15.97)

SECTION 11400 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT

Part 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Furnish all labor and materials, tools, equipment and services necessaryfor and reasonably incidental to complete the food service equipment work asshown on the drawings or specified.

B. Install all specified equipment and equipment furnished by DiningServices.

C. Provide utility hookups required for equipment furnished by DiningServices.

D. Refer to equipment list on the drawings.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Plumbing: Division 15

B. Electrical: Division 16


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture offood service equipment of types, capacities, and sizes required, whose productshave been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Installers Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years successfulinstallation experience on projects with food service equipment similar to thatrequired for project.

C. Fabricator's Qualifications: Where indicated, units require customfabrication, provide units fabricated by shop which are skilled and with aminimum of 5 years experience in similar work. Fabricate all custom equipmentitems at same shop. Where units cannot be fully shop-fabricated, completefabrication work at project site.


SECTION 11400 (Continued)

D. Codes and Standards

1. NSF Standards: Comply with applicable National Sanitation Foundation (NSF)standards and recommended criteria.

2. UL Labels: Where available, provide UL labels on prime electricalcomponents of food service equipment. Provide JL "recognized marking" on otheritems with electrical components, signifying listing by UL, where available.

3. ANSI Standards: Comply with applicable ANSI standards for electric poweredand gas-burning appliance, for piping to compressed gas cylinders, and forplumbing fittings including cylinders, and for plumbing fittings includingvacuum breakers and air gaps to prevent siphonage in water piping.

4. NFPA Codes: Install food service equipment in accordance with thefollowing National Fire Protection Codes (NFPA) Codes:

NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code

NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code

NFPA 96 - Removal of Smoke and Grease-Laden Vapors from Commercial CodingEquipment.

5. Health Code: Install food service equipment in accordance with PrinceGeorge's County Health Department applicable regulations.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data andinstallation instructions for each item; include rough-in dimensions, serviceconnection requirements, performances, materials, manufacturer's model numbers,furnished accessories, power/fuel requirements, water/drainage requirements, andother similar information.



B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned rough-in drawings, at minimum of scale1/2" = 1'-0", showing mechanical and electrical requirements. Submitdimensioned fabrication drawings from custom fabricated equipment includingplans, elevations, and sections, at minimum scale of 3/4" = 1'-0", showingmaterials and gages used.

1. Comply with Prince George's County Health Department publication"Requirements and Guidelines for Submitting Plans for Cooking ExhaustVentilation Systems".

2. Shop drawings for equipment with sneeze guards shall indicate that theguards will provide adequate protection of the food from customer contamination.

C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each item offood service equipment. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, andwiring diagrams in maintenance manual in accordance with requirements ofDivision 1.

1.05 DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver food service equipment in factory-fabricated containers designedto protect equipment and finish until final installation. Make arrangements toreceive equipment at project site, or to hold in warehouse until delivery can bemade to job site.

B. Store food service equipment in original containers, and in location toprovide adequate protection to equipment while not interfering with otherconstruction operations.

C. Handle food service equipment carefully to avoid damage to components,enclosures, and finish. Do not install damaged food service equipment; replaceand return damaged components to equipment manufacturer.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Take field measurements to assure accurate fit of fabricated equipment.



B. Check electrical characteristics, and water and gas pressure. Providepressure regulating valves where required for proper operation of equipment.

C. Electrical Requirements: Provide motors and heating elements for thefollowing electrical characterisitcs, if not otherwise indicated:

1. Motors 1/2 HP and smaller: 120/1/60.

2. Motors 3/4 HP or larger: 208/3/60.

3. Heating Elements 1500 Watts and smaller: 120/3/60.

4. Heating Elements over 1500 Watts: 208/3/60.

5. Refer to equipment schedule and manufacturer's standard electricalrequirements.

1.07 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY

Warranty on Refrigeration Compressors: Provide 3 year written warranty, signedby manufacturer, agreeing to replace/repair, within warranty period, compressorswith inadequate and defective materials and workmanship, including leakage,breakage, improper assembly, or failure to perform as required providedmanufacturer's instructions for handling, installing, protecting, andmaintaining units have been adhered to during warranty period. Replacement islimited to component replacement only, and does not include labor for removaland reinstallation. Warranty shall start on date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Stainless steel: AISI Type 304. Provide non-magnetic sheets, free ofbuckles, waves, and surface imperfections. Provide No. 4 polished finish forany surfaces which will be exposed.

1. Provide self-adhesive protective paper covering on polished surfaces ofstainless steel sheet work, and retain/maintain until time of final testing,cleaning, start-up, and substantial completion.



B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A 526, except ASTM A 527 for extensiveforming: ASTM A 525, G90 zinc coating, chemical treatment.

C. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 569 hot-rolled carbon steel.

D. Stainless Steel Tube: ASTM A 554, Type 304 with No. 4 polished finish.

E. Aluminum: ASTM B 209 sheet and plate, ASTM B 221 extrusions, 0.40 millclear anodized finish where exposed, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD3, general purpose high-pressure type 0.05" thickexcept 0.042" thick for post-forming, smooth texture, and white unless otherwiseindicated. Comply with NSP 35.

G. Plastic Materials and Components: Except for plastic laminate, provideplastic materials and components which comply with NSF 51.

H. Hardwood: Red oak NHLA First Grade with knots, holes, and other blemishesculled out, kiln dried at 8% or less moisture, waterproof glue, machined,sanded, and finished with NSF-approved oil sealer.

I. Solid Surface Product: Corian as manufactured by DuPont Co.

J. Sound Deadening: Heavy-bodied resinous coating, filled with granulatedcork or other resilient material, compounded for permanent, non-flaking adhesionto metal in 1/8" thick coating.

K. Sealants: ASTM C 920, Type S Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. Provide sealantthat when fully cured and washed meets requirements of Food and DrugAdministration Regulation 21 CFR 177.2600 for use in areas where it comes incontact with food.

1. Colors: As selected by Architect and approved by the University frommanufacturer's standard colors.

2. Backer Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene rod stock, larger than joint width.



L. Gaskets: Solid or hollow (not cellular) neoprene or PVC; light gray,minimum 40 Shora A hardness, self-adhesive or prepared for either adhesiveapplication or mechanical anchorage.

2.02 FABRICATION OR EQUIPMENT

A. Tops: Fabricate of "Corian" as manufactured by DuPont. Where tops areadjacent to walls or adjoining equipment, turn up 6" unless otherwise indicated.

B. Framing: Mount tops on 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" galvanized angle iron, or 4"wide x 12 gage galvanized channels.

1. Run framework around entire perimeter of unit, and cross brace on 30"centers. Fasten framing to underside of top surfaces with 1/4" studs welded atapproximately 12' centers. Provide each stud with suitable chrome-platedlockwashers and cap nuts, and make stud lengths such that cap nuts can be madeup tight bringing top down snugly to framing.

C. Legs and Cross Rails: Construct legs of 1-5/8" OD x 16-gage stainlesssteel tubing, with fully enclosed stainless steel bullet shaped adjustable footwith minimum adjustment of 1" up or down without any threads showing. Fastenlegs to NSF approved 6" high stainless steel gusset with top completely sealedby means of stainless steel plate. Weld gusset continuously to bottom of unitframing.

1. All counter mounted food service equipment weighing in excess of 80 poundsshall be mounted of NSF approved 4" legs.

D. Cabinet Bodies: Construct of 20 gage stainless steel, with end panelsformed with round corners for free standing units, and square corners forfixtures which adjoin walls or other fixtures. Provide 90 degree retentions onend panels at front and rear, turned in toward body of cabinet and welded forreinforcement. For cabinets with open shelving, provide double wall innerpanels. Weld ends to horizontal angle or channel member to form integralcabinet base. Provide backs of same material as ends, with vertical edgesturned in to match edges of ends. Weld making flush joint.



E. Inserts: Where cold pans and other inserts are to be installed in cabinetbases, provide apron full depth of insert and of same material as bodies withreinforced openings as required. Form in openings as required. Form inopenings on all sides.

F. Shelves: Construct of 14-gage stainless steel.

1. Bottom Shelves: Extend forward and turn down at front so as to be flushwith front facing of cabinet.

2. Fixed Intermediate Shelves: Weld to front stiles and to 14 gage stainlesssteel brackets so that shelf is 1" away from back and ends of cabinet.

3. Adjustable Shelves: Channel on all 4 sides, weld corners and mount onremovable stainless steel standards.

G. Cold Pans: Fabricate from 14-gage stainless steel lining and 20-gagestainless steel casing. Cove interior horizontal and vertical corners.Insulate sides, ends, and bottom with material thermally equal to 2" thicknessof fiberglass. Seat 1/2" diameter copper cooling coils to underside of coldpan, and seal in themosastic material. Turn down counter top 1" into pan.Install completely concealed 1" wide plastic breaker strip. Install 1" chromeplated drain with plug. Provide 1/2" high false bottom of 14-gage perforatedstainless steel in removable sections.

H. All annular openings in unit construction shall be sealed to within 1/32".

2.03 PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK

A. General: Fabricate plastic laminate casework in type and styles indicated,with hardware and accessories. Provide exposed and semi-exposed surfaces andedges (self-edged) with plastic laminate covering on particle board cores.Semi-exposed surfaces with exposures equivalent to no more than underside ofshelves may be surfaced with plastic laminate backer sheet. Provide paintedplywood or hardboard for concealed panels.



2.04 PREFABRICATED KITCHEN EQUIPMENT

A. Provide custom prefabricated equipment as shown on the drawings andattached to this section.

B. Equipment shall be manufactured by Yorkcraft or approved equal.

2.05 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM(Reference Section 13900 Fire Suppression & Protection Systems)

A. Provide pre-engineered, liquid agent, UL listed, cartridge-operated typewith fixed nozzled agent distribution piping.

B. System shall have automatic detection and actuation from local or remotemanual stations.

C. Release Mechanism

1. Shall contain actuator assembly, regulator, expellent gas hose and one 3gallon chrome plated tank enclosure and cover.

D. Agent: Potassium Carbonate.

E. Fusible link rating shall be provided to conform to operating temperatureof hood.

F. Provide UL listed Mechanical gas line shut-off valve.

G. Selection: Ansul Model 12-102 or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Rough-In Work: Installer must examine roughed-in mechanical andelectrical services, and installation of floors, walls, columns, and ceilings,and other conditions under which food service work is to be installed; verifydimensions of services and substrates before fabricating work. NotifyContractor of unsatisfactory locations and dimensions of other work, and ofunsatisfactory conditions for proper installation of food service equipment. Donot proceed with fabrication and installation until unsatisfactory dimensionsand conditions have been corrected in manner satisfactory to installer.11. - FOOD SERVICE FACILITIES (6.15.97)


3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Set each item of non-mobile and non-portable equipment securelyin place, level, and adjusted to correct height. Anchor to supporting substratewhere indicated and where required for sustained operation and use withoutshifting or dislocation. Conceal anchorages where possible. Adjust countertops and other work surfaces to level tolerance of 1/16" maximum offset, andmaximum variation from level or indicated slope of 1/16" maximum offset, andmaximum variation from level or indicated slope of 1/16" per foot.

1 Where indicated, or required for safety of equipment operator, anchorequipment to floor or wall. Where equipment is indicated to be anchored tofloor, provide legs with adjustable flanged foot. Install 2 anchors on eachfoot.

B. Field Joints: Complete field-assembly joints in work (joints which cannotbe completed in shop) by welding, bolting and gasketing, or similar methods asindicated. Grind welds smooth and restore finish. Set or trim gaskets flush,except for "T" gaskets as indicated.

C. Enclosed Surfaces: Treat spaces that are inaccessible after equipmentinstallation, by covering horizontal surfaces with powdered borax at rate of 4-oz. per square foot.

D. Closure Plates and Strips: Install where required, with jointscoordinated with units of equipment.

E. Cut-Outs: Provide cut-outs in food service equipment where required torun plumbing, electric, gas, or steam lines through equipment items for finalconnections.



F. Sealants and Gaskets: Install all around each unit to make joints air-tight, watertight, vermin-proof, and sanitary for cleaning purposes. Ingeneral, make sealed joints not less than 1/8" wide, and stuff backer rod toshape sealant bead properly, at 1/4" depth. Shape exposed surfaces of sealantslightly concave, with edges flush with faces of materials at joint. Atinternal-corner joints, apply sealant or gaskets to form a sanitary cove, or notless than 3/8" radius. Provide sealant-filled or gasketed joints up to 3/4"joint width; metal closure strips for wider joints, with sealant applicationeach side of strips. Anchor gaskets mechanically or with adhesives to preventdisplacement.

G. Piping: Install necessary piping from relief valves on kettles andsteamers to exhaust in manner to avoid steam coming in contact with operatingpersonnel, and in accordance with applicable codes. Install required pipingfrom indirect drain connections to floor drains.

H. Prefabricated equipment shall be installed in strict conformance tomanufacturer's installation instructions and approved submittals.


A. TESTING: Delay start-up of food service equipment until service lineshave been tested, balanced, and adjusted for pressure, voltage, and similarconsiderations; and until water and steam lines have been cleaned and treatedfor sanitation. Before testing, lubricate each equipment item in accordancewith manufacturer's recommendations.

Test each item of operational equipment to demonstrate that it is operatingproperly, and that controls and safety devices are functioning. Repair orreplace equipment which is found to be defective during operation, includingunits which are below capacity or operating with excessive noise or vibration.



3.04 CLEANING

A. After completion of installation, and completion of other major work infood service areas, remove protective coverings, if any, and clean food serviceequipment, internally and externally. Restore exposed and semi-exposed finishesto remove abrasions and other damages; polish exposed-metal surfaces and touch-up painted surfaces. Replace work which cannot be successfully restored.

1. Prior to date of substantial completion on food service equipment work,buff exposed stainless steel finishes lightly, using power buffer and polishingrouge or grit of No. 400 or finer.

B. Final Cleaning: After testing and start-up, and before time ofsubstantial completion, clean and sanitize food service equipment, and leave incondition ready for use in food service.

3.05 CLOSE-OUT PROCEDURES

A. Provide services of installers technical representative, andmanufacturer's technical representative where required, to instruct Owner'spersonnel in operation and maintenance of food service equipment.

1. Schedule training with Owner, provide at least 7-day notice to Contractorand Architect/Engineer of training date.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15010 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - SCOPE

1.01 All work under this section shall be subject to the GENERALCONDITIONS for the entire work. Requirements included under this section shallapply to all work under Division 15. Check each section for detailrequirements.

1.02 The work of all sections of Division 15 includes furnishing andinstalling the material, equipment, and systems completed as specified. Themechanical installation when finished shall be completed and coordinated, whole,ready for satisfactory service.

PART 2 - EXTENT2.01 The Contractor shall examine the premises and observe the conditionsunder which the work will be done or other circumstances which will affect thecontenplated work. No allowance will be made subsequently in this connectionfor any error or negligence on the Contractor's part.

2.02 The Contractor shall coordinate the work of the mechanical tradeswith the work and equipment specified elsewhere in order to assure a completeand satisfactory installation.

2.03 Whenever the term "provide" is used, it shall mean "furnish andinstall in place, complete in all details".

2.04 Manufacturer's catalog numbers or type of equipment, where specifiedherein are used for reference only. Similar products of approved equal equipmentwill be acceptable. The Engineer will evaluate all proposals and determinewhich, in his opinion, is acceptable.

2.05 All work shall be in accordance with the latest applicable codes andregulations of the various regulatory bodies of the State of Maryland, theNational Fire Prevention Association, and all other boards or departments havingjurisdiction. Any items or requirements are permitted under the code and shalltake preference.

PART 3 - PERMITS

3.01 The Contractor shall procure all the necessary and usual permits,certificates of inspection, etc., which are required by the authorities havingjurisdiction over this work, pay for all fees and charges connected herewith,including connection charges, and deliver same to the University.



PART 4 - SHOP DRAWINGS AND MATERIAL

4.01 Complete shop drawings and materials lists shall be submitted by theContractor for the approval in accordance with the requirements of the GENERALCONDITIONS. No work shall be fabricated or ordered by the Contractor untilapproval has been given.

4.02 The Contractor shall submit for approval within 15 days of signingof contract, a schedule showing make, type, and manufacturer's name and tradedesignation, of all pieces of material and equipment. This schedule shall beaccompanied by the Manufacturer's specifications and shall give dimensions, kindof material, finish, etc., and such other detailed information as may berequired. When approved, such schedule shall be an addition to thespecifications herewith in that no variation will be permitted except with theapproval of the Engineer.

4.03 Complete shop drawings, showing dimensions, materials, arrangements,and other pertinent data shall be submitted; for materials and equipment readilyidentified in standard publications of various manufacturers, full descriptivecatalog or other data shall be submitted.

PART 5 - MATERIALS

5.01 All materials shall be new, the best of their respective kinds,suitable for the conditions and duties imposed on them at the building and shallbe of reputable manufacturers. The description, characteristics, and

requirements of materials to be used shall be in accordance with qualifyingconditions established in the following sections.

PART 6 - WORKMANSHIP

6.01 All materials and equipment shall be installed and completed in afirst class, workmanlike manner and in accordance with the best modern methodsand practice. Any materials installed which shall not present an orderly andreasonably neat and/or workmanlike appearance shall be removed and replaced whenso directed by the University. The removal and replacement of this work shallbe done when directed in writing by the Contracting Officer, at the Contractor'sexpense.



PART 7 - STANDARDS

7.01 Where the following standards, codes or specifications are referredto in the MECHANICAL DIVISION, the reference is to the particular standard,code, or specification, together with all amendments and errata applicable atthe time bids are taken.

7.02 ABBREVIATIONS

ADC Air Diffusion CouncilASHRAE American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air ConditioningEngineersASTM American Society of Testing of MaterialsBOCA Building Officials Code AssociationNFPA National Fire Protection AssociationU.L. Underwriters LaboratoriesWSSC Washington Suburban Sanitary Commission

PART 8 - DRAWING IN GENERAL

8.01 The general arrangement of mechanical ductwork and new dishwashingmachine shall be as shown on the Contractor's shop drawings. Detailed drawingsof proposed departures due to actual field conditions or other causes shall besubmitted for approval and such changes shall be accomplished at no additionalcost to the University. The Contractor shall carefully examine all contractdrawings and shall be responsible for the proper fitting of materials andequipment in each location as indicated without substantial alteration. In asmuch as the drawings are generally diagrammatic and because of the small scaleof the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, andaccessories which may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigatethe structural and finish conditions affecting his work and shall arrange suchwork accordingly, furnishing such fittings, valves, transitions, accessories,etc., as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost to theUniversity. The right to make any reasonable change in location of sprinkler

heads, routing of piping, valves, up to the time of roughing-in, is reservedwithout involving any additional expense to the University.



PART 9 - ELECTRICAL WORK

9.01 All electrical work regardless of the Section of thesespecifications under which it is performed or specified, shall conform to theapplicable requirements of DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL. Electric heaters requiringelectrical service shall be furnished complete with all internal wiring,controls, etc., as a part of that equipment under the section in which it isspecified.

PART 10 - WORK SCHEDULE

10.01 The Contractor shall coordinate, plan, and schedule all work to meet thework schedule as specified.

PART 11 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

11.01 Under this section, the Contractor shall be responsible for cutting andpatching necessary for the installation of his work. Cutting shall be done in aneat and workmanlike manner and no structural members shall be cut beforereceiving prior approval of the Engineer. Concrete walls and floors shall becore bored for piping. Patching shall be done by mechanics of the tradeinvolved. All patch work finishes shall match the existing adjacent surfaces infinish and texture.

11.02 During the floor and wall cutting operations, all equipment in theimmediate area and the area below shall be covered with heavy gauge plasticsheets so as to protect equipment from dust and water damage applicable to work.

PART 12 - DEMOLITION

12.01 Unless indicated otherwise, all pipes, valves, fittings, and equipmentthat are removed shall become the property of the University. The Universityhas the right to examine the materials. Those not accepted shall be theresponsibility of the Contractor for disposal.

12.02 The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulationof waste materials and rubbish. At the completion of work, the Contractor shallremove all rubbish, tools, scaffolding, and surplus material from and aboutbuilding and leave the area completely clear and clean.



PART 13 - OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

13.01 The Contractor shall furnish the University's Department of Physical Plantwith three (3) manuals containing operating and maintenance instructions of thenew dishwashing machine installed under this contract property indexed in a 3-ring binder.

13.02 At the conclusion of installation, the Contractor shall train theUniversity Operating Personnel in the satisfactory operation and maintenance ofall items of the new dishwashing machine. Notify the Owner in writing at least7 working days in advance prior to demonstration.

13.03 Operating and maintenance manual must include the following:

1. Description of Machine2. Operation/maintenance of machine3. Shop drawing4. Servicing, spare parts lists5. Names and addresses of spare parts suppliers6. Test reports7. Certificates8. Warranties9. Narrative of System Operation

PART 14 - OUTAGES

14.01 The Contractor shall coordinate all outages affecting the operation of thefacility with the University's Construction Project Manager. The ConstructionProject Manager shall be notified at least (10) working days in advance of anydisruption in the existing sprinkler system, fire alarm, water, electrical orother service necessary for proper operation of the facility. Outages for waterservice tie-in shall be scheduled three (3) weeks in advance. Duration of theoutage shall be kept to a minimum and may require work in evenings or weekends.

PART 15 - AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

15.01 Upon the completion of work - the Contractor shall furnish to the DAEC'sConstruction Manager and Project Engineer two (2) sets of blue line white printsof As-Built Drawings showing the actual location of sprinkler heads and relatedpiping work.



PART 16 - TESTS

16.01 All tests required in DIVISION 15 shall be performed.

16.02 The Contractor shall demonstrate that all systems and equipment areoperating satisfactorily. The University shall be notified at least seven (7)working days in advance of all tests and the tests shall be conducted to theUniversity's entire satisfaction. Any imperfections or leaks found during thetests shall be corrected by repair or replacement and tests repeated until alldefective pieces of equipment have been replaced and all systems and equipmentoperating in a satisfactory manner.

PART 17 - GUARANTEES

17.01 The Contractor shall guarantee all materials and installation work for two(2) years from the date of satisfactory completion.

PART 18 - PROTECTION

18.01 The Contractor shall be responsible to protect existing installation fromany damage caused by the Contractor's equipment/machine and labor.

18.02 The Contractor shall be responsible to protect ductwork, equipment andother materials in the premises against any damage. Plastic covers and/or othersuitable protective shields to be used to keep all items clean and free fromdebris or dirt.

END OF SECTION

12. CLASSROOM FURNISHINGS AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS

A. Tablet Arm Chairs

1. Model No.: #1797-TA Bundle Chair

2. Color: Golden Oak

3. Manufacturer: E & I Cooperative Services155 Northpoint Ave, Suite #114Highpoint, NC 27260or equal.

B. Instructional Chairs

1. Model No.: #1718-Solid Oak

2. Color: Golden Oak

3. Manufacturer: E & I Cooperative Services155 Northpoint Ave, Suite #114Highpoint, NC 27260or equal.

C. Instructor Table Top and Attached Legs

1. Table top

a. Model No.: #16693-Laminated Standard Desk Top

b. Color: Golden Oak

c. Manufacturer: Allied International2920 Y St., N.E.Washington, D.C. 20024or equal.

2. Attached legs

a. Model No.: #FTL-1, Fixed Height Table Legs Overall Height: 29" Tubular Steel Thickness: 1-1/4"

b. Color: Beige Enamel

c. Manufacturer: Kreuger Co.300 D St., S.W.Washington, D.C. 20024or equal.

12. CLASSROOM FURNISHINGS AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS

D. Audio Visual Screens

1. Model: Bretford Series, Draper Luma, or equal.

Measurements: 70" X 70"96" X 96"

2. Model: Bretford Series, Draper Luma II, or equal.

Measurements: 10' X 10'12' X 12'

3. Frame Color: Black

4. Screen Color: Matt White

END12. DESIGN STANDARDS FOR INSTRUCTIONAL SPACE (5.1.96)

This is a general set of guidelines and specifications and specific projectapplications requires prior discussion/review with Dr. Sue Clabaugh, ComputerScience Center. In addition, an update is currently underway with a projectedcompletion of September 1996.

INTRODUCTION

Instruction is at the heart of the mission of every college or university.Since much of the formal instruction that takes place on a campus occurs inclassrooms, it is important to recognize their contribution to the wholelearning environment experienced by students. Yet as critical as classroomsare, they have historically suffered from a lack of attention, both in theoriginal design and construction and in continued maintenance and operations.It is hoped that this document will provide guidelines that are useful inimproving instructional facilities at institutions of higher education.

The basic premise embodied in this document is that, regardless of the method ofinstruction being used, students have a fundamental right to expect a classroomlearning environment that allows them to see anything presented visually, tohear any audible presentation free from noises and distortions, and to bephysically comfortable (air flow, temperature, furniture, etc.).

Three categories of classrooms are described in this document. A general-purpose classroom is defined as a room designed to house 75 or fewer students,

with at least 350 square feet and a minimum capacity of 20 student stations.Anything less than that, in terms of size or capacity, is defined as a seminarroom. Any classroom designed for more than 75 students is considered a lecturehall. Separate sections of guidelines have been prepared for each type ofclassroom; however, the lines between them are not absolute and require someinterpretation based on individual facilities and applications.

It should be noted that the definitions used in these guidelines are not relatedto the Higher Education General Information Survey (HEGIS), or theClassification of Instructional Programs, (CIP), or any other standards thathave been developed for room classifications. Rather, these definitions aregeared to size and design characteristics.

GENERAL PURPOSE CLASSROOMS

A. Site and Space Relationships

1. Classrooms should be concentrated on the lower floors of buildings. Thisprovides better student access and allows instructional support services to beprovided more conveniently. A building with mixed functions (classrooms,offices, and/or laboratories) should have a classroom core that is separate fromother functions.

12. DESIGN STANDARDS FOR INSTRUCTIONAL SPACE

2. Classrooms should be located away from noise-generating activities takingplace either outside or inside the building. To reduce external noise, it isimportant to consider sound separation from such areas as streets, parking lots,housing areas, plazas or other areas where students gather, recreation sites,athletic fields, trash pickup sites, and loading docks. To reduce internalnoise, classrooms should not be located adjacent to building mechanical systems,elevators, restrooms, vending areas, etc.

3. Entrances/Exits

a. To reduce the impact of exterior noise and temperature differences, allbuilding entrances into classroom areas should have two sets of doors, one fromthe outside into a vestibule and a second from the vestibule into the building.

b. The principal determinant of the location of these entrances should be theflow of student traffic. Entrances should be close to classrooms so thatstudents do not have to travel great distances through non-instructional areasto reach classrooms. It also should be recognized that a large number ofstudents passing through hallways to exits represent a potential source ofdisturbance to classes still in session.

c. In determining the size of entrances/exits, local building codes shouldnot be the sole criterion. It is important to plan for a flow of studentsbetween classes which can be double the capacity of the rooms serviced by anentrance/exit. It is unrealistic to assume that all of the students leavingwill be gone before the students coming to the next class begin to arrive.

d. If classrooms are located on upper floors, it is essential that thestairtowers and the doors into the stairtowers have sufficient capacity to

accommodate the between-class student traffic. Stairtowers must be able toaccommodate double the capacity of the rooms serviced by the stairtowers.


4. Hallways

a. The design of buildings housing classrooms should recognize that studentswill be in the hallways or public areas while classes are in session. Thus,some built-in or permanently affixed seating should be provided. Lackingseating, students will sit on the floor, which has the potential of interruptingtraffic flow through the hallways.

b. The lower portion of the hallway walls should have a very durable surfacein anticipation that such things as equipment carts will occasionally bumpagainst the wall. This is in addition to normal student wear and tear. Sound-absorbent material should be applied to the upper portion of hallways, startingabout seven feet above the floor, to provide for control of sound in thesepublic areas. Any changes in elevation of the floor in a hallway should makeprovisions for wheelchair and equipment passage through the use of a ramp. Theramp should have a rise of no more than one inch for every twelve inches (1:12)of horizontal surface.

c. The floors of hallways should be smooth to minimize noise and tofacilitate the movement of equipment carts and wheelchairs. Floors also shouldhave a nonskid surface, especially near the outside entrances.

d. In hallways and other public areas, use a variety of materials and colors.This will not only help with acoustics but will add visual interest as well.

5. Other Considerations

a. Vending areas should be remote from the classrooms. They should belocated in an alcove or other similar location so as to minimize the congestionfactor resulting when students are using the machines.

b. Trash/recycling containers should be located both in the vending area andin the classroom areas.


c. Restrooms should be located on each floor and the capacity of therestrooms should be geared to the number of students in the area during changeof class rather than only to the capacity of the classrooms. In no case shouldthere be a common wall or ceiling between any classroom and the restrooms inorder to prevent noise transmission between the two facilities.

d. An accessible public telephone should be located in an obvious area of thelobby or entrance area of the building. The phone should not obstruct theentrances. The telephone should be accessible to persons with disabilities,with a variable volume control feature for hearing-impaired users and located atan appropriate height for persons in wheelchairs.

e. A directory of the location of classrooms should be provided at eachentrance along with a directory of any other relevant function that may exist inthe building. If there are multiple corridors leading away from a point ofentry to a floor, directional signs should indicate the location of classrooms.

B. Dimensions of Classrooms

1. Classrooms should be designed so that the length is approximately one andone-half times the width of the room. Rooms wider than they are deep normallypresent unacceptable viewing angles for projected materials and for informationwritten on the chalkboard. With increased use of projected materials,especially computer imaging, the shape and dimensions of classrooms are morecritical than ever before.

2. The instructor area should be on the narrow wall of the room.

3. There should be no obstructions (such as posts) anywhere in the classroom.The front wall of the room behind the instructor area should have no protrusionsinto the room so that a chalkboard/ markerboard can be installed across theentire wall of the instructor area.


4. Ceiling heights will vary depending upon the size of the room. Thefollowing are suggested minimum ceiling heights:

Capacity Flat Floor Sloped/Tiered Floor

up to 20 10 feet

21-49 12 feet

50-75 12 feet 8 feet in rear, 12 feet in front

5. It is highly desirable to have clear space above the ceiling that is freeof systems (mechanical, utility, etc.) to allow room for installing electricaland telecommunication systems and providing structural supports for mountingequipment.

6. In general, sloped/tiered floors are appropriate only in unusualcircumstances because such rooms severely limit the ability of students to workin groups, which is an increasingly important instructional strategy. Theincline of sloped floors should be no more than a 1:12 ratio. In addition,there should be an entrance at the lower end of the sloped floor so that

equipment can be brought to the teaching station of the room and wheelchairaccess can be provided.

C. Entrances and Exits in Rooms

1. Rooms having a capacity of under 50 normally should have a singleentrance/exit at the rear of the room. If adding capacity to the room is afactor, a single entrance at the front of the room may make it possible for morestudent stations to be added to the room since entry space can be accommodatedas part of the instructor area. Rooms of 50-75 capacity should have twoentrances/exits, generally one at the front and one at the rear.

2. All entrances and exits should facilitate the easy passage of people withdisabilities. The entrances also should accommodate moving equipment into andout of the room.


3. All doors should be a minimum of three feet wide and should have a visionpanel in order to prevent injury when being opened. Vision panels should be ofshatter-resistant glass and should be tinted to reduce light transmission. Thearea of the glass should not exceed 100 square inches. The base of the visionpanel should be no more than 42 inches above the floor, and the top of thevision panel should extend at least 62 inches above the floor. All classroomdoors should have levers (not knobs) for easier use by people with disabilities.

4. All doors should have a closure mechanism that creates a minimum amount ofnoise when functioning. The doors also should be equipped with a rubber bumperdoor silencer. It is advantageous if all doors can be left open if needed,provided that this meets applicable building codes.

5. If locks are installed in the doors, they should be deadbolt key- or card-activated only. No push button locks should be used.

6. Because ventilation louvers permit sound transmission, doors should notcontain louvers unless local codes require them.

7. It is recommended that kick plates be installed on the egress side of allwooden doors.

8. Doors should be located so as to minimize congestion problems in thehallway when classes are changing. When possible, doors should be recessed intothe room so that the door does not swing into the hallway. If it is necessaryfor the door to open into the hallway, consideration should be given to somekind of visual identification (such as the tile pattern in the floor) toindicate the amount of space that the door will occupy when it swings open.Doors should not swing into the primary flow of traffic to minimize the dangerof someone in the hallway walking into the leading edge of the door.


D. Windows

A number of factors need to be considered in determining whether or not windowswill be designed into new construction.

1. Considerations for Rooms with Windows

a. The two principal advantages of windows are aesthetic and environmental.The presence of windows in a room provides for visual contact with the worldoutside. All windows in classrooms should be operable so that they can beopened to provide additional air circulation when needed, particularly when thebuilding heating, ventilating and air-conditioning system is not in operation.Windows should either raise and lower or open outward (never inward). It alsoshould be recognized that windows need to be washed on a regular schedule inclassrooms as elsewhere within the institution.

b. Window treatments should be opaque and should be capable of eliminatingall outside light from reaching the projection screen(s).

c. When windows are installed, particularly on the south side of thebuilding, it is recommended that tinted glass with a low E rating be used. Thiswill reduce the heat transfer from the outside to the inside of the room.Double, or even triple, glazed windows will assist in reducing heat transfer aswell as provide a barrier to exterior noises entering the room.

d. Even when windows are preferred in classrooms, the surface area should bekept at a minimum. All window surfaces should be at the side of the room andnot located in the front or rear of the room.

2. Considerations for Rooms without Windows

a. Advantages to not having windows in a classroom include the ease of lightcontrol, the elimination of heat loss or gain during periods of extremetemperatures, and the elimination of sound migration from traffic or otherexterior sources.

12. DESIGN STANDARDS FOR INSTRUCTIONAL SPACE (6.15.97)

b. Architectural design often requires that the exterior of a building havewindows. This requirement can be met by having windows in other spaces(lobbies, hallways, offices, etc.) rather than in classrooms.

c. Any classroom that does not have windows must be air conditioned. Inaddition, if there are no windows, extra care must be given to the use ofinterior finishes, colors, and decor to provide visual interest to the room.

E. Finishes

1. Color and Reflectance Values

a. The selection of color and the reflectance values of finish materials mustbe considered for all classrooms. Painted surfaces should be light in color,and should be a durable finish to allow washing. A soft matte finish markseasily, is difficult to clean, and, therefore, should be avoided.

b. Special care must be given to rooms where televised instructionalactivities will originate. Light blue and beige are good choices for theseareas. In addition, all finishes should be nonglare.

c. The reflectance value of paints, laminates, and other finish materialsshould be selected to enhance ambient illumination and the illumination atworking surfaces. The following values are recommended:

Ceilings 70-90%Walls 40-60%Floors 30-50%Desktops 35-50%Chalkboards 20-30%

d. Reflectance values can be found in selection charts and samples.


2. Floors

a. The floor in the general classroom should be vinyl or rubber tile andshould have a smooth surface. Carpeting should be used only under specialcircumstances because it is more difficult to maintain. If carpeting isinstalled, it needs to be factored into the overall acoustical characteristicsof the room.

b. The floor covering should be a medium to light color and should containsome kind of subdued pattern or fleck to break the monotony and to improve theoverall maintenance of the floors.

c. A four-inch cove base should be installed around all of the walls.

3. Walls

a. A chair rail should be installed on the side and back walls whenevermovable seating is used in the room. The surface below the chair rail orchalkboard should be extremely durable, such as epoxy paint. All surfaces mustbe washable.

b. The finishes used in a classroom should be chosen with the room'sacoustical characteristics in mind. Accent colors or design elements should beused to provide visual interest to the room.

4. Ceilings

Ceilings should be of a light color and of nonreflective material. (See nextsection regarding the acoustical characteristics of the ceiling.)

F. Acoustics

1. Walls

a. Walls in general-purpose classrooms should have a Sound TransmissionCoefficient (STC) rating of no less than 50.

b. All walls must extend to the floor above or to the roof construction, andnot stop at the ceiling. This will reduce noise transmission as well asimprove security.12. DESIGN STANDARDS FOR INSTRUCTIONAL SPACE

c. Higher STC ratings and special wall-construction details must be includedwhenever classrooms are located adjacent to, above, or below restrooms,mechanical rooms, elevator shafts, athletic facilities, or other sources of highnoise levels or where the classroom function generates a significant amount ofnoise, such as a music room.

d. Concrete masonry units may be used as structural walls, but may have to becovered with another finish in order to provide proper acoustics.

e. Folding walls are extremely undesirable and should avoided. It isdifficult to develop a folding-wall design that is able to maintain adequatesound separation between classrooms over an extended period of time.

f. Sound levels as generated by mechanical systems or other ambient noisemeasured at all points in a classroom at four feet above the floor must have anNoise Criterion (NC) rating of no more than 35.

2. Ceiling

a. The surface of the ceiling must be designed to accommodate the requiredacoustical properties of the room. The area of the ceiling to be acousticaltile is a function of ceiling height.

Ceiling Height % of Acoustical Tile 8 feet 40-50 10 feet 50-60 12 feet 50-60

These numbers presume the use of Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) .55-.65 tilein a ceiling suspension system. The acoustical tile should be arranged in theform of a U around the perimeter of the room, with the opening at the front andthe rest of the ceiling a hard material such as gypsum board or plaster.


3. Mechanical Systems

a. The mechanical system supporting general-purpose classrooms shouldgenerate a background noise of no more than NC 35. To achieve this, the systemrequires not only careful design, but competent installation, balancing, and aregular maintenance program once installed.

b. Factors that influence the design of a quiet operating system include airhandlers or fans located away from the classrooms; low velocity of air withinthe room; and proper sizing and acoustical treatment of ducts, returns, anddiffusers.

c. The circulation of air is a critical factor in all instructional spaces.However, this must not be achieved at the cost of effective control of HVACsystem-generated background noise.

4. Utility Boxes

When classrooms share a common wall, electrical receptacles or other utilityboxes should not be installed back-to-back with similar receptacles in the nextroom. Off-setting the boxes will reduce sound transmission between rooms.

5. Window and Floor Treatments

Window and floor treatments should be selected as an integral part of theacoustical treatment of the room. Heavy draperies and carpeting could have theeffect of creating a room without any reverberation characteristics.

G. Lighting and Lighting Controls

The control of light in a general-purpose classroom has become increasinglyimportant with the growing use of technology. While the correct lighting levelscan be achieved through a variety of approaches, it is essential that allclassrooms have the full range of lighting possibilities, from a comfortablereading level to darkening sufficiently to allow for all types of projectionwhile still permitting note taking.


1. Controls

a. All switching should be kept simple, with the user in mind. Lightswitches should be clearly labeled as to function. Standardization among roomsis recommended.

b. Switching for the room lights should be provided at every entrance to theroom. In addition, the room lights should be controlled from the teachingstation as should any lights that are capable of being dimmed.

c. To accommodate projection needs, room lights should be switched by zonefrom the front to the rear of the room.

d. All automated light control systems should provide for a manual override.

2. Ceiling Lighting

a. The room lights should provide 50-60 foot-candles at each writing surface,including the teaching station. There should be an even level throughout theroom with no bright spots or dark spots. Diffusers used in ceiling fixturesshould be nonreflective.

b. It should be possible to reduce the lighting in the room to 5-10 foot-candles over the seating area with all direct light eliminated from theinstructor and projection screen areas.

c. A work light must be provided in the instructor area with care given thatthe light does not spill onto the projection screen.

d. If incandescent are used for dimming, they should be evenly spaced andshould begin over the seating area well back from the projection screen. Iffluorescent lights are dimmable, careful engineering is needed to make certainthat the lights can be dimmed to the correct level without inducing a flicker.

e. Fluorescent lights should be laid into the ceiling or flush-mounted to theceiling. Diffusers should be cleaned regularly and evaluated as to the need forchanging on a periodic basis.


f. Lighting systems should meet program requirements while achieving energyefficiency.

3. Chalkboard/Markerboard Lighting

a. The illumination of the chalkboard/markerboard should be at a level of 75foot-candles uniformly across the entire writing surface.Chalkboard/markerboard lighting may be necessary in rooms of more than a 50-student capacity. The lighting should be installed so it does not create brightspots or shadows on the surface of the board. Further, the lamps in thefixtures should not be directly visible to students sitting in the front rows ofseating.

b. The chalkboard/markerboard lights should be switched in two sections sothat one part of the board can be illuminated when one projection screen isbeing used.

c. The lights also should be mounted so as not to interfere with theeffective use of the projection screens.

4. Exit Signs

Exit signs should conform to local codes and be self-illuminating. Insofar aspossible, these should be located so as not to produce ambient light on theprojection screen or otherwise compete for visual attention.

H. Electrical and Telecommunication Services

1. Electrical Services

a. All electrical services should be protected from surges and spikes.Except in the case of very special needs, outlets should not be controlled byany switch that could be confused for a light switch.

b. Each room should have one or more dedicated circuit(s) on a breaker, notshared by any other room. The breaker panel should be on the same floor as theroom, and each breaker in the panel should be clearly labeled as to thefunction.


c. New construction should make provision for a minimum of 20 percent, with arecommended 40 percent, future increase in the need for electrical services inthe classroom area. This would include additional capacity in the breaker boxfor this future use.

d. The number of electrical outlets in the room will depend in part onspecial functions that may be assigned to the room. In general, rooms under 50capacity should have a single duplex outlet in each side of the room, onefourplex outlet in the rear wall of the room centrally located, two duplexoutlets in the front corners of the room, and one fourplex outlet located in thecenter of the front wall.

e. In rooms of 50-75 capacity, there should be two outlets evenly spaced ineach side wall, three fourplex outlets in the front, and two fourplex outlets inthe rear.

f. All wall outlets should be mounted 18-24 inches above the floor. Inaddition, electrical service (and conduits/cable trays) should be provided inthe ceiling for future projection and wireless communication capability.

g. There should be no elevator motors, compressor motors, blower motors, orother types of equipment on the side of the power transformer that feeds theclassroom circuits.

2. Telecommunication Services

a. Every classroom should be connected to campus networks for voice, data,and video communication.

b. There should be one dedicated telecommunications closet of adequate sizeper wing, per floor of a classroom facility. Attention should be given to theHVAC needs of these closets because of heat generated by the equipment.


c. The central feed conduit or cable tray from the closet to each classroomshould make provisions for voice, data, and video. Anytime an empty conduit isinstalled, it should contain a pull wire. A wiring box convenient to the hallor other entrance path to the room should be installed in the ceiling withconduit or cable tray to the front and rear center of the room, to each sidewall above the ceiling, and from the front to the rear of the room.

d. All low-voltage connections should be separated from the electricalcircuit(s) to the room. The low-voltage services should be isolated from eachother through separate conduit. These services include controls for slideprojectors, audio, video, data, and voice feeds. These circuits should not betied to ground.

e. Spare capacity to accommodate future growth should be built into newconstruction.

f. All circuits, wiring, conduits, and cable trays should be clearly labeledat all termination locations so that a knowledgeable person who has never seenthe installation before can identify the services in the room.

g. There must be two-way voice communication from each classroom to the ADMSCenter.

I. Furnishings and Equipment

1. Instructor Area

A sturdy table or desk should be placed at the front of the room as part of theinstructor area. This area also should include either a tabletop or free-standing floor podium with a minimum surface of 18" x 24". There also should bea stool or chair available at the teaching station. This furniture should becoordinated with the other furniture in the room.


2. Student Stations

a. In determining the seating capacity of a room (regardless of which type ofstudent furniture is used) an additional 50 square feet should be allowed forthe teaching station. The formula to arrive at the correct number of studentstations in a room is to take the total square footage of the room less 50square feet for the teaching station, divided by the number of square feet pertype of seating, i.e., movable seating, tables and chairs, or fixed seating.

1. Room Capacity = Total Square Feet - 50 Station Factor

2. Station Factors: movable tablet armchairs: 15 tables and chairs: 20 fixed seating: 15

b. Movable Seating

1. It is recommended that rooms under 50 capacity should have movable seatingunless there are special considerations. When using movable tablet armchairs, aminimum allocation of 15 square feet per student is recommended. This stationfactor includes the seating area and the aisles.

2. The tablet arms should contain at least 150 square inches of writingsurface. While larger tablet arms are desirable, such factors as durability,weight, and stability also must be considered. Both the tablet arm and thechair should be of durable material and comfortable to use. Ease of maintenanceand availability of spare parts should be major considerations in the selectionof all types of seating. For example, field replaceable parts eliminatetransporting seats to a repair shop. It is recommended that a supply of spareparts be purchased when new chairs are purchased.


c. Tables and Chairs

Tables and chairs are highly desirable because of the additional workspaceprovided to students. However, this arrangement does reduce the student seatingcapacity of the room in that it is necessary to allow approximately 20 squarefeet per student station. In general, tables used in classrooms should be 18-24inches deep. Deeper tables will increase station size and reduce capacity ofthe room.

d. Fixed Seating

1. Rooms of 50-75 capacity should be evaluated as to the intended use indetermining whether fixed or movable seating should be installed. However, if afloor is sloped or tiered, fixed seating should be used.

2. When using fixed seating with a folding tablet arm, it is recommended that15 square feet per student station is ideal, which includes the seating area andaisles. The writing surface on the folding tablet should be at least 150 squareinches.

e. Left-Handed Seating

Both movable and fixed seating should contain a minimum of 10 percent left-handed tablet arms or should contain chairs designed to be used by either right-or left-handed people. The left-handed seats in fixed seating arrangementsshould be along the left side of the aisle when viewed from the instructor area.

f. Stationsfor Students with Mobility impairments

Stations for students with mobility impairments, including those usingwheelchairs should be provided at approximately four percent of the capacity ofthe room. These stations should be available in the rear of the room and in thefront of the room, assuming appropriate accessibility. To accommodate studentsusing wheelchairs, an adjustable height table should be provided.


g. Design Characteristics of Seating

1. When designing classrooms, anthropometrics, the comparative study of humanbody measurement, should be considered to make certain that furnishings andequipment will be suitable for the persons for whom the space is intended.Generally speaking, when designing for institutional use, equipment andfurnishings should accommodate the "tallest and the smallest" persons; that is,everyone within the 5th and 95th percentiles. This means that 5 percent of thepopulation will be too small to be comfortable, and 5 percent will be too largeto be comfortable. According to Panero and Zelnik in Human Dimension & InteriorSpace, A Source Book of Design Reference Standards, classrooms should bedesigned for the 5 percent woman (104.5 pounds and 60 inches) and the 95 percentman (215.4 pounds and 74.3 inches).

2. In establishing which percentile one should use for each dimension, thefollowing general guidelines are helpful.

a. When establishing clearance lines (lines of sight, aisles, seat widths,thigh clearance, etc.), always use the 95th percentile.

b. When establishing vertical-grip reach, heights of equipment, seat heightand depth, and placement of audio-visual equipment and controls, always use the5th percentile.

c. In establishing lines of sight, joint motions and positions should betaken into consideration. The limit of visual field, both in horizontal andvertical planes, should never be exceeded. The design solution should accountfor normal line of sight, limit of color discrimination, and the actual limit ofvisual field.


3. Chalkboards/Markerboards

a. All general-purpose classrooms should have chalkboards/markerboards acrossas much of the front wall, i.e., the instructor area wall, as possible. Theinstallation of side or rear wall boards should be dictated by the programs thatwill use the room and should take into account viewing angles.

b. The chalkboards/markerboards should be mounted with the bottom edge of thechalk tray 36 inches above the finished floor. The boards should be four feetin height and have chalk trays under the full width of the board. Seams on thechalkboards/markerboards should be flush. The surface of the chalkboard shouldbe black to provide maximum contrast with the chalk being used. (SeeChalkboard/Markerboard Lighting.)

c. While markerboards eliminate chalkdust, markers are more expensive andonly those made for markerboards should be used since others can permanentlydamage the markerboard surface.

d. There should be a two-inch tack strip above the chalkboard and map hooksattached to the tack strip or the top of the chalkboard.

4. Tackboard

There should be nothing larger than a tack strip above thechalkboard/markerboard or elsewhere inside the classroom. A tackboard in thehall, convenient to each cluster of classrooms, should be used to post studentannouncements and other types of general information. In addition, a tackboardor tack strip should be installed outside of each classroom in the immediatevicinity of the doorway so that grades and other class related items may beposted.


a. Voice Amplification

Voice amplification should be considered in rooms of 50-75 capacity. Thedecision should be based on outside noise factors, the acousticalcharacteristics of the room, and any special needs.12. DESIGN STANDARDS FOR INSTRUCTIONAL SPACE

b. Trash and Recycling Receptacles

Trash and recycling receptacles should be available near the door of eachclassroom. Receptacles should have a large opening and be large enough toaccommodate trash generated between scheduled collection times.

c. Pencil Sharpener

It is recommended that a pencil sharpener be conveniently located in or neareach classroom and be securely mounted with tamper-resistant screws.

6. Projection Screens

a. The need for multiple projection surfaces within classrooms is increasingas more technology is being used in instruction. The standard that has heldtrue in the past, of a single screen mounted in the center of the front of theroom, is no longer adequate.

b. There are two methods of adding a second projection screen to the front ofthe room. Regardless of the method, screens should be mounted so as not tohinder access to light switches or other controls.

1. The first method is to hang two screens side by side across the front wallof the instructor area. If this method is chosen, a minimum of six running feetof chalkboard should remain exposed when either one of the projection screens isin use.

2. The second configuration is to put one in the center front of the room asis usually done, and add a second in the corner at the front of the room. Onceagain, if this configuration is chosen, a minimum of six feet ofchalkboard/markerboard space should be exposed when either one of the projectionscreens is in use. It may, therefore, be necessary to mount the center screensomewhat off the center line of the room in order to assure that there will besix feet of board exposed.12. DESIGN STANDARDS FOR INSTRUCTIONAL SPACE

3. The most effective corner screen is a rigid-frame tilt screen, sizedspecifically to the needs of the overhead projector. In mounting a cornerscreen, it is necessary to allow sufficient distance between the screen and theoverhead projector to provide a picture on the screen of adequate size for theroom. This may have an impact on the seating arrangement within the room.

c. All screens are recommended to be a flat matte finish. This surfaceprovides acceptable picture quality up to 45 degrees on either side of thecenter line of the room. Long, narrow rooms may benefit from a glass-beaded orlenticular screen which has a narrower viewing cone but provides a brighterimage.

d. Screens mounted parallel to the front of the room should be mounted withthe top of the screen 10-12 inches out from the wall. This will allow thescreen to clear any chalkboard/ markerboard lights, the board, map hooks, andthe chalk rail as well as provide a means of correction for keystoning since thebottom of the screen can be pulled back to the wall with a tieback. The tiebackshould be located under the center of the screen at or just below the chalkboardtray.

e. The minimum size for a projection screen should be six feet in width witha larger size if the room is more than 35 feet from front to back. The lengthof the screen should extend from the mounting location at or very near theceiling to approximately three feet above the floor, or approximately the levelof the chalk tray.

f. The first row of seats should be no closer to the screen than one and one-half times the image width on the screen. The optimum is two times the imagewidth to the first row of seats.


g. The standard for the size of projection screens has changed with theintroduction of electronic projection of both television and computer images.Optical projection (films and slides) has very high-resolution images resultingin a formula of distance from the screen to the farthest viewer of six times thescreen width (1:6). The image that fills the screen is clearly visible toanyone with normal vision in any seat in the room using this formula.

h. However, with the introduction of electronic projection, a new standardmust be applied. The standard for these projection systems provides anywherefrom 12.5-25 percent of the resolution of optical projection. This isparticularly critical in computer image projection, which is often comprised oftext. This lower resolution results in a loss of sharpness in edge definition.At marginal viewer distance, the letters tend to blur and fill in, resulting inreduced readability. Because of these factors, the distance from the screen tothe farthest viewer should be revised to four times the screen width (1:4). Ina room where the farthest viewer is 40 feet from the screen, a 10-foot widescreen is required. When electronic projection is used, edge tension projectionscreen should be installed.

i. A further consideration applies if a three-tube color projection system isused. These systems have edge roll, which requires an additional six inches ofscreen width on each side of the image to provide maximum viewing by thestudent.

j. The top of the screen should subtend an angle no greater than 35 degreesfrom the horizontal from any seating position. However, some compromises mayhave to be made in the first few rows of seats to allow sufficient space forchalkboard/markerboard and a reasonable screen size, and yet not have the frontseats too far from the front of the room.


7. Data/Video Imaging

a. For effective television viewing, whether the monitor/receiver is builtinto the room or portable, it is recommended that the viewer farthest from thescreen be no more than one foot per diagonal inch of the receiver tube size awayfrom the screen. Thus, for a 25-inch television set, all viewers should bewithin a 25-foot radius of the television screen.

b. When a portable television monitor/receiver is used, carefully evaluateequipment being purchased for safety considerations. Monitor/receivers mountedon carts tend to be top heavy and can cause serious injury or damage if they arenot designed, built, and/or used properly. The International CommunicationsIndustries Association (ICIA) has established standards regarding carts used tomove portable television equipment to and from classrooms. It is recommendedthat these standards be followed in all instances.

c. If the television monitor/receiver is mounted on the wall or to theceiling, sets should be secured and tilted down for easy viewing. If the setneeds to be mounted over an aisle, the lowest part of the mount should be atleast seven feet from the floor or mounted on a cane detectable cabinet or rack.Special attention needs to be given to avoid glare from lights and windows onthe face of the picture tube of any monitor or receiver permanently mounted in aclassroom.

d. For a relatively modest additional cost, monitor/receivers can bepurchased which will display computer images. These are most useful inclassrooms where viewer distance is less than the recommended one foot perdiagonal inch since characters found in many computer images are small and maybe difficult to read at greater distances.


e. The projection of computer images requires a number of specialconsiderations. All displays must accommodate an 80-character line, and eachcharacter must be clearly visible to a student with average eyesight, seatedanywhere in the classroom. If a monitor/receiver is used for computer imaging,it should be a multisynchronized unit. A number of projection devices areavailable and care must be exercised to insure that the projection device ismatched to the output of the computer.

8. Equipment Storage

a. Adequate and secure storage for all types of instructional equipment mustbe provided in the proximity of the classrooms. This storage should beaccessible from the hallway and not require entering a classroom foraccessibility. Any classroom on a floor not accessible by an elevator shouldhave storage provided for instructional equipment and cart(s).

b. Special considerations must be given regarding security of any equipmentthat is permanently assigned to a general classroom. It is recommended that allsuch equipment be clearly marked in such a way as to make the identificationdifficult to remove.

J. Signage

1. Signage in and around a classroom should be kept to a minimum and shouldbe coordinated with other signs and with the general decor of the area.

2. All general-purpose classrooms should have a room identification number onthe wall next to the door. These numbers should be accessible to and meaningfulto all students in accordance with local code.

3. There should be information located inside and outside each classroomregarding how to report problems with physical facilities and with equipment inthe classroom.


4. When movable seating is used, a notice as to the capacity of the roomshould be prominently posted within the room. This will assist the custodialstaff in maintaining the proper inventory of student seating in the room.

K. HVAC Issues

1. The heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning (HVAC) system must provideadequate air changes per hour in conformance with current standards of theAmerican Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Airconditioning Engineers(ASHRAE). The recirculation of air within the building should not be done insuch a way as to result in hall noise entering the room.

2. Air ventilation units should neither blow directly on the seating area noron the instructor area. The air circulation system in the room should be ableto be used at all times separately from any HVAC system that may be operatedonly seasonally.

3. The temperature range should be maintained within 68-75 degrees, withhumidity at 50 percent, plus or minus 10 percent.

4. No building should be designed so that the windows and doors are essentialto temperature control within the building. Ideally, each classroom should havea temperature-sensitive monitoring device within it and that device should betied to a central monitoring system maintained and overseen by physical plantadministration.

5. The acoustical considerations in determining volume of air-handling noiseshould include, in addition to the background noise level, any vibrationconsiderations that would generate additional noise.

6. Air intakes for classrooms should not be located in or near loading docks,trash receptacles, or areas of high vehicular traffic outside the building.Additionally, air exchanges inside buildings should isolate air circulated inclassrooms from air circulated in laboratories and other potentially hazardousareas.

7. The system servicing classrooms should operate independently of anysystem(s) servicing other functions within the same building.


8. In buildings that are not air-conditioned, the installation of low-velocity ceiling fans will provide air circulation, which is an importantenvironmental element in all classrooms.


LECTURE HALLS

INTRODUCTION

Three fundamental requirements (to see all visual material, to hear withoutnoise or distortion, and to be physically comfortable) are of special concern inlecture halls. It is difficult to design good classrooms of any size, but thedifficulties are magnified as the rooms get larger. For example, larger lecturehalls require more entrances and exits, larger projection screen images, greatervoice amplification, more complex lighting and audiovisual control, specialacoustical design, and greater control of the environment by the instructor.Likewise, problems which occur during a large lecture class are magnified to agreater degree than in the smaller general class as a result of decreasedflexibility in the arrangement of the learning environment and the teachingstrategies that can be used.

A. Site and Space Relationships

Lecture halls should be located on the ground floor of the building so as tofacilitate the movement of large numbers of students to and from the lecturehalls. Further, lecture halls should be located so that students can enter orexit the building without passing through major portions of the building thatcontain other classrooms or spaces for other functions. The lecture halls alsoshould be located well away from any noise-generating activities, eitherinternal or external. These activities can include the mechanical systemsoperating within the building or such external sources of noise as trash pickupsites, loading docks, streets, or areas where students congregate.

1. Entrances/Exits

a. To reduce the impact of exterior noise and temperature differences, allbuilding entrances/exits located in the vicinity of lecture halls should havetwo sets of doors, one from the outside into a vestibule and a second from thevestibule into the building.

b. The principal determinant of the location of these entrances should be theflow of student traffic to and from the building. All entrances/exits should belocated as conveniently as possible to these patterns of traffic.


c. In determining the size of the entrances/exits, building codes should notbe the sole criterion. First, it is essential to recognize that large numbersof students will be passing through the entrance/exit areas in a concentratedperiod of time between classes. These considerations should include not onlythe number of students entering/exiting the lecture hall (roughly double thecapacity of the room) but also the number of students who might be going to

other locations within the building through the same entrance/exit. Second,this planning must recognize the two-way nature of the traffic flow. Studentswill enter and exit the building at the same time which can cause congestionunless entrances/exits are designed appropriately.

2. Lobby Area

a. Lobby space is needed in conjunction with each entrance/exit of thelecture hall. This lobby space should be large enough to allow students tocongregate without interfering with the normal traffic flow of students enteringor leaving the facility.

If a lecture hall will be used for special events that include a reception, thenlobby areas should be big enough to accommodate such activities. If a lecturehall will be used primarily for classes, then lobbies must be sufficient forwaiting students.

b. Seating in the lobby area is needed but it should be far enough from theentrance/exit to the lecture hall so as to avoid any noise interference causedby normal student interaction. Seating also should be designed with durabilityin mind and, whenever possible, should be integrated into the overall structureof the building, rather than being placed separately from the building.

c. The surfaces and finishes in the lobby area should consist of very durablematerials because of the large volume of student traffic in the area. Thisshould include the floors and the lower portion of the walls. The upper portionof the walls, above seven feet, should include some sound-dampening materials tohelp control noise originating in the lobby area.


d. The lobby area is one of the most visible and heavily used portions of thebuilding. For this reason, the aesthetics of the lobby should be considered animportant element in the design of the area, along with the need for durability.


a. Vending machines should not be located in the lobby area outside a lecturehall. Vending areas should be remote from the lecture hall and should havetrash/ recycling containers in the immediate area of the vending machines. Anytrash/recycling containers in the lobby area should integrate with the overallaesthetic treatment of that lobby area.

b. Restrooms are needed in the vicinity of the lecture hall, but in no caseshould there be a common wall between the restrooms and the lecture hall.Restrooms should be so located in the building that they can remain open in theevening, even if the remainder of the building is closed. Lecture halls veryoften are used for a variety of activities in the evening, thus, requiring theavailability of restrooms. Restrooms should be accessible to persons withdisabilities and for security purposed should not be isolated.

c. A public telephone should be located in the immediate vicinity of thelecture hall and installed in such a way so as not to obstruct the normal flowof traffic through the lobby area. The telephone should be accessible topersons with disabilities, with a variable volume-control feature for people who

are hearing-impaired and located at an appropriate height for persons usingwheelchairs.

B. Dimensions of Lecture Halls

1. Large lecture halls (those seating more than 100 students) should be amodified fan-shape. Ideally, no student should be more than 45 degrees off thecenter axis of the room. The depth of the room should not be greater than oneand one-half times the width of the room, measured at the midpoint of theseating area.


2. If the lecture hall has a sloped floor, the incline should be no more than1:12. The aisle must conform to ADA requirements (such as landings every 30').If the floor is tiered, and if there is a difference of four inches or lessbetween each tier, then seating should be staggered to permit clear visibilityto the front of the room.

3. The aisles in a lecture hall should be laid out to provide the maximum ofprime viewing locations for the audience. Generally, this will mean no centeraisle. Building codes must be consulted in determining the number of seats in acontinuous row and the distance between rows allowed in the location where thelecture hall is being built. Lighting in aisles (such as that found in movietheaters and airplanes) should be installed to clearly indicate aisles duringemergencies.

4. There should be no posts or other obstructions anywhere inside a lecturehall that would obstruct the view from any seat.

5. Special attention should be given to the amount of space available at theinstructor area for chalkboard/markerboard and for other visual presentations.The emphasis, particularly in large lecture halls, should be on the use ofprojection tools in the place of the chalkboard/markerboard in order to providefor maximum visibility to students throughout the lecture hall.

6. Ceiling heights will vary, depending upon the size of the room. Thefollowing are recommended minimum ceiling heights, based on the number ofstudent stations within the lecture hall. Higher ceilings may be needed if thelecture hall will have video projectors that are ceiling mounted.

Capacity Rear Ceiling Front Ceiling Height Height

75-149 8 feet 12 feet 150-299 8 feet 15 feet 300 or more 8 feet 18 feet

Walls in the lecture hall should not be parallel, nor should they have longsmooth surfaces. These construction features relate to acoustics in the lecturehall.


7. Small lecture halls (usually under 100-student capacity) may or may nothave a sloped/tiered floor. If the floor is flat, a teaching station platformmay be needed in the front of the room to improve sight lines between theinstructor and the students. In most instances, a six-inch high platform issufficient. The platform should be wheelchair accessible and be large enough toaccommodate all the necessary instructor furniture and equipment.

C. Entrances and Exits in Rooms

1. At-grade access should be provided to the front area of large lecturehalls which have sloped or tiered floors. This access is to facilitateentering/exiting of people using wheelchairs as well as the movement ofequipment into the front area of the room.

2. The principal entrances/exits for large lecture halls should be in therear section of the room, but, if at all possible, they should be in the sidewalls not the rear wall of the room. The purpose of having entrances in theside walls at the rear of the room is to reduce the amount of light reaching theprojection screen when the doors are open during the course of the class. Ifentrances must be at the rear, they should be designed so that light is trappedand does not enter the lecture hall. In lecture halls where there is a slopedor tiered floor, the floor must remain flat at least five feet from the entranceinto the room.

3. All entrances and exits should facilitate the easy access of people withdisabilities. This includes such things as the use of levers and not knobs ondoors, the width of doors, height of door hardware, etc.

4. There should be double doors at each entrance, with each door being aminimum of three feet wide. If it is necessary to have a center post betweenthe doors, it should be removable to facilitate the passage of large pieces ofequipment.

5. The direction of the swing of the doors is important. Doors should openinto the lobby area in such a way as not to obstruct the efficient flow oftraffic to and from the lecture hall. When possible, doors should be recessedinto the room.


6. The doors should be equipped with hardware that will facilitate the slowand quiet closure of the doors to a tight sound seal when the doors are fullyclosed. To facilitate traffic flow, the doors should be capable of staying openduring the change of classes. All exits from lecture halls should conform toprevailing codes regarding panic hardware for use in case of emergencies. Dooropening force, hardware, width, threshholds, and maneuvering clearance shouldconform to ADA.

7. All doors should have a vision panel with shatter-resistant tinted glassto reduce light transmission. The glass should not exceed 100 square inches.The base of the vision panel should be no more than 42 inches above the floor,and the top of the vision panel should extend at least 62 inches above thefloor.

8. If locks are installed in the doors, they should be key- or card-activatedonly. Push button locks should not be used.

9. The doors should resist noise transfer. To reduce noise transmission,doors should not contain louvers.

10. Kickplates should be installed on all doors on the egress side of thedoor.

D. Windows

All large lecture halls should be completely free of windows except for thevision panels in the doors. If the architectural design of the exterior of thebuilding requires windows, they should be placed in other spaces (offices,hallways, lobbies, etc.) rather than lecture halls.

E. Finishes

For information on color and reflectance values, see General Purpose Classrooms.


1. Floors

a. The floor should be non-skid vinyl or rubber tile and should have a smoothsurface. Carpeting should be used only under special circumstances because itis more difficult to maintain. If carpeting is used, it should be installedonly in the aisles and instructor are, not under the student seating area.Also, if carpeting is installed, it must be factored into the overall acousticalcharacteristics of the room.

b. The floor covering should be a medium to light color and should containsome kind of subdued pattern or fleck to break the monotony and to improve theoverall maintenance of the floors.

1. A four-inch cove base should be installed around all of the walls.

2. If a concrete floor is used in the student seating area, it should betinted at the time of mixing and then sealed.

2. Walls

a. Walls should be constructed of a durable material and should be basicallynonacoustically absorbent except in those areas of the lecture halls whereacoustical treatment is prescribed.

b. It is recommended that both the floor treatment and the wall treatment bein light colors with textures and designs used to add visual interest to theroom.

3. Ceilings

One important characteristic of the ceiling in a large lecture hall is its rolein the overall acoustical treatment of the room. Once this has been accountedfor, the other characteristics of the ceiling that should be considered are alight color and nonreflective material so as to remain neutral in the lightingscheme of the room.


F. Acoustics

The acoustical characteristics of a lecture hall are among the most criticalelements in the design of the facility. Care must be exercised in isolating thefacility from exterior noises as well as controlling the background noise levelin the room, especially that generated by the mechanical systems. Ambient soundlevels measured at four feet above the floor at all points throughout the roommust have a Noise Criterion (NC) rating of not more than 35.

The mix of sound-reflectant and sound-absorbent materials must be carefullycalculated to control reverberation without creating a sound-deadened room. Anacoustical consultant be included in the design team for lecture halls.

1. Walls

a. The side walls should not be parallel, nor should they be a continuoushard surface. They should have a Sound Transmission Coefficient (STC) rating ofno less than 50. The walls must extend to the floor above or to the roofconstruction, and not stop at the ceiling.

b. The front wall that contains the teaching station should utilize hardsurface materials. Sound-dampening materials should be applied to the rear andside walls as needed.

c. If the design dictates that lecture halls must be located close to noise-producing areas, higher STC ratings and special wall-construction details mustbe included.

2. Ceilings

a. The ceilings should be sloped or stepped and should be exclusively orprimarily of a hard surface. If it is determined that some acoustical treatmentis needed as part of the ceiling, it should be installed around the perimeter ofthe sides and rear in the form of a U, with the front and middle sections ofhard-surfaced, sound-reflectant materials. If acoustical treatment is needed,it normally will not exceed 40-50 percent of the ceiling surface.


b. Partial wall-surface treatments should be considered as an alternative toceiling treatment. The back wall may need to be 50-100% covered with acousticalabsorption materials.

3. Mechanical Systems

a. The mechanical system should generate a background noise of no more thanNC 20-25. The system requires careful design, competent installation andbalancing, and a regular maintenance program once installed.

b. Factors that have been identified in the design of a quiet operatingsystem include air handlers or fans located away from the lecture hall; lowvelocity of air within the lecture hall; and proper sizing and acousticaltreatment of ducts, returns, and diffusers.

c. The circulation of air is a critical factor in a well-designed lecturehall. How-ever, this must not be achieved at the cost of effective control ofHVAC system-generated background noise.

G. Lighting and Lighting Controls

Lighting in large lecture halls is a particularly critical element, not onlybecause of the increase in the use of educational technology in teaching, butalso because of the lack of natural light available in these facilities.Correct lighting levels can be achieved through a variety of approaches. It isessential that the lecture hall have a full range of capabilities, from acomfortable reading level of light to a minimum level of light needed for notetaking during projection. Further, it is essential that lighting controls bedesigned for use by instructors whose first concern is the communication ofcontent rather than operation of equipment.

1. Controls

a. Controls for the house lights in lecture halls are needed at everyentrance into the room, including the at-grade entrance at the front of theroom.


b. In addition to these house-light controls, a complete set of controlsshould be available at the instructor area and a second complete set of controlsavailable in the projection booth. The number of switches required to controlthe room should be kept at a minimum and should be clearly labeled.Standardization among lecture halls is required.

c. If the lighting controls are preset controls, then a manual overrideshould be readily available. In addition, both the preset and the manualoverride should be clearly labeled and simple to use.

2. Ceiling Lighting

a. A general lighting level of 50-60 foot-candles should be provided at allstudent stations within the room and at the instructor area as well.

b. The lighting in the student and instructor areas should be on separatezones. It should be possible to switch zones of ceiling lighting from the frontto the rear of the room so as to maintain full light level in the rear of thelecture hall while reducing the light level in the front when using variousprojection devices at the front of the room (such as overhead projectionsystems).

c. While zoning addresses one type of lighting control, dimming also will beneeded. For certain types of projection, it should be possible to reduce thelighting level to from 5 - 10 foot candles over the student stations, with nolighting over the aisles or spilling onto the walls, the instructor area, orprojection screen.

d. Generally, incandescent lighting is preferred in providing dimming inlecture halls. If fluorescent lights are used for dimming, they should beselected carefully to make certain they can be dimmed to the correct levelwithout inducing a flicker.


e. Consideration should be given in the design of the ceiling lighting to theneed to regularly change lamps. Lamp-changing is often difficult in a facilitywhich may be in use most of the time and which often requires special equipmentdue to the high ceilings.

f. A work light must be provided in the instructor area with care given thatthe light does not spill onto the projection screen. A provision also must bemade for lighting a person providing sign language interpretation to studentswith hearing-impairments.

3. Chalkboard/Markerboard Lighting

Lighting providing 70 foot-candles of reflected light should be provided forchalkboards/markerboards. This lighting should be designed so as to avoid anybright spots or dark spots on the writing surface. If the lecture hall isdesigned with a large amount of chalkboard/markerboard, the lights over the

writing surface should be able to be switched on and off in sections to allowfor the illumination of a portion of the board while one projection screen is inuse. Care should be taken in selection and installation to insure that lamps inthe fixtures are not directly visible to students sitting in the front rows ofseats. The lights also should be mounted so as not to interfere with theeffective use of the projection screens.


Emergency lighting and exit signs should conform to local codes and be self-illuminating. Insofar as possible, these should be located so as not tointerfere with the quality of the picture on the projection screens or providevisual distraction to the audience.


H. Electrical and Communication Services

1. Electrical Services

a. It is essential that all lecture halls be provided with ample electricalpower to meet all present-day needs as well as have additional power availablefor new applications in the future. It is recommended that a minimum of 20percent, and ideally as much as 40 percent, expansion in electrical service bemade available at the time of new construction.

b. All electrical services should be protected from surges and spikes.

c. No outlets anywhere in the lecture hall should be controlled by a switchthat could be confused for a light switch.

d. Each lecture hall should have a minimum of two dedicated circuits withseparate breakers controlling the service exclusively to the lecture hall. Oneof these should feed the front portion of the room and the second the projectionbooth area, and neither should be shared by any other function within thebuilding. Further, there should be no elevator motors, compressor motors,blower motors, or other types of equipment on the side of the power transformerthat feeds the lecture hall circuits.

e. The breaker panel should be located near the lecture hall, and thebreakers within the panel should be clearly labeled as to function.

f. The front of the lecture hall should be equipped with a minimum of fourduplex outlets distributed evenly across the instructor area. In addition, two

duplex outlets should be located in each of the other walls. At least twofourplex outlets should be located in the projection booth. If a ceilingmounted video projector is to be used, electrical service is needed in theceiling.


g. All wall outlets should be mounted 18-24 inches above the floor. Inaddition, electrical service (and conduits/cable trays) should be provided inthe ceiling for future projection and wireless communication capability.

2. Telecommunication Services

a. Voice, video, and data services should be provided from atelecommunications closet to the lecture hall. It is recommended that all ofthese services terminate in the front of the room and in the projection booths.

b. A wiring box should be installed in the ceiling outside the lecture hall(convenient to the lobby or other entrance path into the room). This willprovide maximum flexibility for making changes or additions to the servicewithin the lecture hall.

c. It is recommended that video, data, and electrical service be provided inthe ceiling of the room to facilitate the installation of a video projector. Toaccommodate current technology, that termination box should be at a distancefrom the principal projection screen one and one-half times the width of theprojection screen. Even as the technology changes, that location should proveto be adequate for most applications.

d. All low-voltage connections should be separated from the electricalcircuits to the room. The low-voltage services should be isolated from eachother through separate conduit. These services include controls for slideprojectors, audio, video, data, and voice feeds. These circuits should not betied to ground.


e. Although the specific location of conduits or cable trays will varydepending on the design of the lecture hall, in general, connections are needed:1) from the instructor area to the projection booths, 2) from the instructorarea and projection booths to the video projector (if it is ceiling mounted),from the front wall of the instructor area to the podium, and from the cameralocations to the rear projection booth. Any new conduit or cable tray that isinstalled should contain pull wires. If it is anticipated that the instructorpodium be movable, then connections should be provided at the right, left, andcenter of the instructor area.

f. Provision for data connections and electrical outlets at each seat in thestudent seating area is needed to accommodate computers, recording devices,response systems, etc.

g. All circuits, wiring, conduits and cable trays should be clearly labeledat all termination locations so that a knowledgeable person who has never seenthe installation before can identify the services in the room.

I. Projection Booths

1. It is recommended that all large lecture halls have a projection boothbuilt in at the rear of the room and a booth at the front of the room. Thebooths provides sound separation between machine-operation noise and theaudience.

2. The booths should have adequate ventilation, including temperature andhumidity control. The exhaust system should not have a direct connection to thelecture hall.

3. Security is a major concern, given the amount of equipment installed inmost projections booths. All doors should have locks and consideration shouldbe given to additional measures, such as alarm systems or lockable storagecabinets.

a. Rear Projection Booth

1. The rear projection booth is used primarily for optical projectionequipment (slide and film projectors) and for consoles that control the videorecording equipment.12. DESIGN STANDARDS FOR INSTRUCTIONAL SPACE

2. The wall between the rear projection booth and the lecture hall must havea window whose lower edge is 48 inches above the floor, which should providesufficient clearance over the heads of those seated in the last row of seatsnext to the window. This window should be angled approximately five percent offvertical so as to reduce reflections.

3. A shelf should be mounted directly beneath the window and should be justbelow the bottom edge of the glass. The rear of the shelf should be higher thanthe front to facilitate proper machine adjustments. The shelf should be hingedso that it can be folded down and should be divided into two sections so thateach section can be folded independently of the other.

4. There should be a monitor of the house audio system, including a voice-amplification system in the projection booth. The booth should contain a work

light designed so as not to shine into the lecture hall. The booth also shouldinclude controls for audio, lights, screens, and other built-in projectionequipment.

5. The booth should have two doors. A door from the hallway is needed tomove equipment in and out of the booth. That means the door should be a minimumof 36 inches wide with no obstruction on the floor. A door from the lecturehall into the booth is needed so the instructor can enter the booth from thelecture hall.

b. Front Projection Booth

The front booth should be located adjacent to the instructor area of the lecturehall with a connecting door. This booth contains rack mounted equipment (suchas VCR's, PA amplifier, audio equipment, etc.) that the instructor may need toaccess to load tapes, disks, etc. All equipment housed here should becontrolled by the wireless AV control system.


J. Furnishings and Equipment

1. Instructor Area

a. As the use of media in instruction increases, particularly in large groupinstruction, a table and lectern are no longer considered adequate furniture forthe teaching station in a large lecture hall. Media needs dictate theinstallation of a teaching podium at the front of the room that serves as themaster control center for the room. Instructors in wheelchairs should be ableto access any controls provided in the podium.

b. The podium should have a variety of communication and controlcapabilities, including electrical outlets; voice, video, and data outlets;controls for the lights and the projection screen(s); controls for the voiceamplification system, including a microphone; and controls for all equipmentbuilt into the room and projection booth.

c. The dimensions of the podium for a lecture hall should be 24 inches deepwith the width determined by the equipment and controls to be housed there (aminimum of 36 inches). Ideally, the podium should be adjustable in height. Ifit is a fixed height, the height should be no more than 42 inches from thefloor.

d. The size and placement of the podium are critical. Neither the podium northe faculty member standing at the podium should block students' view of theprojection screen(s) or the chalkboard/markerboard. If an overhead projectionsystem is to be used, it should be able to be positioned close to the podium.

e. If the podium is to contain equipment that is permanently housed in theroom, then it should be constructed of materials and using methods that providethe maximum security for the equipment housed within the podium.


f. The chair or stool for the instructor should be of adjustable height inorder to make it convenient for the instructor to use all types of teachingdevices.

g. A voice communications device, connected to the ADMS Center, should belocated either in the podium or in the immediate vicinity of the teachingstation.

2. Student Stations

a. Fixed Seating

1. It is recommended that all rooms seating more than 75 have fixed seating.There may be special occasions when a lecture hall would best be served by theuse of movable seating (Lecture Hall B). This is the exception, however, andwill require special care in design.

2. Continuous tables with attached swing-away chairs are to be installed inLecture Halls A, C, D, and E. This provides the student with the maximum workarea.

3. Since the number of seats in each row and the relationship of this numberto the aisles is often covered by code requirements, these should be consultedin determining the layout of a room.

4. It is recommended that all components of seating carry a minimum two-yearmanufacturer's warranty. Further, the manufacturer should warrant theavailability of replacement parts for at least seven years.

b. Wheelchair Stations

Seating for mobility-impaired students should be provided in all lecture hallsat approximately four percent of the capacity of the room.


c. Design Characteristics of Seating

For accommodating people of various sizes, see General Purpose Classroomssection.

3. Chalkboards/Markerboards

a. Some chalkboard/markerboard should be provided in the instructor area oflarge lecture halls. While instructors using large lecture halls should beencouraged to use the overhead and other projection devices, there are occasionswhen a chalkboard/markerboard is essential to effective use of the room.

b. Chalkboards/markerboards should be mounted with the bottom edge of thechalk tray 36 inches above the finished floor. In a room which has a raisedteaching platform, the distance should be from the bottom of thechalkboard/markerboard to the teaching platform, not to the floor.

c. All chalkboards/markerboards should be four feet in height and have chalktrays under the full width of the board. Seams of the boards should be flush,and, in the case of chalkboards, the surface should be black in order to providemaximum contrast with the chalk being used.

d. Tack strips and map hooks should be installed above the chalkboard but notackboard should be included as part of the instructor area in lecture halls.

4. Audio

a. Voice Amplification

1. Voice amplification should be installed in all lecture halls. Themicrophone and volume control for the amplification system should be easilyaccessible to an authorized person, preferably as part of the AV Control systemon the podium. Other settings, such as tone and balance, should be availableonly to a technician.


2. It is recommended that a wireless microphone be installed with the voiceamplification system to allow the instructor the maximum flexibility of movementthroughout the lecture hall.

b. Sound System

1. A sound system separate from the voice amplification system should beinstalled to handle other sound sources. The system should be capable ofamplifying the soundtrack of films, audiotape, and other audio sources such ascompact discs, videotape, video discs, and voice coming in via telephone lines.Distribution from the system can be fed into speakers that provide totalcoverage within the lecture hall.

2. The sound system also should be hard wired into an appropriate assistivelistening system to provide for students with hearing-impairments.

5. Projection Screens

a. Lecture halls require multiple screens, the number dictated by the designof the facility and by the special uses for the facility. The minimum

recommended number of screens is two. These should be mounted above thechalkboard if the design of the lecture hall permits. One of these screensshould be placed in such a way that at least six feet of chalkboard/markerboardis exposed when the screen is in use.

b. All screens should be motorized, with switches located both in the frontof the room and in the projection booth. This provides control at eitherlocation at all times. All switches should have an automatic shut off and allshould automatically return to neutral when the screen is fully extended orfully retracted.


c. All screens are recommended to be a white matte finish. This surfaceprovides acceptable picture quality up to 45 degrees on either side of thecenter line of the room. No seating in a lecture room should be more than 45degrees off the center line.

d. The top of the screen should subtend an angle no greater than 35 degreesfrom the horizontal from any seating position. However, some compromises mayhave to be made in the first few rows of seats to allow sufficient space forchalkboard/markerboard and a reasonable screen size, and yet not have the frontseats too far from the front of the room.

e. Two factors are in conflict when attempting to determine the correct sizeof the screens. The first is the need to make the focal point of the room atthe teaching station, which often results in the teaching station being lessthan 20 feet from one side to the other. The second is the increased use ofelectronic projection of both television and computer images.

f. Optical projection (films and slides), has very high-resolution images,resulting in a formula of distance from the screen to the farthest viewer of sixtimes the screen width (6W).

g. With the introduction of electronic projection, however, a new screen-sizestandard must be applied. Electronic projection systems provide anywhere from12.5-25 percent of the resolution of optical projection. This is particularlycritical in computer-image projection, which is often comprised of text. Thislower resolution results in a loss of sharpness in edge definition. At marginalviewer distance from the screen, the letters tend to blur and fill in, resultingin reduced readability.


h. Determining the number and size of screens involves weighing many factors.It may be necessary to confine electronic projection to a large single screenrather than to attempt to size two side-by-side screens to this need. Thesmaller screens would then be for optical projection and would utilize the 6Wformula. The size of the center screen would be determined by the greatestwidth requirement from the following: cinescope films, side-by-side slideprojection, or electronic projection that has the screen width requirement ofone-fourth the distance to the farthest viewer (4W). If a three-tube projectoris to be used, an additional six inches on each side of the picture are neededto accommodate edge roll.

6. Video and Data Projection

a. All lecture halls should contain the capability of projecting both videoand data. A single projector can handle both sources, although it may requirethat an appropriate interface unit be installed. Any new installation shouldaccommodate current computer technology, including high-resolution graphics, aswell as composite and RF video.

b. A number of factors must be taken into account when ceiling-mounting avideo projector. This includes a grid capable of supporting the weight of theprojector, conduit or cable tray for video and data wiring as well as electricalwiring to provide power to the projector and an elevator for lowering theprojector.

c. It should be possible for the faculty member to easily switch amongvarious video and computer inputs without requiring the intervention of atechnician. This switching should include a remote on/off switch for theprojector as well as the proper ports for inputting various sources of materialand a means of switching from one source to another. Each port should beclearly labeled as to the type of equipment it will support as well as theswitching device.


d. All current projection systems require some minor adjustments that shouldbe made by a technician. Most of this equipment can be adjusted remotely if onehas the proper equipment.

e. Provisions should be made for a complete reconvergence of a ceiling-mounted video projector at least once per semester.

f. Another consideration in the installation of video projection is accessfor servicing. Projectors should be mounted on an electrical lift mechanism toquickly access the projector for servicing.

7. Audiovisual Controls

All lecture halls should contain conduit from the teaching station to theprojection and equipment areas. This is to facilitate the operation ofaudiovisual equipment, which is installed in these locations. The control panelfor the audiovisual control system should be mounted in the podium and providewireless control of all AV equipment, lighting, and PA system.

K. Video Recording System

1. Each lecture hall will be equipped with a video recording system comprisedof three remote control cameras mounted in the lecture hall as well as avisualizer overhead projection camera in the instructor area. The console forthe recording system will be installed in the rear projection booth and must beable to handle video inputs from all video sources used in the room (cameras,video projectors, RF, computers, etc.) as well as all audio sources(microphones, sound tracks of all media displayed, computer, etc.).

2. The output of the video recording system will be transmitted to the mastercontrol area of the ADMS Center so that it may be monitored, recorded, orretransmitted to other locations.


L. Other Special Considerations

1. Signage

a. Signage in and around a lecture hall should be kept at an absolute minimumand should be incorporated into the lobby and the lecture hall when the facilityis designed.

b. There should be no tackboards or other surfaces inside the lecture hallalthough a tackboard should be installed outside each lecture hall in theimmediate vicinity of the doorway so that grades and other class-related itemscan be posted conveniently.

c. Both inside and outside each lecture hall, information should be postedregarding how to report problems with physical facilities and equipment in thelecture hall.

d. It is essential that information about accessible means of egress bedisplayed in accordance with applicable codes.

2. Environmental Issues

a. The heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning (HVAC) system must provideadequate air changes in conformance with current American Society of Heating,

Refrigeration, and Airconditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). The recirculation of airwithin the lecture hall should not be done in such a way as to result in lobbynoise entering the room.

b. Air input and return paths should neither blow directly on the seatingarea nor on the instructor area. The air-circulation system in a lecture hallshould be able to be used at all times separately from any other HVAC systemthat may be operated seasonally within the building.

c. The temperature range should be maintained within 68-75 degrees, withhumidity at 50 percent, plus or minus 10 percent.


d. Each lecture hall should have a temperature-sensitive monitoring devicewithin it and that device should be tied to a central monitoring systemmaintained and overseen by physical plant administration. Response toabnormalities detected by such a monitoring device should be a number-onepriority at all times because of the lack of any other method of circulating airwithin a large lecture hall.

e. The acoustical considerations in determining the volume of air-handlingnoise should include not only the background noise level but any vibrationconsiderations that would generate additional noise.

f. Air intakes for lecture halls should not be located in or near loadingdocks, trash receptacles, or areas of high vehicular traffic outside thebuilding.

3. Trash and Recycling Receptacles

It is recommended that nonflammable trash and recycling receptacles should bedesigned into the lobby area of the lecture hall and not be made a part of thelecture hall itself.

4. Pencil Sharpener

It is recommended that one or more pencil sharpeners be securely mounted withtamper-resistant screws in close proximity to the instructor area of the lecturehall and within easy access for students.


SEMINAR ROOMS

INTRODUCTION

Seminar rooms are small rooms that hold 10 to 20 students. They are designed tofacilitate interaction and face to face discussion, with eye contact amongparticipants being an important factor. These rooms often double as meeting orconference rooms.

Note: For such design considerations as entrance/exits, hallways, acoustics,finishes, and HVAC, please refer to GENERAL PURPOSE CLASSROOMS Section.

A. Size

1. The room dimensions, length to width ratio, for seminar rooms should be1:1 or 1:1.5. Total room area should allow twenty square feet per studentstation. Long narrow rooms with dimensions greater than 1:1.5 make eye contactamong participants difficult and must be avoided. Ceiling height should be aminimum of 8 feet.

2. The projection screen defines the front of the room, and should be locatedon the wall opposite the door. In any case, the door should be at the back ofthe room. A teaching or presentation area is usually not a designated part of aseminar room although the front of the room should be large enough toaccommodate a lectern and provide enough space for use of an overhead projector(a minimum of 10 feet from equipment to projection screen).

B. Furnishings and Equipment

Movable tables and chairs are the primary furnishings for seminar rooms. Tablesshould be rectangular or trapezoidal, have a durable hard plastic laminate orequivalent finish, be 18 - 30 inches deep, and provide at least a 30 inch widthwork space per student. Chairs can be standard armless and straight back orchairs on casters with arms. If chairs are on casters, a minimum of 5 legs isrecommended. If arm chairs are used, the arms must fit under the table and thewidth of the arms must accommodate to the 95th percentile male for college agepopulation. On carpeted floors, chairs should have wide wheels or sled runners.A portable lectern (floor or tabletop) should be provided.


C. Chalkboards/Markerboards and Tack Boards

A minimum of 20 linear feet of chalkboard/markerboard with eraser tray isrequired and may be installed on front and/or side walls. Chalkboard/marker-boards should be 4 feet vertical height and be mounted so the bottom edge is 3feet above the finished floor. A 2 inch tack strip with movable mounting/maphooks is required above the writing surface. One 3 x 4 foot tack board shouldbe mounted somewhere within the room.

D. Projection Screen

A 60" x 60" (minimum size) matte white surface, projection screen should becenter mounted on the front wall to provide optimum viewing. The screen shouldbe mounted 10-12 inches out from the wall to correct for keystoning, with atieback under the center of the screen at or just below the chalkboard tray.Another option is to mount the screen in the corner of the room. This permitssimultaneous use of the front chalkboard/markerboard, provides a longerprojection distance, and may improve sight lines for viewing.

E. Electrical Services

All electrical services should be protected from surges and spikes, and be freeof inductive loads and other disturbances. Each room should have one or morededicated circuits on a breaker not shared by any other room, and at least onegrounded 120 volt duplex outlet centered on each wall, mounted 18 - 24" abovethe finished floor.

F. Audiovisual Equipment and Controls

In most cases, portable audiovisual equipment will be brought into the room.Consideration should be given, however, to a permanently installed video/datamonitor (corner location, ceiling or wall mounted), and a storagecabinet/projection station located in the rear of the room for a slide projectorand other equipment. Some pieces of equipment, such as VCR's and TV's, oftenhave remote controls. For other items, such as 16mm projectors, it may beeasier to operate them at the device. Still others, such as slide projectors,may require conduit running from front to rear to bring control cables to theteaching area.


G. Telecommunications

Provide one telephone jack, one data jack, and one video terminal outlet perroom. Termination location should be the front of the room.

H. Lighting

1. A minimum of 50 - 60 foot candles should be provided at the writingsurface of student stations. Lighting fixtures should be in banks which runparallel to the front of the room, with switching at 1/3, 2/3, and full,including switching off the bank nearest the projection screen. For most

seminar rooms, fluorescent lighting alone will be sufficient. If incandescentlights are used, either alone or in addition to fluorescent, they should bedimmable to a level of 5 - 10 foot candles at the work surface.

2. Fixtures should be flush-mounted in the ceiling to avoid interfering withvisual image projection. Light fixtures should not be mounted near theprojection screen where they could interfere with the projected image. Lightcontrols must have standardized switch patterns and be located at entry door,with at least one switch convenient to the teaching area.

I. Windows

Fenestration should be kept to a minimum. All windows must be equipped withwindow coverings (shades, drapes, venetian blinds) that are opaque and mountedto prevent ambient light leakage around the edges. For more details on windows,see GENERAL PURPOSE CLASSROOMS Section.

J. Other Considerations

1. Seminar rooms that will double as meeting or conference rooms should havebuilt-in counter space, with lockable storage. If the room will be used on aregular basis for functions at which food will be served, consideration shouldbe given to installing a sink with hot and cold water and providing space andelectrical service for appliances, such as a refrigerator, microwave oven, andcoffee maker. A minimum of one duplex electrical outlet should be providedabove the counter. Any outlet located near a sink should be protected with aGFIC (Ground Fault Interruption Circuit).


2. Rooms should have a pencil sharpener located at or near the door and acoat rack with book shelf which has the capacity for coats equal to roomoccupancy.


CLASSROOM AND BUILDING ACCESSIBILITY

This section provides a general overview of design considerations for barrierfree teaching and learning facilities. This section was not designed to serveas a substitute for the complete set of guidelines given in the ADA (Americanswith Disabilities Act of 1990). Designers must consult the ADA guidelines,applicable state codes and regulations, and other related materials for moredetailed information.

A. Americans With Disabilities Act

1. The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), enacted July 26, 1990,prohibits discrimination against persons with physical and mental disabilities.This means that individuals with disabilities are extended civil rights similarto those now available on the basis of race, color, sex, national origin andreligion through the Civil Rights Act of 1964.

2. The ADA is modeled after that Act and Section 504 of the RehabilitationAct of 1973. Regarding standards, the law says that institutions can choose tofollow either UFAS (Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards) or ADAAG (Americanswith Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities)standards. State supported universities also must comply with their state'saccessibility laws.

3. The term disability is defined as a physical or mental impairment thatsubstantially limits one or more major life activities, such as walking, seeing,speaking, or hearing. A record of such an impairment, or of being regarded ashaving such an impairment, also qualify under the ADA's definition ofdisability.


4. The special requirements of students and faculty with disabilities must beconsidered when designing and renovating classrooms. Any building constructedor altered after the effective date of the law must comply with the ADA. Ratherthan requiring a public institution to make each of its existing facilitiesaccessible, the ADA requires that "each service, program, or activity conductedby a public entity, when viewed in its entirety, be readily accessible to andusable by individuals with disabilities." Program accessibility can be achievedby a number of means, such as redesigning equipment, reassigning services toaccessible buildings, providing aides, altering existing facilities,constructing new facilities, and other means which provide services in anintegrated setting.

5. It should be pointed out that in making programs accessible, publicinstitutions need not take any action that would threaten or destroy thehistoric significance of an historic property or that would fundamentally alterthe nature of the service activity or program or would result in undue financialand administrative burdens. In these cases, the institution is required to takeany other action to provide the required access.

6. Over 43 million U.S. citizens have physical or mental disabilities. Somepersons with disabilities require the use of wheelchairs, crutches, or guidedogs. These visible conditions require special consideration in the physicaldesign of classrooms, but other less visible conditions also must be addressed.For example, conditions such as hearing loss, limited vision, energy limitingconditions (such as cardiopulmonary disorders), and mental disabilities oftenare invisible but can impact mobility and academic performance. It also shouldbe noted that disabilities can be temporary or permanent.

7. The goal of classroom designers is to keep in mind all potential users,including persons with mobility, hearing, vision, and mental disabilities. Itis in this context that the following information regarding the concept of"universal design" for barrier-free facilities is provided.


B. Mobility Impairments

1. Persons with mobility impairments often have conditions that limit theirdaily physical activities, such as walking, lifting, reaching, carrying,standing, and sitting. These impairments can range from carpal tunnel syndrometo quadriplegia, from asthma to cardiopulmonary disorders, and many can beenergy limiting. In order for persons with mobility impairments to useclassrooms and lecture halls, the facilities must be barrier-free. Standardswhich have been established for reach and rise limits for all persons, includingthose with differing abilities, can be found in HUMANSCALE 1/2/3, Section 4 ofUFAS, and Section 4.2 of the ADAAG. Essentially, in each classroom:

a. Doorways and aisles must be of sufficient width to allow wheelchairs topass easily (32" clear minimum, 36" recommended),

b. An accessible route into the classroom is required; thresholds, stairs, orother barriers should be minimized,

c. In the instructor area, teaching platforms, if required, must beaccessible by means of a ramp; teaching equipment and room controls also shouldbe accessible,

d. Wheelchair stations must be provided so that persons with disabilities areprovided a choice of sight lines that is comparable to those provided forpersons without disabilities,

e. Door hardware should be lever-operated, push-type, or U-shaped to alloweasy grasping and the force required to push or pull a door should be minimized.


2. The ADAAG and UFAS differ in the scope of required wheelchair locations inareas of assembly. The guidelines for wheelchair locations vary with regard toroom seating capacity from 1% to 6%. For new construction refer to Section4.1.2 of UFAS or Section 4.1.3 of the ADAAG. For alterations, accessibleseating areas may be clustered if technically infeasible to disperse throughout

the altered assembly area. Technical infeasibility is defined for buildingalterations as unlikely of being accomplished because "existing structuralconditions would require removing or altering a load-bearing member which is anessential part of the structural frame; or because other existing physical orsite constraints prohibit modification or addition of elements, spaces, orfeatures which are in full and strict compliance with the minimum requirementsfor new construction and which are necessary to provide accessibility." (Section4.1.6 of ADAAG)

3. If seating at fixed tables is provided for persons in wheelchairs, clearfloor space and knee clearance should conform to Section 4.32 of ADAAG.

4. In larger rooms, such as lecture halls, where sloped or tiered floors arerequired in order to provide acceptable sight lines, accessible viewingpositions shall adjoin an accessible route that also serves emergency egress.

5. Slopes must not exceed one foot rise in twelve feet of run (1:12 ratio),with a maximum rise of 30" and maximum run of 30' for any slope before levellandings are required. Level landings must be provided at the top and bottom ofeach slope and contain a minimum of 5' clear area. Handrails should be providedif a ramp run exceeds 72" or the rise is greater than 6".

6. Section 4.0 of UFAS specifically highlights the regulations related to"Accessible Elements and Spaces: Scope and Technical Requirements." Ramps arespecified in section 4.8 of the ADAAG.

7. The teaching station, including the chalkboards, audio/visual controls andprojection screens, should be located and designed to be barrier free.


C. Hearing Loss

1. Over 16,000,000 persons in the United States are hearing-impaired. Thetraditional approach to improving speech intelligibility during a lecture hasbeen through the use of 'public address systems' terminating in loudspeakers onthe walls or ceiling. There are two major limitations to relying solely onthese systems. First, while increasing the intensity of the signal is possiblewith PA systems, such increases in volume often cause distortions due to thecombination of the equipment characteristics and the stage and hall acoustics.Second, even within the same lecture hall, the listening conditions can varyconsiderably in different locations, depending on the various ratios of directto reverberant sound, changes of wave shape, fluctuations in decaycharacteristics and variations in sound levels.

2. A solution to improved sound transmission, particularly for persons withhearing loss, lies in the use of assisted listening devices. The purpose ofthese devices is to provide functional and effective listening and speakingenvironments so that people with hearing loss can increase their overall

participation in general classrooms and lecture halls. Assisted listeningdevices supplement the existing loudspeaker system by providing a directelectronic coupling from the sound source to an appropriate amplification devicewhere the signal is then transmitted to good quality, volume-controlledtransducers which are located at or very close to the listener's ear canals.The main point to remember about assisted listening systems is that they provideimproved speech clarity, not just volume control. It also should be noted thatassisted listening systems may be portable or, in rooms where regular use isanticipated, permanently installed. Section 4.1.3.b.(19) of UFAS and Sections4.33 and A4.33 of ADAAG describe minimum audio-amplification requirements.

3. Because of the complexity of issues involved, the design and use ofclassroom amplification systems should include audiologists, electricalengineers, acoustical engineers, audiovisual specialists, and maintenancetechnicians.


4. Given the increased amount of pre-recorded and broadcast video programmingthat is becoming available in closed captioned format, it is suggested thatvideo display devices for use in classrooms be equipped with closed captiondecoders.

D. Loss of Vision

1. Persons with visual impairments frequently have difficulty in classroomsand lecture halls. Instructors often reduce light levels in the seating areaand/or the instructor area when projected images or display materials are used.Difficulties also result when light infiltrates projected images, such assunlight flooding a screen. In addition, energy conservation efforts in recentyears have resulted in a general decrease in illumination levels in publicbuildings, including schools. A further challenge for persons with low visionis the use of low-contrasting colors, such as using yellow chalk on a greenchalkboard.

2. In order to eliminate barriers for persons with low vision, use as muchcontrast as possible in image selection. Light levels should not be extremelyhigh or extremely low, since both circumstances can impair vision. Signs shouldhave raised letters and numerals and be accompanied by Braille. Mounting heightshould be 60" above the finished floor to the centerline of the sign. (SeeSection 4.30 of the ADAAG.)

E. Signage

1. Public entities must provide signage at all inaccessible entrances to eachof its facilities that directs users to an accessible entry or to a locationwith information about accessible entities.

2. Tactile maps or prerecorded instructions may be useful to visuallyimpaired persons.


3. The ADAAG gives specific guidelines for the design of raised and brailledcharacters and pictorial symbol signs. The legibility of printed characters isdependent on the viewing distance, character height, ratio of the stroke widthto the height of the character, contrast of color between character andbackground, and print font. Mounting location and height also are specified inthe guidelines. (Section 4.30 ADAAG)

4. Where permanently installed assistive listening systems are required,signage indicating the availability of an assistive listening system, includingthe international symbol of access for hearing loss, is required.

F. Other Considerations

1. Accessible Routes: An accessible route must connect accessible buildingor facility entrances with all accessible spaces and elements within thebuilding or facility.

2. Alarms: Where audible alarms are required by life safety codes, visualalarms must be provided which signal the same areas which are required to besignalled by the audible alarms.

3. Some persons experience sensitivity to low levels of airborne chemicalcontamination. Construction sources of these contaminants typically includeadhesives, synthetic carpeting, paints, roofing tars, etc. Use of thesematerials in general classrooms and lecture halls shall be minimized wherepossible, and adequate "airing-out" time must be provided at normal operatingtemperature before scheduling occupancy of these spaces.

4. Emergency egress and notification systems: For persons with disabilities,areas of rescue assistance with two-way communication are required within asmoke-protected and fire-protected area of egress.


5. Lighting: Flickering of fluorescent lights can trigger seizures inpersons with epilepsy and other neurological disorders. Regular inspectionand/or replacement of ballasts and tubes can help eliminate this potentialproblem.

6. Doors: It is recommended that at least one set of entry doors to everyfacility be power activated. Cross-corridor doors should be avoided unlessrequired.

G. Summary

This section highlighted some considerations in providing barrier-free,universal design for classrooms, seminar rooms and lecture halls. It iscritical, however, that design teams carefully examine all current guidelinesfor accessibility. As of this printing, UFAS and ADA, combined with individualState's requirements, are the most current and, therefore, should be followed.

END

12. MULTIPLE FIXED SEATING

A. Maintenance is of the highest priority for multiple fixed

seating. From a maintenance perspective, the favored design for fixed seatingis:

1. One piece molded chairs with field mounted seat and back pads.

2. High impact polyproplene, fiberglass or similar shell body.

B. Subject to compliance with specific requirements, qualifiedmanufacturers include, but are not limited to:

1. American Desk Manufacturing Co.2. American Seating3. Irwin Seating Co.4. Krueger International (KI)5. Hussey Manufacturing6. JG Furniture Systems, Inc.

C. Preferred Materials include:

1. One piece molded seat and backrest made of high-impact polyproplene,fiberglass, or similar shell body.

2. Fabricated fixed seating with chair surfaces molded to body contours formaximum comfort without upholstery.

3. Field installed seat and back upholstery.

4. Heavy-duty construction with ribs to reinforce points of stress. Rollededges for comfort and strength.

5. Fold-away tablet arm assemblies attached to the right side (10% toaccommodate left-handed users) of individual chairs with 100 square inches ofplastic laminate writing surface on medium density fiberboard or hardwoodplywood core with wood grain or dark mahogany finish, and all edges wellrounded. Tablet arms are to be securely attached to cast iron or steel hingesand swivel mechanism for positive support in open position. Semi-automaticreturn feature to stored position to below arm block is to be specified.

12. MULTIPLE FIXED SEATING

6. Mounting requirements include:

a. 14 ga. 1-1/2" x 2" seamless steel column welded to 6" x 8" steel floormounting flange. Flange to have 9/16" holes in corners and bolted to floor withfour (4) 3/8" bolts.

b. Fabricated chairs of one piece cast iron to have integral mountingprovisions and anchoring points for seat pivots, backs, and arm rests.

c. Fabricated chair of heavy gage rectangular steel tubing to be weldedsecurely to steel mounting plate. Seat, back, and arm rest connections to bewelded to tubing.

END

12. WINDOW TREATMENTS

A. Mini-blinds shall be included in the equipment contract.

B. Neither vertical window blinds nor draperies are acceptable windowtreatments.

END

13850 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS (2.15.97)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

The design guidelines contained herein include the requirements for thefurnishing, assembly, construction, installation, connection, and testing of acomplete fire alarm system or portions thereof.

1.02 RELATED WORK

All related work shall be properly coordinated with the design and installationof the fire alarm system including the following:

A. Fire protection systems (sprinkler systems, standpipe systems, & fire pumpinstallations).

B. Wet chemical extinguishing systems.

C. Mechanical systems (heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC)systems, smoke control systems, and smoke dampers).

D. Emergency power systems.

E. Security systems.

F. Elevator installation. See the State of Maryland Elevator Code.

G. Central Control and Monitoring System (CCMS).

1.03 REQUIREMENTS

The latest editions to the following codes and standards shall apply as aminimum but not be all inclusive to the design and installation of fire alarmsystems:

A. Maryland State Fire Prevention Code (COMAR 12.03.01 and 12.03.02)

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 101 - Life Safety Code

C. Building Officials and Code Administrators International, INC. (BOCA)National Building Code

D. BOCA National Fire Prevention Code

E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code


F. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code

G. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows

H. NFPA 90A - Standard for Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

I. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code

J. NFPA 170 - Fire Safety Symbols

K. ANSI/ASME A17.1 -- Safety Code For Elevators and Escalators as adopted bythe State of Maryland.

L. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. All new fire alarm and detection systems shall be analog/addressablesystems.

B. The system and components shall be the product of a single manufacturer ofestablished reputation and experience. Installation shall include all parts,labor, software, and hardware necessary to effect the installation in acompetent and workmanlike fashion.

C. Voice/Alarm Systems: Voice/Alarm Systems shall be installed when requiredby NFPA 101.


The system and all components shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratory (UL)for fire protective signaling service (local and remote station, emergencycommunication and relocation equipment, and protective signaling systems) underUL 864. Automatic detectors, manual stations, sprinkler system alarmattachments, control unit accessories, notification appliances, and all otheralarm system attachments shall be listed and approved for use with the specifiedcontrol equipment.

A. Equipment Not Described: The installing Contractor is responsible forfurnishing all material, equipment, and labor required to affect proper systemoperation. System subassemblies, software, programming hardware, interfacedevices, controls, tools, test equipment, and related devices vary considerablyamong manufacturers and cannot be fully described without reducing competitionamong bidders.


B. Manufacturer/Distributor Support: The Contractor shall confirm to thesatisfaction of the University of Maryland College Park (UMCP)/ Department ofArchitecture, Engineering, and Construction (DAEC) that a factory authorizedsupport organization exists within close proximity to the site. Suchorganization shall be adequately stocked with equipment, parts, and accessories,and adequately trained, and capable to perform all required engineering,maintenance, and testing support necessary to ensure continued efficient andeffective system operation.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

Shop drawing and product data approval shall be obtained from UMCP/DAEC for allnew fire alarm systems. The following items shall be submitted and approvedbefore work may begin:

A. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall include the following:

1. A building floor plan indicating the location of all system devices andcomponents. Only fire alarm system devices will be permitted on these floor plandrawings.

2. A wiring riser diagram.

3. A panel wiring diagram.

4. Device wiring details.

5. Annunciator panel diagram.

6. An address listing for each device.

7. Wire sizes and types of wiring.

8. Secquence of operation.

Drawings shall clearly indicate the height and location of all equipment,devices, wiring, conduit, and junction boxes. All drawing symbols shall complywith NFPA 170.

B. Installation Instructions: The following Manufacturer's guides shall besubmitted:

1. Installation guide.

2. Programming guide.

3. Operations guide.


C. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data shall be submitted.

D. Sequence of Operation: A sequence of operation for each device type shallbe submitted.

E. Address Listing: An address listing shall be provided indicating theaddress number and the custom address for each device in the system.

F. Battery Calculations: Battery calculations for stand-by power shall besubmitted.

G. Amplifier Calculation: Provide for voice alarm systems.

1.07 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

A. Manual Pull Station: Activation of any manual pull station shallautomatically operate all audible and visual appliances and produce an alarmsignal at the control unit and the remote annunciators. All manual pull stationsignals shall be automatically transmitted to UMCP Department of Physical Plant(DPP) Work Control via CCMS as an "Alarm" signal.

B. Smoke Detector: Activation of any smoke detector shall start the alarmverification mode. When the smoke detector latches into the alarm mode the firealarm system shall automatically operate all audible and visual appliances and

produce an alarm signal at the control unit and at the remote annunciators. Allsmoke detector alarm signals shall be automatically transmitted to UMCP/DPPWork Control via CCMS as an "Alarm" signal.

1. Elevator Recall - Smoke detectors at elevator landings, in elevatormachine rooms, and in elevator shafts shall also recall the elevator(s) to thedesignated floor or to the designated alternate floor as required by theelevator safety code.

2. Door release - Smoke detectors used to shut smoke or fire doors shallrelease the detector's associated door. Smoke detectors used to shut a door in afire-rated stair enclosure shall release all of the doors in the stairenclosure. Each smoke detector used for door release shall be provided with analarm verification feature and shall indicate a supervisory signal only.


3. Suppression System Activation - Smoke detectors used to activate a firesuppression system (Pre-action sprinkler system, deluge system, or specialextinguishing system) shall be crossed-zoned.

Cross-zoning of detetectors reduces the allowable spacing for the smokedetectors by 1/2.

C. Heat Detector: Activation of any heat detector shall automatically operateall audible and visual appliances and produce an alarm signal at the controlunit and at the remote annunciators. All heat detector alarm signals shall beautomatically transmitted to UMCP/DPP Work Control via CCMS as an "Alarm"signal.

1. Elevator Shunt-trip - Heat detectors in elevator shafts, and in elevatormachine rooms shall also operate the shunt trip circuit breaker for the elevatormain line in accordance with the elevator safety code.

2. Suppression System Activation - Heat detectors may be used in conjunctionwith smoke detectors to activate a fire suppression system (Pre-action sprinklersystem, deluge system, or special extinguishing system).

D. Water Flow Alarms: Activation of a water flow alarm shall automaticallyoperate all audible and visual appliances and produce an alarm signal at thecontrol unit and at the remote annunciators. Each individual water flow switchshall have a distinct address. All water flow alarm signals shall beautomatically transmitted to UMCP/DPP Work Control via CCMS as a "Water Flow"signal.

E. Valve Tamper Switch: Activation of a valve tamper switch shall initiate asupervisory alarm at the system control panel and at the remote annunciators.Supervisory audible and visible alarms at these locations shall be distinct fromeither alarm or trouble conditions involving the same or related devices. Eachindivdual tamper switch shall have a distinct address. All valve tamper alarms

shall be transmitted to UMCP/DPP Work Control via CCMS as a "Valve Tamper"signal.


F. Duct Smoke Detector: Activation of a duct smoke detector shall initiate asupervisory alarm at the system control panel and at the remote annunciators. Aduct smoke detector activation shall also initiate an air handling unit shutdownas required by NFPA 90A. All duct detector alarms shall be transmitted toUMCP/DPP Work Control via CCMS as a "Trouble" signal.

G. Fire Pump Supervisory Signals: In buildings with fire pumps, individualsupervisory signals shall be provided for the following conditions:

1. Fire pump running

2. Fire pump loss of power in any phase

3. Fire pump phase reversal

Activation of a fire pump supervisory signal shall initiate a supervisory alarmat the system control panel and at the remote annunciators. Each set ofcontacts in the fire pump controller shall have a distinct address. All firepump supervisory signals shall be transmitted to UMCP/DPP Work Control via CCMSas a "Trouble" signal.

H. High/Low air pressure signals: Buildings with dry-pipe or pre-actionsprinkler systems shall provide a supervisory signal for system high and low airpressure. Activation of a high/low air signal shall initiate a supervisoryalarm at the system control panel and at the remote annunciators. Each pressureswitch shall have a distinct address. All high/low air supervisory signalsshall be transmitted to UMCP/DPP Work Control via CCMS as a "Trouble" signal.

I. Trouble Signals: Loss of primary power, short circuit, open faults,ground faults, missing detectors, abnormal detector status (e.g.: dirtydetector, replacement incompatible with the defined address), disabled devicesand abnormal control functions shall initiate audible and visible troublesignals at the control unit and remote annunciators. Audible trouble signalsshall sound until silenced. Silenced trouble signals shall be continuouslyindicated by a textual message and a trouble LED until restored to normaloperation. The trouble LED shall remain illuminated until all abnormalconditions are cleared. Upon a return to normal operation, the audible troublesignal shall resound until restored to normal position. Subsequent troubleevents shall resound audible trouble signals until silenced. All trouble eventsshall automatically be transmitted to UMCP/DPP Work Control via CCMS as a"Trouble" signal.


J. Smoke Control Systems:

1. Stair Pressurization System -- Stair pressurization systems shall beactivated for any alarm signal in the building. Stair pressurization systemsshall also be manually activated at the annunciator panel with a key operatedswitch.

2. Atrium Smoke Removal Systems -- Atrium smoke removal systems shall beactivated by any atrium waterflow switch or atrium smoke detector. Atrium smokeremoval systems may also be manually activated at the atrium smoke removalcontrol panel with a key operated switch.

K. Special Door Locking Arrangements:

1. Delayed Egress Locks -- Doors with delayed egress locks installed inaccordance with NFPA 101 shall unlock upon actuation of the fire alarm system.

2. Stair Enclosure Doors -- Stair doors that do not permit re-entry inaccordance with NFPA 101 shall unlock upon actuation of the fire alarm system.

PART 2 - COMPONENTS

2.01 CONTROL PANEL

A. The fire alarm and detection system shall be microprocessor based, power-limited, supervised, 24 VDC, non-coded system. The system shall be installed andconfigured to operate up to 128 devices in alarm simultaneously. An eventhistory log of up to 500 alarm and trouble events shall be continuouslymaintained in non-volatile memory at the control unit. (The actual number ofindividual alarm and trouble events may be less than 500, provided the totalcombined number of alarms and troubles logged is at least 500.) The system shallbe capable of providing the following functions:

1. Integral clock/calendar

2. Alarm verification (assigned by detector address)

3. Three-pulse temporal pattern evacuation signal


4. Functional walk-test of all initiating and signaling devices.

The control panel shall provide power, supervision, annunciation, and control ofall detection and alarm devices. All external circuits shall be inherentlypower-limited as described in NFPA 70 Article 760. The control panel shall be ofmodular construction to permit expansion and modification of system functions.All modules and controls required to provide reliable operation as described inthe drawings and specifications shall be provided. The status and sensitivity ofanalog devices shall be capable of being read, displayed, and adjusted at thecontrol panel. The system shall be capable of responding to alarm conditionswhile in the maintenance, program, and test modes. Program or maintenanceactivities which bypass or disable system devices or functions shall becontinuously monitored, displayed, and recorded in the event history log. Whendevices or functions are disabled or bypassed, a trouble or supervisorycondition shall exist until the functionis restored to "normal." Addressabledevices and addressable interface modules (monitor and control) shall beindividually identified by the control unit. Conventional devices shall becapable of being supported by addressable interface modules. The followingManufacturers and systems, shall be acceptable:

1. Cerberus Pyrotronics - Model MXL

2. Simplex Time Recorder - Model 4100 or 4120

3. Notifier - Model AM2020

B. Fire Alarm Annunciator: Textual annunciation shall be provided at thecontrol unit and remotely in a location as approved by UMCP/DAEC. The textualdisplay shall consist of an 80 character supertwist alphanumeric display, whichshall include a 32 character user defined message for each device or function.Each of the following functions shall be continuously monitored: analogdetector sensitivity, response, open faults, short-circuit faults, ground faults(+/-), functionality, and test. The annunciator shall be capable of displayingthe status of each detector and occurrence of each state.


All events displayed on the textual display shall also be recorded on anintegral, 40-column, thermal strip printer. Annunciator controls at eachlocation shall include momentary contact switches for locate, next alarm, nexttrouble, display hold, acknowledge, signal silence, trouble silence, and systemreset. Equivalent switch configurations providing the same functions areacceptable. LEDs shall be provided at each annunciation location to indicatesystem power (green), trouble (yellow), supervisory alarm (yellow), and alarm(red). The connection between the remote annunciator and the system controlpanel shall be electrically supervised. A building graphic shall be providedabove each remote annunciator. Each building graphic shall include the buildingoutline, all stairs, all exterior doors, all elevators, the location of the firedepartment connection, the location of the fire alarm control panel, thelocation of the main sprinkler valve, a North arrow, a "You Are Here" indicator,and the four sides of the building (Side 1, Side 2, Side 3, & Side 4) asindicated by UMCP/DAEC.

C. Supervision: All initiating and notification appliances wiring shall becontinuously supervised for proper operation. Abnormal conditions shall bereported at the control unit and remote annunciator within 90 seconds ofoccurrence. Style A (Class B) supervision of all initiation devices isrequired. Notification appliance wiring shall also be Style Y (Class B). Theoccurrence of a single open fault, single ground fault, and combination ofsingle open and single ground faults shall not prevent more than half of thenotification appliances to be inoperative. The removal or disabling of anyinitiating or notification appliance shall produce a trouble signal. Replacementof any analog initiating device with another device of another type, even withthe same address, shall initiate a trouble signal.

D. Power Supply: Primary power shall consist of a two-wire 120 VAC branchcircuit from the emergency power distribution panel. The branch circuitdisconnect shall be arranged and protected to prevent inadvertent disconnectionand ensure optimum reliability. Standby power consisting of rechargeablebatteries shall be provided. Batteries shall be capable of powering the systemin the normal (standby) mode for 24 hours followed by 5 minutes of operation inthe alarm mode (15 minutes for a voice system). In the normal mode, the systemshall be capable of powering all simultaneously connected and operated loads inthe alarm mode, including public address or voice/alarm speakers, strobe lights,detectors, and auxiliary devices. All circuit wiring (AC or DC) shall beseparately fused within the control panel.13850 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS (2.15.97)

1. Batteries: Provide sealed, maintenance-free, lead-calcium batteries asthe source of emergency power. The battery system shall be maintained in afully charged condition by means of a solid state battery charger. Provide anautomatic transfer switch to transfer the load to the batteries in the event ofthe failure of primary power. Batteries shall have lead bolt-on terminals.Batteries with fast-tab terminals are unacceptable.

2. Battery charger: Provide a solid state, fullly automatic, variablecharging rate battery charger. The charger shall be capable of providing 150percent of the connected system load and shall maintain the batteries at fullcharge. In the event the batteries are fully discharged the charger shallrecharge them back to 95% of full charge within 48 hours.

E. System Control: In the control mode, the system operator shall have theability to arm or disarm system devices and control functions individually (byaddress). Analog detector sensitivity may also be adjusted in the control mode.Access to the control mode shall be restricted by security passwords.

F. Test Mode: The system shall permit functional tests of all initiating andnotification appliances by a single individual remote from the control panel.The system shall maintain a log of this activity on an integral, 40-column,thermal strip printer and retain a record in the event history log of the last500 events.

G. Programming: System functions shall be controlled using "AND," "OR," and"NOT" logic operators or commands. Timing and counting functions shall also beprovided. System functions may be configured to operate on the basis of devicecount, zone count, time, and/or sequence.

H. Passwords and Security: Access to control unit and remote annunciatorswitches wiring and power supplies shall be restricted by keyed-alike locks.Control function and programming access shall be limited by user definedpasswords. Passwords shall be the same as the assigned University BuildingNumber.


2.02 VOICE/ALARM SYSTEMS

A. Each voice/alarm system shall be capable of providing the followingfunctions:

1. User defined automatic voice evacuation message.

2. Public address at control unit and at remote location(s) as required byUMCP/DAEC.

During normal system operation, activation of any alarm initiating device shallcause an attention signal to be broadcast over audible signals to be followedautomatically by a custom voice message. The attention signal shall be threeslow whoops (slowly ascending tone from 200 to 830 hz in 2.5 seconds) separatedby one-half second intervals. The voice message shall begin with a female voiceinstructing occupants as follows: "Your attention please! Your attention please!An emergency has been reported in the building. Please leave the building bythe nearest exit." The entire message shall be repeated twice. At the end of themessage, the signals shall resound for one cycle then pause for ten seconds. Atthe end of the ten second interval, the tone/voice sequence shall begin againand continue until silenced at the fire alarm annunciator or system controlunit.

B. Public Address: During some events and emergencies it may be desirable todisable the voice alarm system and direct occupants over the fire alarmspeakers. In the public address mode, the voice alarm signals will be used totransmit instructions. The public address function shall be capable of manuallyoverriding all other signals and users. Activation of any alarm initiatingdevice will automatically cause all visual appliances to flash continuouslyuntil the system is reset. Public address controls shall be provided at the firealarm control panel and the fire alarm annunciators. An auxiliary powerdisconnect switch for portable amplification equipment shall be provided at theremote annunciator location to ensure signals may be heard over performer'sequipment during public assembly events. The switch shall be wired to terminalsfor owner use. Contact rating shall be 10 amps at 120 volts AC. A central audiocontrol module shall be provided for the necessary alarm message/tonegeneration, and main and remote microphone connections.


Continuous supervision shall be provided. A hand-held push-to-talk microphoneshall be provided at the control panel and each remote panel. The microphoneshall be a dynamic communication type with a frequency range of 200 Hz to 4000Hz and shall be equipped with a self-winding five foot coiled cable. An LEDindicator shall be provided to indicate microphone push-to-talk button has beenpressed and speaker circuits are ready for transmission. Microphone shall besupervised from disconnection. An audio control switch module shall be furnishedto provided manual control of audio functions. These switches and associated LEDindicators shall be supervised from disarrangement or failure. Audio poweramplifiers shall be furnished with self-contained filtered 24VDC power supply,transformer, and amplifier monitor circuits. Amplifiers shall provided an outputwith a frequency response of 120 Hz to 12000 Hz. A sufficient quantity ofamplifier capacity to operate all system speakers simultaneously plus 20 percentspare capacity shall be provided.

2.03 ALARM INITIATING DEVICES

Alarm initiating devices consist of conventional and analog detectors and manualstations connected to the system control unit via Style D or Style 6 (Class A)circuits. These devices shall be listed and approved for use with the controlequipment specified.

A. Analog Smoke Detector - Ionization Type: Analog ionization smokedetectors shall be plug-in type with base. The detector base shall be of thetwist/lock type with screw terminals for field wiring. Detectors shall be of thedual chamber type with solid state LED indicator lamp. The reference chambershall compensate against atmospheric changes in temperature, humidity, andbarometric pressure to prevent false or nuisance humidity and barometricpressure to prevent false or nuisance alarms. The sensing chamber shall beseparated from the atmosphere by an approved dust and insect screen which willnot prevent products of combustion from entering. Detector sensitivity shall becapable of being read and adjusted remotely from the control panel. Sensitivityreadings shall be time integrated to provide trouble indication when detectorsensitivity is affected by accumulations of dust in the detection chamber ordetector aging. System software shall maintain the detector in operation byadjusting the sensitivity range when dirt or other conditions affectingsensitivity develop over a substantial period of time.


B. Analog Smoke Detector - Photoelectric: Analog photoelectric smokedetectors shall be plug-in type with base. The detector base shall be of thetwist/lock type with screw terminals for field wiring. Analog photoelectricdetectors shall use a long-life LED as their light source and a photodiode as

their receiver. An automatic gain control circuit shall be provided tocompensate for detector aging and dirt accumulation and maintain the detectorwithin the correct sensitivity range. Detector supervision shall includesupervision of detector optics. Light source failure or a critical reduction oflight output caused by dirt accumulation shall initiate a trouble signal.Detector sensitivity shall be capable of being read and adjusted from thecontrol panel.

C. Interface Modules (Monitor): Interface modules shall be mounted instandard 4" x 4" square or octagonal electrical boxes with flush-mount covers.Cover shall be labeled or embossed with fire alarm system interface moduledesignation. A solid state LED indicator lamp shall be visible in the cover.Connections between devices and modules shall be integrally supervised for openand ground faults.

D. Interface Modules (Control): Interface modules shall be mounted instandard 4" x 4" square or octagonal electrical boxes with flush-mount covers.Each module shall be located within three feet of the device being controlled.Cover shall be labeled or embossed with fire alarm system interface moduledesignation. A solid state LED indicator lamp shall be visible in the cover.Interface modules shall be equipped with form "C" dry-contacts rated 2A 125 VACor 2A 30 VDC resistive.

E. Duct Smoke Detector Assemblies: Duct smoke detector assemblies shallconsist of an analog duct detector (ionization or photoelectric) and an air ductsampling assembly with sampling tube and detector housing. Each concealed ductsmoke detector shall be provided with a remote alarm lamp and keyed test switchlocated in a visible and accessible location.

F. Addressable Manual Station: Manual stations shall be red in color, non-coded, double-action, nonbreak-glass type mounted in a semi-flush backbox.Manual station covers shall be hinged and secured with a lockset. Lockset shallbe keyed the same as the control unit lockset. Manual pull stations installed inareas subject to damage, vandalism, and/or false alarms shall be protected by aSTI Stopper II as manufactured by Safety Technology International, Inc.


G. Addressable Heat Detectors: Addressable heat detectors shall be plug-intype with base. The detector base shall be of the twist lock type with screwterminals for field wiring. Heat detectors shall be of the rate compensatedtype.

2.04 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

Alarm indicating appliances shall consist of audible and visual signals forpublic signaling of fire. All indicating appliances subject to damage and/orvandalism shall be protected by an STI Fire Alarm Signal Damage Stopper asmanufactured by Safety Technology International, Inc.

A. Horn/Strobe Signals: Horn/strobes shall be semi-flush mounted with redcovers and white strobe lens with red lettering. The word "FIRE" shall bestenciled on the strobe lens. Strobe signals shall comply with the ADA.

B. Strobe Signals: Strobe units shall consist of a red cover and white lenswith red lettering. The word "FIRE" shall be stenciled on lens in red lettering.Strobe signals shall comply with the ADA.

C. Speaker/Strobe Signals: Speaker/Strobe Signals shall be used withvoice/alarm systems. Speaker/Strobe Signals shall be semi-flush mounted with redcovers and white strobe lens with red lettering. The word "FIRE" shall bestenciled on the strobe lens. Strobe signals shall comply with the ADA.

2.05 AUXILIARY DEVICES

Magnetic door holders shall be used to hold fire or smoke doors in the openposition during normal operation. Upon activation of smoke detectors locatedimmediately adjacent to the door opening, the door holders shall release,allowing the doors to close automatically. Detectors initiating this functionshall be located and installed in accordance with NFPA 80. Door holders shallbe listed and approved for the intended use, and connected to the control panelby an addressable interface module (control).


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 QUALIFICATIONS

System design and installation shall be supervised by an experienced fire alarmtechnician or Fire Protection Engineer with not less than five years experiencewith fire alarm systems. Shop drawings shall be prepared and signed by a NICETLevel III or IV certified engineering technician or a Registered Fire ProtectionEngineer. The signature of the technician or Engineer constitutes an affidavitthat the statements, representations, and information presented in the submittalconstitute a complete operational system conforming with applicable state codesand recognized engineering practices. All field installation work shall becontinuously supervised by a NICET Level II or III fire alarm system technician.

3.02 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP)

A. LOCATION: The FACP shall be located in:

1. Buildings with automatic sprinkler system: In the same room as thesprinkler system alarm check valve.

2. Buildings without sprinkler system: In the main electrical room.

B. LOCKSET: The lockset for the FACP shall be keyed for a "B" key, CAT15, ora "T45" key.

C. BATTERY BOX: Auxiliary batteries shall be stored in a battery box locatedadjacent to the FACP. The lockset for the battery box shall be keyed the same asthe FACP.

3.03 ANNUNCIATOR PANEL

Annunciator panels shall be located at the main entrance to the building, in apublic area such as a lobby, and in plain view unobstructed by the opening ofdoors or other parts of the building. The lockset to gain access to theannunciator panel shall be keyed the same as for the FACP. Annunciator panelswith reset functions that are not keyed activated shall be provided in a tamperproof locked cover to prevent unauthorized tampering.


3.04 INITIATING DEVICES

A. Manual Pull Stations: Manual pull stations shall be provided at thefollowing locations:

1. At the exit from each floor at the stair enclosure exits on the corridoror room side located not more than 5 feet from the stair door.

2. At each door opening to the exterior of the building.

3. At the exit from each High-Hazard Occupancy (High-Hazard as defined byNFPA 101).

4. Manual pull stations shall be located so that the travel distance to anystation from any point in the building does not exceed 200 feet.

5. At each exit from an Assembly Occupancy (Assembly Occupancy as defined byNFPA 101).

6. Telephone and electrical rooms in high-rise buildings.

7. Where required by NFPA 72.

Manual pull stations shall be installed 42 to 54 in. above the finished floor.All manual pull stations shall be located to be readily accessible,unobstructed, and visible.

B. Smoke Detectors: Analog smoke detectors shall be installed in accordancewith NFPA 72 at the following locations:

1. At each elevator lobby as required by the elevator safety code.

2. In each elevator machine room as required by the elevator safety code.

3. At the top of each sprinklered elevator shaft and bottom of eachsprinklered elevator shaft as required by the elevator safety code.

4. At un-enclosed vertical openings as required by NFPA 101.

5. At atriums for smoke removal systems as required by NFPA 101.


6. High-value and high-risk areas such as art galleries, archival recordsstorage, musical instrument storage rooms, library stack areas, and computerrooms.

7. At doors with magnetic hold-open devices.

8. For activation of a pre-action sprinkler system and other special firesuppression systems.

9. In all fire pump rooms.

10. At each FACP.

All smoke detectors shall be programmed for a 30 second alarm verificationcycle.

C. Duct Smoke Detectors: Duct smoke detectors shall be provided formechanical unit shutdown as required by NFPA 90A.

D. Heat Detectors: Heat detectors shall be provided in accordance with NFPA72 at the following locations:

1. In all sprinklered elevator machine rooms within two feet of the sprinklerhead as required by the elevator safety code.

2. At the top of each sprinklered elevator shaft and bottom of eachsprinklered elevator shaft within two feet of the sprinkler head as required bythe elevator safety code.

3. In any unsprinklered storage room, mechanical room and electrical room.

4. As required for activation of a pre-action sprinkler system and otherspecial fire extinguishing systems.

E. Interface Modules (Monitor): Addressable interface modules shall beprovided to monitor any conventional (non-addressable) alarm notificationdevice. Such as:

1. Non-addressable heat detectors.

2. Non-addressable smoke detectors.

3. Valve tamper switches, and sprinkler system butterfly valves.


4. Water flow switches.

5. Pressure switches.

6. Fire pump supervisory alarms.

7. Kitchen Suppression System Activation.

F. Interface Modules (Control): Addressable interface modules shall beprovided within three feet of the device being controlled for the control ofauxiliary functions such as:

1. HVAC Shutdown: of respective air handler upon activation of associatedduct smoke detector.

2. Door Holders: release doors automatically upon activation of associatedsmoke detector.

3. Door Lock Release: unlock all doors with special locking arrangements asrequired by NFPA 101.

4. Elevator recall: recall elevators as required by the elevator safety code.

5. Elevator Shunt Trip: operate the shunt trip circuit breaker for theelevator main line in accordance with the requirements of the elevator safetycode.

G. Water Flow Detectors: Water flow detectors shall be provided to monitorsprinkler systems for waterflow. Water flow detectors shall be provided for thefollowing:

1. At each alarm check valve (Pressure switch).

2. At each dry-pipe valve (Pressure switch).

3. At each pre-action system valve (Pressure switch).

4. At each sprinkler or standpipe system riser.

5. One flow switch per sprinkler system zone on each floor.

See the UMCP design guidelines for sprinkler and standpipe system for morespecific information on water flow detectors.

H. Sprinkler/Standpipe Valves: Provide supervision for eachsprinkler/standpipe system control valve.


I. Fire Pump Supervision: For each fire pump provide individual supervisionof the following fire pump alarms:

1. Fire pump running.

2. Fire pump loss of power in any phase.

3. Fire pump phase reversal.

J. High/Low Air Pressure Supervision: Provide supervision of low and highair pressure for each dry-pipe system and each pre-action system.

3.05 NOTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Horn/Strobe Signals: Provide combination horn/strobe signals throughoutas required to ensure audibility and intelligibility of signal as detailed inNFPA 72.

B. Strobe Signals: Provide additional non-textual visual appliancethroughout building to ensure compliance with ADA requirements.

C. Speaker/Strobe Signals: For all voice/alarm systems provide combinationspeaker/strobe signals throughout as required to ensure audibility andintelligibility of signal as detailed in NFPA 72.

3.06 OFF-SITE SUPERVISION

Provide in or adjacent to the control panel, all equipment and wiring necessaryto connect to system to the campus CCMS. Activation of any of the followingsignals shall automatically be reported to CCMS via relays:

A. Fire Alarm System in Alarm.

B. Valve Tamper.

C. System Trouble.

D. Waterflow.

E. Fire Alarm System Power Off.


3.07 SPARE PARTS

The Fire Alarm System Contractor shall supply the University with a minimum ofone replacement for each six devices (or fraction thereof) installed of thefollowing devices:

A. Analog Smoke Detectors.

B. Addressable Manual Stations.

C. Interface Modules (monitor).

D. Interface Modules (control).

E. Horn/Strobe Signals.

F. Speaker/Strobe Signals.

G. Strobe Signals.

H. Duct Smoke Detectors.

I. Door Hold Open Devices.

J. Addressable Heat Detectors.

3.08 PROGRAMMING AND TEST DEVICES OR TOOLS

The Fire Alarm System Contractor shall furnish all devices necessary to conducttests of all devices and equipment prior to substantial completion. Uponsatisfactory completion of required tests, the Contractor shall furnish theUniversity with two of each device, tool or accessory used and required toperform complete periodic tests and maintenance. Such devices or tools willinclude at a minimum interface devices, interface module programming tools,keys, program codes, and software. These devices, tools, and accessories shallbecome the property of the University.


3.09 SIGNS

Provide and install 5 inch by 7 inch engraved red plastic signs with whitelettering (helvetica or sans serif type)

above each manual pull station. Secure signs to surface with pan head screws andsuitable anchors. These signs shall read as follows:

IN CASE OF FIRE EMERGENCY!

1. PULL FIRE ALARM2. LEAVE BUILDING3. CALL FIRE DEPARTMENTDIAL 9-1-1

The fire alarm is NOT connected to the fire department.

Notify 405-2222 immediately if fire alarm system is disabled.

3.10 WIRING

All field wiring shall be installed in conduit. Conduit and boxes shall be sizedaccording to National Electrical Code(R)requirements based on the number ofconductors. Initiating device circuit wiring shall be two-conductor, twistedwith integral shield and ground. Notification appliance circuits shall beminimum 14 AWG. Primary power (AC) branch circuit conductors shall be minimum12 AWG.

A. Identification: Fire alarm circuits shall be identified by red junctionbox covers stenciled in white letters "FIRE ALARM."

B. Circuit Testing: All wiring shall be tested for the following conditionsbefore devices are installed or circuits connected to control equipment:

1. Verify that stray (unwanted) voltages do not exist between theinstallation conductors and ground or between conductors.

2. Verify all conductors not intentionally grounded are isolated from groundusing an approved insulation testing device or "megger".

3. Verify that all conductors not intentionally connected together areisolated from one another using an approved insulation testing device or"megger".


4. Measure and record the loop resistance of each circuit with the conductorpair shorted together at the far end, verify that loop resistance does notexceed manufacturer's requirements.

C. Circuit Test Reports: Supply the University and Architect or Engineerwith a copy of all circuit testing reports and loop resistance readings.

3.11 SYSTEM TESTING

All initiating and notification appliances, control equipment, accessories, andauxiliary functions shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 72 acceptance testprocedures. Representatives of the Architect or Engineer, Manufacturer, Fire

Protection (Automatic Sprinkler) Contractor and UMCP/DAEC shall be notified ofthe date and time of the test. A minimum of 14 days notice is required whenscheduling the acceptance test. The Contractor is responsible for conducting allrequired tests. All necessary equipment and supplies shall be provided atContractor's expense, including ladders, radios, test equipment, volt-ohm meter,sound-pressure (decibel) meter, flashlights, hand tools, and smoke or smokesubstitute for functional tests. All test procedures shall conform with theManufacturer's recommended test procedures and the NFPA 72 recommended practice.Subcontractors responsible for related work connected to, or controlled by, thefire alarm and detection system shall be available to demonstrate theirequipment at the time of acceptance testing.

3.12 TEST REPORT

The Contractor shall prepare and submit a report of test in the form and contentrequired by NFPA 72. The report shall be signed by the supervising technician orFire Protection Engineer. The Contractor shall submit the report to theUniversity, Architect, and/or Engineer upon completion of testing.

3.13 WARRANTY

The completed system shall be warranted for a period of two years from the dateof acceptance. The warranty shall cover all defects in parts and workmanship,and expenses related to parts, labor and travel to and from the site for thepurposes of correcting same. Maintenance and repair shall be performed only by afactory trained service technician.


3.14 TRAINING

Provide complete certified factory technical training for a minimum of two ofthe University's select representatives. The University's selectrepresentatives shall, upon completion of the above training, be factoryqualified to perform complete maintenance and repair of the fire alarm system.The contractor shall assume the responsibility to coordinate with the Universitythe location and time required for the above certified factory technicaltraining. In addition to the above factory technical training, the generaloperation of the fire alarm system shall be demonstrated to the University'ssatisfaction. At least two formally scheduled sessions shall be conducted toallow for all facility personnel to attend.

3.15 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

All deviations from the approved shop drawings require prior approval ofUMCP/DAEC, Architect, and/or Engineer. Within 15 days of substantialcompletion, five copies of the as-built drawings indicating the location andconfiguration of all equipment, devices, wiring, conduit, and junction boxesshall be supplied to the University.

3.16 MANUALS

Five copies of the Manufacturer's operating manual, programming manual, andmaintenance manual shall be supplied to the University within 15 days ofsubstantial completion. Each manual shall include a print out of the point listwith custom address for each device.

END

13900 FIRE-SUPPRESSION AND PROTECTION SYSTEMS (2.15.97)

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The work of this section consists of a fire protection system which mayinclude one or all of the following:

1. A complete automatic sprinkler system as defined by National FireProtection Association (NFPA) Standard 13.

2. A complete Type I standpipe system as defined by NFPA 14.

3. A compete fire pump installation with pressure maintenance pump as definedby NFPA 20.

B. Provide all piping, valves, backflow preventer, sprinklers, alarm devices,fire department connections, fire pump and controller, pressure maintenance pumpand controller, and other material necessary to provide a complete fireprotection system to protect the specified building areas in accordance withdesign requirements.

C. Each item of equipment shall be capable of performing its function over anextended period of time with a minimum of attention and maintenance. Allequipment shall be constructed using new materials designed and built in

accordance with the best practices of the industry. Each item of equipmentshall be listed on the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Fire Protection EquipmentList or Factory Mutual (FM) Approval Guide. Each major item of equipment shallbear the manufacturer's name or trademark; serial number; and UL or FM label.

D. The equipment manufacturer and installer of the sprinkler and standpipesystem shall have been engaged in the sprinkler industry for a minimum of five(5) years. The equipment manufacturer and installer of the fire pumpinstallation shall have been engaged in the fire pump industry for a minimum offive (5) years.


All requirements of State of Maryland and the Office of the State Fire Marshalshall apply to the specifications and design requirements, including thefollowing:


A. Maryland Fire Prevention Code (latest edition).

B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL), Fire Protection equipment list.

C. Factory Mutual Approval Guide.

D. Maryland Occupational Safety and Health Act.

E. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems

F. NFPA 13D - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems in One- andTwo-Family Dwellings and Manufactured Homes.

G. NFPA 13R - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems inResidential Occupancies up to and Including Four Stories in Height.

H. NFPA 14 - Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems.

I. NFPA 15 - Standard for the Installation of Water Spray Fixed Systems.

J. NFPA 20 - Standard for the Installation of Centrifugal Fire Pumps.

K. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

L. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code.

M. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.

N. NFPA 170 - Fire Safety Symbols.

O. NFPA 231 - General Storage

P. NFPA 231C - Rack Storage of Materials.

Q. NFPA 1963 - Fire Hose Connections

R. UMCP Design Criteria Facilities Standards Manual for Architecture andEngineering Services (DCFS).

S. Washington Suburban Sanitary Commission (WSSC) - Plumbing and Gas FittingRegulations.


1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall submit a complete list of material and equipment forapproval before purchase or installation. The list of material and equipmentshall describe type of material, capacities, manufacturer, and catalog numbersof equipment and give such information as necessary for checking equipment forapproval.

B. The Contractor shall submit detailed shop drawings prepared in accordancewith NFPA 13, NFPA 14 and NFPA 20 for approval for all equipment to beconstructed and installed. Such shop drawings shall be complete, giving allrequired information, and shall be properly checked and coordinated with thework of other trades before submission.

C. Calculations for hydraulic design shall be made in accordance with NFPA13. Calculations shall comply with the project WSSC hydraulic data sheet and besubmitted for approval. Verify water supply data with the UMCP Department ofArchitecture, Engineering, and Construction (DAEC) Safety Analysis Group basecalculations on the given fire flow. The engineer shall provide the UMCP recorddata at the point of the new utility connection as follows:

Building Name (UMCP Hydrant #XXX):Elevation XX feet, Static XX psi, Residual XX psi,Flow XXXX GPM.

D. Contractor shall submit for approval to all applicable regulatory agenciesand UMCP/DAEC all the listed submittals in items 1.04 A,B, & C above of allsystems and equipment.

E. No work shall be performed, unless performed at the Contractor's own risk,until the shop drawings, calculations and list of materials have been approved.

F. As-builts drawings: All deviations from the approved shop drawingsrequire prior approval of the owner, UMCP/DAEC, architect, and engineer. Beforeacceptance testing shall begin, as-built drawings of the completed fireprotection system shall be supplied to the owner, UMCP Department of PhysicalPlant, and UMCP/DAEC.


PART II - PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPING

A. Provide and install all piping, approved shop drawings and hydrauliccalculations in accordance with all the applicable standards.

B. Connection shall be made to the UMCP on-site water system. The connectionbetween system piping and underground piping shall be made with a cast ironflanged piece, properly fastened.

C. A backflow preventer shall be installed in accordance with WSSCregulations. The backflow preventer shall be listed by UL for fire protectionuse.

D. Piping shall run concealed in areas with drop ceilings.

E. Installation of all piping shall be in coordination with duct, lightfixture, and any other work that may obstruct sprinklers.

F. All piping exposed installed outside, or otherwise exposed to weather,shall be externally galvanized.

2.02 VALVES

A. All valves on connections to water supply to sprinklers shall be UL listedbutterfly type indicating valves except for the following which shall be O.S.&Y:

1. All indicating valves on the supply side of the backflow preventer.

2. The indicating valve immediately adjacent to the backflow preventer on thesystem side.

3. All indicating valves on the suction side of the fire pump.

4. Where indicated on the contract drawings.

All butterfly valves shall have a built in tamper resistant switch forsupervision of the open position. The switch shall be contained within a NEMAType 1 general purpose indoor rated housing. Either unauthorized removal of theswitch housing (when the valve is open) or closing the valve, will cause theswitch contacts to change position. The switch shall have four conductors toaccommodate connections to Style 4 or Style 6 signaling line circuit devices.


B. Where O.S. & Y indicating valves are installed, the following shall apply:

1. Valves 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be UL listed iron body except seats,discs, and stems which shall be brass. Valves shall be suitable for 175 psiworking pressure.

2. Valves 2 inches and smaller shall be UL listed brass body and brass stemseat. Valves shall be suitable for 175 psi working pressure.

C. Check valves shall comply with the following:

1. Check valves 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be UL listed iron body swingcheck with cast brass hinge, rod, and brass faced discs. Valves shall besuitable for 175 psi working pressure.

2. Check valves 2 inches and smaller shall be UL listed brass body and allbrass fitted. Valves shall be suitable for 175 psi working pressure.

D. Globe valves shall be of cast bronze construction in accordance with ASTMB-62 specifications 85-5-5-5 for superior corrosion resistance. The hand wheelshall be manufactured from cast iron materials to comply with the American WaterWorks Association C-509 and ASTM A-126 class B standards. Valves shall besuitable for 175 psi working pressure.

E. Ball valves shall be constructed of forged brass with Teflon seats andshall be provided with a vinyl covered handle.

F. Test/drain valve assemblies shall be UL listed and FM approved with bronzebody. Test/drain valve assemblies shall by operated by opening/closing onehandle only. Test assemblies that require the opening of multiple valves at onetime will not be accepted. Valves shall be suitable for 175 psi workingpressure.

G. Post Indicator Valve - when indicated on the contract drawings, a gatevalve on incoming water service shall be operable by a UL listed post indicatorvalve with tamper switch. Post indicator valve shall be installed a minimum or40 feet from the building. Refer to Section 13850. Post indicator valves areonly required where the sprinkler system water supply travels through thefacility before it reaches the main control valve.


H. All valves controlling water supply for sprinklers shall be readilyaccessible for use by emergency and maintenance personnel. Follow WSSCregulations for specific accessibility requirements for backflow preventers.

I. All valves controlling water supply for sprinklers shall be supervised bythe fire alarm system.

J. All valves controlling water supply for sprinklers shall be red in color.

2.03 PIPING ACCESSORIES

A. All hanger assemblies shall be listed by UL. No sprinkler piping is to besupported from any mechanical or electrical devices and/or equipment (ducts,

lights, etc.). No chains, wire or perforated band iron will be permitted forhangers. Hanger assemblies installed outside, or otherwise exposed to weather,shall be externally galvanized.

B. Install iron pipe sleeves of ample diameter at all points where pipes cutbeams or floors or walls, so sized and installed that sprinkler pipes will notbend.

1. Install sleeve before walls or concrete work is built or poured, withsleeves being flush with wall surfaces.

2. Sleeves for underground pipes shall be caulked with oakum and molten leadand be watertight.

C. Floor, wall and ceiling plates shall be pressed steel or cast iron splitplates, chromium plated.

D. All escutcheons shall be of the proper type for the model of sprinklerinstalled.

E. Pressure gauges shall be UL listed for fire protection service.

F. Where required for access to equipment, and where not otherwise specified,metal access doors and frame shall be furnished. Panels shall be suitable forsurface in which installed, where applicable.


G. Furnish and install on each control valve identification tags indicatingthe portion of the system controlled by each valve.

1. Tags shall be brass with black enamel number and lettering to indicateuse, securely fastened to valve wheel with brass chain.

2. Provide an approved valve chart in frame and glass cover showing locationand use of each valve. Chart shall be made on tracing, printed, and set inframe. The chart shall be hung in a visible location near the alarm checkvalve.

2.04 SPRINKLERS

A. Sprinklers shall be listed by UL, and only new sprinklers shall be used.Any sprinkler that incurs damage, is painted, or is sprayed with any fireretardant or obstructive material shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner.Sprinkles shall be properly coordinated with other work including duct andelectric fixture installation. The correct type of sprinkler head shall be usedin every location.

B. Sprinklers that may be subject to mechanical damage due to their location(under stairwells, low hanging sprinklers in corridors, storage rooms, underducts, etc.) shall be provided with guards listed by UL for the model and typeof sprinkler used.

C. Sprinklers under open grating shall be provided with approved shields.

D. Sprinklers shall be the following or approved equal:

1. Sprinklers shall ordinarily be 1/2 inch orifice with 165? F Temperatureratings unless extended coverage, ESFR, or otherwise required or specified byUMCP/DAEC.

2. Pendant sprinklers shall be one of the following:

a. Central "Pendant" Model Ab. Grinnell "Pendant" Model Ec. Reliable "Pendant" Model G

3. Upright sprinkler heads shall be one of the following:

a. Central "Upright" Model Ab. Grinnell "Upright" Model Ac. Reliable Model G13900 FIRE-SUPPRESSION AND PROTECTION SYSTEMS (2.15.97)

4. Quick response sprinklers shall be one of the following:

a. Central Model GB-QRb. Grinnell Model A (Quick Response)c. Reliable Model F1FR

5. Sidewall sprinklers shall be one of the following:

a. Central Model Hb. Reliable Model Gc. Grinnell Model A

6. Concealed sprinklers shall be one of the following:

a. Central Model Ab. Grinnell Model F975c. Reliable Model G4FR

NOTE: Concealed sprinklers shall only be used in areas where adequate headroomis not provided.

7. Residential sprinklers shall be one of the following:

a. Central Model GBRb. Grinnell Model F954c. Reliable Model F1/RES

8. On/Off Flow Control sprinkle heads shall be Central Model FC ONLY.

9. ESFR sprinkler heads shall be one of the following:

a. Central Model ESFR-1b. Grinnell Model ESFR-1c. Reliable Model H ESFR

10. Dry Sidewall sprinklers shall be one of the following:

a. Central Model H-1b. Grinnell F960/Q48c. Reliable Model G3SW

11. Dry pendant sprinklers shall be one of the following:

a. Central Model A-1b. Grinnell Model F960c. Reliable Model G3


12. Attic Sprinklers shall be:

a. Central Model BB3

13. Extended coverage sprinklers shall be one of the following:

a. Central Model ECOH ESLO-20b. Grinnell Model F987c. Reliable Model GFRXLO

14. Intermediate level sprinklers (for installation under grated areas) shallbe one of the following:

a. Central Model G (Intermediate)b. Grinnell Model F950c. Reliable Model G (Intermediate)

2.05 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS

Each fire department connection shall be the flush type. Free standing typefire department connections shall only be installed when approved by UMCP/DAECand shall be located a minimum of 40 feet from the building. Each firedepartment connection shall have two (2) 2-1/2 inch inlets with threadsconforming to the American National Fire Hose Connection Screw Thread as definedin NFPA 1963, equipped with UL listed screw caps with pin lugs and chains. Thefire department connection shall be labeled "AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER" with raisedletters at least one inch in size cast on plate. The fire departmentconnections shall be not less than two feet and not more than 3 feet 6 inches inelevation, measured from the ground level to the center line of the inlets. Twofire department connections are required when two or more risers are provided.

2.06 ALARM CHECK VALVE

A. An approved alarm check valve (Reliable Model E or equivalent) with allthe required trim shall be installed as indicated on the contract drawings. Allequipment shall be located and installed so that it is accessible forinspection, removal, and repair and shall be substantially supported.

B. A retarding device shall be installed with valves provided to permitrepair or removal without shutting off the water supply to sprinklers. Valvesshall be arranged so that they are sealed in the open position. A valve andbypass line shall be installed in order to test the alarm devices at the alarmcheck valve. All valves shall be identified with appropriate signs. Alldrainage shall be arranged to the main drain.


C. An approved outside water motor gong with guard shall be provided(Reliable Model C or equivalent). The water motor gong shall be located at thefire department connection. The water motor gong shall be provided withsufficient sized piping to cause a strong signal with one test valve open andflowing. The water motor gong drain shall be piped to a suitable drain oroutside to grade level (refer to section 2.10). The water motor gong shall beprovided with a standard sign stating "SPRINKLER FIRE ALARM - CALL THE FIREDEPARTMENT". The line to the water motor gong shall be provided with a signstating, "ALARM LINE" or "WATER MOTOR GONG LINE" affixed to the pipe near thealarm check valve.

D. The top of the retard device or alarm line shall be fitted with anapproved pressure switch. Conductors shall be provided under the electricdivision to provide fire alarm and annunciation. Activation of the sprinklersystem by one sprinkler or equivalent shall cause an alarm signal on the firealarm system to activate as "MAIN WATER FLOW".

2.07 CHECK VALVE

An approved check valve with automatic drip shall be installed on each firedepartment connection line. The check valve shall be located near aspracticable to the point where it joins the system. No other type valve shallbe installed in the fire department connection line.

2.08 CONTROL VALVES

All valves controlling water supply for sprinklers shall be electricallysupervised in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13 and 72. Switchesshall be an approved type and shall signal to the audible and visual alarmindicators provided under the electrical division. The switches shall be singlecircuit limit switch, mounted to the piping so that when the valve is fullyopen, the limit switch actuator holds the contacts open. If the valve is closedto a point where the stem has reached a distance of one-fifth of total travel tothe closed position, the limit switch actuator shall close to the switchcontacts. (Note: Under Section 13850, all switches shall be wired to the firealarm system).


2.09 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS

Identification signs shall be porcelain enameled 18 gauge steel (Reliable ModelA identification signs or equivalent) and shall be affixed securely by brasschain to all valves. The signs shall be red in color.

A. The main drain sign shall be labeled "MAIN DRAIN". Riser drains shall belabeled "RISER DRAIN" or "DRAIN".

B. Auxiliary drain signs shall be labeled "AUXILIARY DRAIN".

C. Inspector's Test signs shall be labeled "INSPECTOR'S TEST".

D. All water supply control valves shall have a standard sign identifying theportion of the system controlled, noting that the valve must be kept open, andleaving a blank space for notification information.

E. All valves which are placed in concealed spaces shall have the standardsign affixed in a visible location (valves hidden by a drop ceiling shall havethe sign mounted on the ceiling or wall under the valve).

2.10 DRAINS AND TEST PIPING

A. All risers, including the alarm check valve, shall be equipped with drainswith sizes as specified in NFPA 13. The alarm check valve drain ("main drain")shall be piped to the outside of the building at a point free from causing waterdamage. Where this arrangement is not practical, the drain shall be piped to afloor drain or sump approved for the purpose by the Departments of PhysicalPlant and the UMCP/DES.

B. Every waterflow switch shall have an inspector's test connection piped inaccordance with item 2.10C of this specification.

C. All drains and test piping shall be piped to the outside of the buildingat a point free from causing water damage. Where this arrangement is notpractical, the drain shall be piped to a floor drain or sump approved for thepurpose by the Departments of Physical Plant and the UMCP/DAEC.


2.11 BACKFLOW PREVENTER

Backflow preventer shall be Watts No. 709 or approved equal double check valveassembly. The backflow preventer shall be installed in the fire protectionsystem supply main in accordance with WSSC regulations.

2.12 DRY PIPE SYSTEM

Dry systems shall only be installed when adequate heat or insulation can not beprovided to prevent sprinkler piping from freezing.

A. A dry pipe valve (Reliable Model A or equivalent) with all the requiredtrim shall be installed for protection of unheated areas. All equipment shallbe located in a heated area and installed so that the equipment is accessibleand shall be substantially supported.

B. An air compressor (Reliable Model A or equivalent) with an automatic airmaintenance device (Reliable Model B-1 or equivalent) shall be installed andsized in accordance with NFPA 13.

C. Pressure switches shall be installed to monitor dry-pipe system waterflow, low air pressure and high air pressure.

D. A separate test connection shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 13 totest the dry-pipe system alarms.

E. An accelerator, when required by NFPA 13, shall be Reliable Model B1 orequivalent.

2.13 PRE-ACTION SYSTEM

Pre-action systems shall only be installed where required by UMCP/DAEC and thefacility program.

A. The following pre-action valves, with all required trim, shall beinstalled:

1. 4 inch or larger: Reliable Model B or equivalent.

2. 2-1/2 inch: Reliable Model A or equivalent.

B. A Reliable Model A air compressor with a Reliable Model B-1 airmaintenance device shall be provided for maintenance and supervision airpressure.


C. The pre-action valve shall be activated by rate compensated heat detectorsor cross-zoned smoke detection as approved UMCP/DAEC. Refer to section 13850.

D. A check valve shall be installed on the system side of the pre-actionvalve. Refer to item 2.02C.

2.14 FIRE PUMP, MOTOR AND CONTROLLER

A fire pump shall only be installed when the existing water supply is notadequate to meet the required sprinkler demand and building height.

A. The pump furnished for fire protection service shall be supplied with thespecified driver, controller and pump accessory items by the pump manufacturer.

B. The pump and controller shall be listed by UL and FM approved for fireprotection service. The standard manufactured product of Aurora, ITT A-C Pump,Patterson, and Peerless is recommended.

C. The fire pump shall be capable of delivering not less than 150% of therated flow at not less than 65% rated head. The shut off (no flow) head shallnot exceed 120% of rated head.

D. The fire pump shall be a horizontal split case, single stage, centrifugalpump specifically labeled for fire service. Limited service fire pumpcontrollers will not be accepted unless specified by UMCP/DAEC.

E. The pump and motor shall be mounted on a common baseplate of formed steel.

F. The pump and motor shall be checked for alignment after the pump base hasbeen installed and grouted in place.

G. The pump casing shall be cast iron with 6 inch 125 pound rating suctionand 6 inch 250 pound rating discharge flanges machined to American NationalStandards Institute (ANSI) dimensions.

H. The pump shall be hydrostatically tested and run tested prior to shipment.The pump shall be hydrostatically tested at a pressure of not less than one andone-half times the no flow (shut off) head of the pump's maximum diameterimpeller plus the maximum allowable suction head, but in no case less than 250psi.


I. Electric Motor

1. The pump driver shall be horizontal, foot mounted, ball bearing inductionmotor with horsepower rated for the required pump, 3 phase, 60 hertz with opendrip-proof NEMA enclosure.

2. The motor shall be mounted on a steel base common to the pump and shall beconnected to the pump with a flexible coupling protected by a suitable guard.

3. The fire pump manufacturer shall accurately align the pump and motorshafts prior to shipment. After field installation, but prior to grouting thebase, a millwright or similarly qualified person check and verify or correct theshaft alignment.

J. Fittings

The pump manufacturer shall furnish piping accessory items for the pumpinstallation which will adapt the pump connections to the fire protection systemand test connection as follows. Fittings subjected to pump discharge pressureshall be ANSI 250 psi rating. Fittings subjected to suction pressure shall be125 psi rating.

1. Eccentric tapered suction reducer

2. Concentric tapered discharge increaser

3. Hose valve test header (as required by NFPA 20)

4. Hose valves with caps and chains

5. Pump casing relief valve (shall be piped to drain in accordance with item2.10C of this specifications).

6. Automatic air release valve

7. Ball drip valve

8. Suction and discharge pressure gauges

L. Flow Meter

An FM approved flow meter shall be provided and installed in accordance withNFPA 20 to test the pump.


M. Fire Pump Controller

1. The main fire pump controller shall be a factory assembled, wired, andtested unit.

2. The controller shall be UL listed and FM approved for fire pump service.The standard manufactured product of Firetrol, Joslyn Clark, Metron, orequivalent shall be provided.

3. The controller shall be rated for the motor specified in item 2.13.J ofthis specification.

4. The controller shall be of the combined manual and automatic type designedfor across-the-line type starting.

5. The minimum withstand rating of the controller shall not be less than30,000 Amps RMS Symmetrical at 480 volts.

6. The controller shall include a motor rated combination isolatingdisconnect switch/circuit breaker, mechanically interlocked and operated with a

single externally mounted handle. When moving the handle from "OFF" to "ON" theinterlocking mechanism shall sequence the isolating disconnect switch "ON" firstand then the circuit breaker. When the handle is moved from "ON" to "OFF" theinterlocking mechanism shall sequence the circuit breaker open first, and thenthe isolating disconnect switch.

7. The controller shall have externally mounted, individual, visibleindicators for "Power Available", "Phase Failure", "Phase Reversal", "PumpRunning", and "Run Time On".

8. The controller shall be supplied with a pressure switch with a range of 0-300 psi and have independent high and low pressure settings. The pressureswitch shall be mounted inside the controller. The piping connection for thepressure switch shall be installed as shown in NFPA 20 Appendix A. The pressureswitch set points shall be set as shown in NFPA 20 Appendix A.

9. The controller shall have a solid state minimum running period timer setfor seven minutes.


10. Individual "Phase Failure", "Phase Reversal" and "Pump Operating" alarmcontacts shall be wired for connection to the Main Fire Alarm Control Panel, andthe CCMS.

11. The manufacturer shall test the entire controller assembly prior toshipment. This test shall include each function the controller may be requiredto perform. The manufacturer shall test the circuit breaker at 300% full load,600% full load, and short circuit current settings. The manufacturer shallperform a high potential test of the controller power circuits at not less thantwo times the rated voltage plus 1000 Volts. Documentation of the above listedtests shall be submitted before the fire pump acceptance test.

N. Field Acceptance Test

A field acceptance test shall be conducted upon completion of the pumpinstallation. All acceptance testing outlined in NFPA 20 shall be conducted bythe installing contractor in the presence of a representative of the UMCP/DAEC.Documentation of all factory and field tests shall be submitted at theconclusion of the field acceptance test. Failure to submit documentation of thefactory and field tests will be just cause for equipment rejection.

2.15 PRESSURE MAINTENANCE PUMP, MOTOR CONTROLLER

A. The contractor shall furnish and install a pressure maintenance pump witha rated capacity of 10 GPM, against a total head of 250 feet coupled to a motorrated for the required pump, not to exceed 5 HP (Maximum), 480 volts, HZ, 3phase.

B. Pump shall have cast iron diffusers and adapter with registered fits tomaintain axial alignment; bronze enclosed impellers, bronze casing rings, bronzebase bearing; steel clamp type shaft coupling; stainless steel shaft. Impellers

shall be pinned to shaft to prevent damage due to reverse rotation and tomaintain proper interstage lateral setting. Suction and discharge connectionsto be of the threaded NPT type. Pump shall be designed for and equipped withmechanical seal type stuffing box. Vent tap is to be provided for stuffing boxto relieve entrapped air. Pump shall be provided with cast iron base with drainplug.


C. The pressure maintenance pump shall be installed in accordance with NFPA20.

D. The control valves to and from the pressure maintenance pump shall besupervised butterfly valves installed in accordance with item 2.02.A of thisspecification.

E. Pressure maintenance Pump Controller

1. The pressure maintenance pump controller shall be factory assembled, wiredand tested, and specifically designed for this type of service.

2. The pressure maintenance pump controller shall be listed by UL.

3. The pressure switch shall have a range of 0-300 psi and have independenthigh and low pressure settings. The pressure switch shall be mounted inside thecontroller. The piping connection for the pressure switch shall be installed asshown in NFPA 20 Appendix A. The pressure switch set points shall be set asshown in NFPA 20 Appendix A.

4. The controller shall have a running period timer to be set to keep themotor in operation for at least one minute.

5. The controller manufacturer, prior to shipment, shall hook up and test thepressure maintenance pump controller as a completed assembly. This test shallinclude each function the controller may be required to perform. Themanufacturer shall perform a high potential test of the controller powercircuits are not less than two times the rated voltage plus 1000 volts.Documentation of the above listed tests shall be submitted prior to the pumpacceptance test.

F. Field Acceptance Test

A field acceptance test of the pressure maintenance pump and controller shall beperformed by the contractor at the same time as the main fire pump acceptancetest. The acceptance test shall include each function the controller may berequired to perform including manual start-stop, automatic start-stop, andminimum run timing.


2.16 EXCESS PRESSURE PUMP

An excess pressure pump shall be installed on all systems that do not have afire pump. The excess pressure pump shall be Gamewell or equal 1/4 HP motor120v single phase, 60 HZ.

2.17 RISERS

Each standpipe riser shall be installed with a UL listed 2 1/2 inch NST firedepartment hose valves with screw caps on each floor in an accessible, protectedand readily visible location.

2.18 DRY STANDPIPE SYSTEM

A. Dry standpipe systems shall be the manual-dry type as defined by NFPA 14.

B. Each standpipe riser shall be installed with a UL listed 2-1/2 inch NSTfire department hose valves with screw caps on each floor in an accessible,protected, and readily visible location in accordance with NFPA 14.

C. Each dry standpipe riser shall have a drain sized and located inaccordance with NFPA 14. Each drain shall be piped outside the building inaccordance with item 2.10.B of this section.

D. All dry piping shall be installed so that the entire system may bedrained. The number of auxiliary drains shall be kept to a minimum.

E. All dry piping, hangers and fittings shall be galvanized.

F. Each dry standpipe shall be provided with an air and vacuum valveinstalled at the top of each riser. The air and vacuum valve shall be a 1 inchAPCO Series 140 air and vacuum valve, manufactured by Valve and PrimerCorporation or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Sprinkler system shall be furnished with a spare sprinkler cabinet,wrench, and 12 spare sprinklers of each type and rating as are in the building.


B. A complete care and maintenance catalog is to be furnished at the valvelocation, enclosed in a watertight container, and attached to the riser. Verbalinstructions for operation, care and maintenance of the sprinkler installation

are to be given to the Owner's maintenance representative by the Contractor'srepresentative upon completion and/or activation of the system.

C. Protection: All exposed piping devices (non-brass and chrome) are to bepainted with two coats of bright red paint. Painting to conform to theprotective coating section of the specifications.

3.02 TESTING

A. In addition to any tests which might be required by the approvingauthorities, the entire sprinkler system (both wet and dry) shall behydrostatically tested in accordance with NFPA 13. All dry system piping shallalso be air tested in accordance with NFPA 13. All underground piping shall behydrostatically tested in accordance with NFPA 24. Flow tests shall beperformed at each test connection to test all alarm devices.

B. If leaks develop, they shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense.

C. Leaks developing form misaligned fittings or dull threads will be repairedby replacing the fittings.

D. Underground main and lead-in connections to the system risers shall beflushed in accordance with NFPA 13.

E. Dry-pipe system shall be tested in accordance with the requirements fortesting dry-pipe systems in NFPA 13. Additionally, dry pipe valves shall tripwithin sixty (60) seconds after opening of the inspector's test connection.

F. The fire pump shall be tested in accordance with the requirements foracceptance testing in NFPA 20.

G. All testing listed above shall be performed by the installing Contractorin the presence of a representative of the UMCP/DAEC.


3.03 APPROVALS

A. All work under this heading shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 13and NFPA 20 and subject to the approval and inspection of the UMCP/DAEC.

B. Upon completion of the entire system covered by these specifications, alltest certificates required by all regulatory jurisdictions shall be completedand provided to UMCP/DAEC by the Contractor. After the certificates have beenreceived, final inspection of the work will be made by the UMCP/DAEC. Testcertificates will in no way relieve the Contractor from completing all contractwork or the terms of his guarantee.

3.04 GUARANTEE

The Contractor shall guarantee and service all workmanship and materials to beas represented by him, and shall repair or replace, at no additional cost to theOwner, any part thereof which may become defective within the period of one (1)year after the date of final acceptance by the Architect, ordinary wear and tearexcepted. Contractor shall be responsible for, and pay for, any damages causedby, or resulting from defects in his work.

3.05 QUALIFICATIONS

System design and installation shall be supervised by an experienced sprinklersystem technician or fire protection engineer with not less than five (5) yearsexperience with sprinkler systems alarm systems. Shop drawings shall beprepared and signed by a NICET Level III or IV certified engineering technicianor a registered fire protection engineer. The signature of the technician orengineer constitutes an affidavit that the statements, representations, andinformation presented in the submittal constitute a complete operational systemconforming with applicable state codes and recognized engineering practices.All field installation work shall be continuously supervised by a NICET Level IIor III sprinkler system technician.

3.07 MANUALS

Five (5) copies of the manufacturers' operating manuals and maintenance manualsshall be supplied to the University within fifteen (15) days of substantialcompletion.

END

13. FUEL STORAGE TANKS (11.15.96)

A. All installations/or removals must be in accordance with the requirementsof OSHA, Federal, and State EPA regulations, COMAR, and The Maryland Departmentof the Environment. Also Reference Section 1, Environmental Health and Safetyin facility design for UST regulatory considerations/citation. The contractorshall be responsible for all required inspections and permit applications.

B. When at all possible, natural gas service or above ground fuel tanks arepreferred over underground storage tanks.

C. Tanks shall be constructed of double wall fiberglass reinforced plastic(FRP).

D. Piping shall be either FRP or copper depending on size.

E. Material used in construction of the tank shall be compatible with thesubstance to be stored.

F. Low level alarm signal to DDC or Hawkeye as appropriate, and a high levelalarm on a local horn or bell mounted at or near the tank vent approximately 8foot above grade.

G. If the fuel storage tank is not located in the mechanical room with thegenerator set, then a remote level gauge near the generator is required.

H. Manholes, over-fill level alarms and/or other over-fill protection nozzlesshall be provided as required.

I. Abandoned tanks must be removed and disposed of by the Contractor.

END

13971 WET CHEMICAL FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS (2.15.97)

PART I - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

The work in this section covers the requirements for pre-engineered wet chemicalfire extinguishing systems for protection of cooking equipment including exhausthoods, ducts, and related work.

1.2 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extentreferenced. The publications are referred in the text by the basic designationonly.

A. FACTORY MUTUAL ENGINEERING AND RESEARCH CORPORATION (FM) Approval Guide.

B. NFPA 17A - Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems.

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

D. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code.

E. NFPA 96 - Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial CookingOperations.

F. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC. (UL) Fire Protection Equipment Directory.

G. UL 300 - Fire Testing of Fire Extinguishing System for Protection ofRestaurant Cooking Areas.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

The University of Maryland College Park Department of Architecture, Engineering,and Construction (UMCP DAEC) will review and approve all submittals in thissection.

A. Manufacturer's Catalog data

1) Storage cylinder

2) Fusible links

3) Release mechanisms

4) Valve

5) Discharge nozzle

6) Pipe and fittings


7) Piping and accessories

8) Remote manual actuation stations

9) Pressure-operated switches

B. Shop Drawings

Submit electrical wiring diagrams and a scaled piping layout showing components,pipe sizes, pipe lengths, nozzle, and valve locations in relation to cookingappliances and fusible link locations.

C. Instructions

Submit the extinguishing system manufacturer's installation manual.

D. Submit the extinguishing system manufacturer's operation and maintenancemanuals before the final inspection.

E. As-Built Drawings

Submit as-built drawings before the final inspection.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

Installation drawings, shop drawings, and as-built drawings shall be prepared,by or under the supervision of, an individual who is experienced with the typesof works specified herein, and is currently certified by the National Institutefor Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) as an engineeringtechnician with minimum Level-III certification in Special Hazard Systemprogram. Contractor shall submit data for approval showing the name and

certification of all involved individuals with such qualifications at or priorto submittal of drawings.

1.5 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

Provide new or modify existing pre-engineered wet chemical fire extinguishingsystem for protection of new or existing cooking equipment including exhausthoods, ducts, and related work. Equipment, materials, installation,workmanship, inspection, and testing shall be in strict accordance with therequired and advisory provisions of the manufacturer's installation manual NFPA17A and NFPA 96, except as modified herein. Each system shall includematerials, accessories, and equipment necessary to provide each system completeand ready


for use. Provide each system to give full consideration to blind spaces,piping, electrical equipment, ducts, and other construction and equipment inaccordance with detailed working drawings to be submitted for approval. Devicesand equipment for fire protection service shall be UL listed or FM approved foruse with wet chemical fire extinguishing systems. In the NFPA publicationsreferred to herein, the advisory provisions shall be considered to be mandatory,as though the word "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever itappears; reference to the "authority having jurisdiction" shall be interpretedto mean the UMCP DAEC.

1.6 ELECTRICAL WORK

Associated with this section shall be provided under Section 16000, except forcontrol and fire alarm wiring. Fire alarm system is specified in Section 13852.Provide control and fire alarm wiring including connections to fire alarmsystems, under this section in accordance with NFPA 70. Provide wiring inconduit as specified in Section 13852.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRE-ENGINEERED WET CHEMICAL FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS

Systems shall comply with NFPA 17A and NFPA 96, except as modified herein.Piping and accessories within the hood shall be stainless steel or chromeplated. All other piping shall be galvanized malleable iron or galvanizedsteel, painted to match the adjacent surface chrome or nickel plated orstainless steel or black steel painted to match the adjacent surface. Exhausthoods with grease extractors UL listed or FM approved are not required to haveprotection downstream of the grease extractors. Provide systems for protectionof new or existing cooking equipment, including exhaust hoods and ducts forcooking equipment requiring protection by NFPA 96.

2.2 SYSTEM CONTROLS

Each system shall be mechanically actuated by fusible links and by remote manualactuation stations connected to the extinguishing system release mechanisms bystainless steel cables. Manual actuation stations shall be located away fromcooking equipment, as close to an exit as practical, and in such a manner that aperson can activate the extinguishing system while traveling towards an exit.Arrange each system to automatically shutoff the flow of fuel and electricalpower to cooking appliances as indicated (and to automatically actuate thebuilding fie alarm fire alarm system as indicated). Electrical power to hoodexhaust fans shall not be shut off unless specifically required by the ULlisting or FM approval.


2.3 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS

Provide red rigid plastic signs with engraved 6 mm (0.25 inch) high whitelettering at each remote manual actuation station. Sign legends shall be "FireExtinguishing System" followed by a brief description of the equipmentprotected.

PART III - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Equipment, materials, installation, workmanship, inspection, and testing shallbe in accordance with the manufacturer's installation manual and NFPA 17A,except as modified herein.


A representative of UMCP DAEC will witness formal tests and approve systemsbefore final acceptance. Submit a written request for formal inspection atleast 7 working days prior to inspection date. Final acceptance must beobtained before piping may be covered or concealed. An experienced technicianregularly employed by the system installer shall be present during theinspection. The system installer shall provide all equipment and personnelnecessary to perform the tests. Test all piping and fittings by discharging aminimum of one storage cylinder of same size as system cylinder of compressedair or nitrogen (do not use wet chemical) to demonstrate the reliablility andproper functioning of all pressure-operated switches, electrical and gas shutofffeatures, and the discharge of gas from each system discharge nozzle.Individually test remote control stations and other components and accessoriesto demonstrate proper functioning. Testing shall also include automatic andmanual actuation, and fuel or electrical power shutoff and automatic actuationof the building fire alarm system. Furnish compressed air, nitrogen, andpersonnel for the tests. Refill and reset systems after tests have beencompleted.

END14. ELEVATORS (5.1.96)

A. General

1. Circulation patterns and anticipated usage of the building shall determinethe appropriate types and number of elevators required to ensure a fullyfunctioning building. At a minimum, each floor or area of the building shall beserved by at least one passenger elevator with a 3500 lb. or greater capacity.

2. Provide State-of-the-art microprocessor based control systems with remotemonitoring, independent service, firefighter's service, inspection, access, andautomatic two-way leveling. The system shall provide a comprehensive means toaccess the computer memory for diagnostic purposes and shall have permanentindicators to indicate important elevator statuses as an integral part of thecontroller. Company specific proprietary systems are not acceptable. Onlyequipment that is supported by the manufacturer to all elevator maintenancecompanies without regard to affiliation or the lack thereof will be acceptable.

3. The installer may either connect into an existing compatible campus wideremote monitoring system or provide all labor and materials, including software,required to install a system compatible with their Controller. The remotemonitoring system shall be capable of monitoring multiple elevators and/orgroups of elevators simultaneously and each elevator or group of elevators shallbe simultaneously monitored from at least two remote locations outside thebuilding on campus. In addition, the remote monitoring system shall include adial in modem and software so that the system may be monitored from an off-campus site.

4. Provide State-of-the-art microprocessor based drive control systems,either Variable voltage variable frequency ac motor drives or solid state dcmotor control systems are required. These systems, like the controller, shall benonproprietary.

14. ELEVATORS (5.1.96)

5. All motors used in elevator systems shall be factory guaranteed to be aminimum 90% efficient at full load at the rpm that it is being operated. The

motor shall be designed for its respective service and duty. The motor shall bedesigned to develop high starting torque with low starting current, with allparts capable of meeting the severe requirements of elevator service. The nameplate of the motor shall identify the motor efficiency, rpm, voltage, full loadamperes, frequency, and duty of the motor.

6. If any diagnostic tool or equipment is required to set up, adjust, ortrouble shoot the system, or any part of the system that one of each of thesetools or equipment will be provided with each elevator purchased includingcomplete instructions for its use.

7. The Firefighter's Service key-switch shall be operated by the EPCO MFD-1key and that all other key-switches and locks shall be Best 7-pin cylinder key-switches and locks.

8. The building shall be designed so that no thoroughfare to other areas,including the roof, is required through the elevator machine room.

9. Insulation applied to walls or structural members of or within theelevator shaft or machine room shall be encapsulated to prevent flaking andpeeling.

10. Elevator system power shall be provided through a shunt trip circuitbreaker with 135 degree heat detectors located in the machine room, the top ofthe elevator shaft, and the elevator pit. The heat detectors shall be positionedwithin 18 inches of any sprinkler head or heads in these areas.

11. Sprinkler pipes entering the elevator machine room or the elevator shaftshall be branch lines only, serving that space only and not continuing toanother area. A sprinkler shutoff valve shall be provided immediately outsidethe space and its location shall be marked or a sign shall be provided at thesprinkler head denoting the valves location.


12. Paint elevator machine room walls with white semigloss enamel paint. Paintthe elevator machine room floor and the elevator pit floor with gray floorenamel. In each case use the paint manufacturer's recommendations and directionsfor the preparation and application of their product.

13. Elevators shall have telephones with hand-free operation containing anintegral automatic tone dialer. Telephones shall be field programmable withoutthe need for special tools or programmers and comply with the latest ADAguidelines. Reference Division 16, Telecommunications Systems, Products, Item Tfor acceptable manufacturers.

14. The Elevator car lighting disconnect shall be fed from the emergencylighting panel.

15. All elevator related electrical disconnects shall be marked with the panel#, the circuit #, and the room # or location of the circuit breaker from whichit is fed.

16. All elevator pits that are below grade shall be fitted with a sump and afunctioning sump pump system to remove ground water to the storm drain system.

B. Shafts

All elevator shafts and pits that are below grade shall be sealed andwaterproofed with an effective barrier system on the exterior walls and belowthe pit floor.

C. Hydraulic Elevators

1. Hydraulic elevators shall have a scavenger pump or an oil separator toprevent oil from being pumped into the storm sewer system and to prevent waterfrom being pumped into the oil reservoir.

2. The Hydraulic jack shall be of double wall construction and shall beencased in a schedule 40 pvc jacket with waterproof seal at the pit floor andwaterproof, high pressure seal at the bottom.

3. Underground hydraulic piping shall be avoided if in any way possible. Ifit is unavoidable, the piping be shall coated and wrapped to prevent corrosionand encased in schedule 40 pvc piping.

4. Install back draft dampers in all elevator shaft vents with access to thedampers.


5. Provide hoistway access escutcheons or devices on all hoistway doorswithout regard to the number of elevators in the group.

D. Roller Guides

1. All elevators shall be equipped with constant contact roller guides on thetop and the bottom of the car frame.

2. Elevators with rated loads of 4000 lbs. or less shall have 3 point rollerguides ( 3 rollers per guide ) and elevators with rated loads above 4000 lbs.shall have 6 point roller guides ( 6 rollers per guide).

3. All car and hoistway door sills shall be constructed of nickel silver.Aluminum sills either cast or extruded are too soft and are not acceptable.

E. Cabs

1. Passenger elevator cab interior lighting shall be a minimum of two energyefficient florescent lamps controlled by energy efficient electronic ballasts.The lighting system shall consist of 1-1/2" stainless steel tee's and 1-1/2"stainless steel ell's permanently welded into a solid framework grid. Thelighting grid shall be suspended from the ceiling of the cab at a height of no

less than 90 inches from the floor to the bottom of the grid. The ceiling gridshall support milk white lighting diffusers of no greater than 2 ft. x 2 ft. insize and shall be designed to align with the top emergency exit. Exposedsurfaces of the grid shall be ground and polished to a # 4 satin finish.

2. Freight elevator cab interior lighting shall be a minimum of two energyefficient fluorescent lamps controlled by energy efficient electronic ballasts.the lighting fixtures shall be flush mounted to the ceiling of the cab withappropriate dress rings or molding to provide a neat appearance. The lamps andballasts shall be removable from the interior of the cab.

3. Freight elevators shall be equipped with power operated hoistway doorsand car doors or gates and shall satisfy the requirements of ANSI/ASME A17.1rule 207.4.


4. Position indicators shall be provided inside the cab and at all landingsor levels that lead directly to a building exit. The position indicator shallcontain 2 inch high 16 segment red LED's on a black background, covered by adeep red acrylic lens. The position indicator shall also have up and down arrowsincluded in the display to indicate the direction of travel.

5. Elevator car doors shall be equipped with full length, infrared, curtaintype sensing units in lieu of safety edges and photo ray devices.

F. Maintenance/Operating Manuals

1. Complete wiring and single line diagrams showing the electricalconnections, functions, components, and sequence of operation of all apparatusconnected with the elevator system shall be provided in triplicate prior toinitialization of work.

2. Three complete sets of neatly bound operating and maintenance instructionsshall be furnished specifically for elevator installations. The maintenanceinstructions shall include detailed information, with sufficient illustrationsto prevent misinterpretation. The maintenance instructions shall includecomplete detailed data sufficient to adequately service the entire system,troubleshoot, repair, and order replacement parts. Each manual shall alsocontain a copy of the instructions and programs required to install, set-up,and adjust the elevator system or any part of the system, including passwords ofall levels.

END

15. AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL

A. Provide a stand-alone direct control system for space conditioningcontrols in campus buildings connected to the central campus CCMS system. Atoff-campus locations and remote on-campus locations, building controls shallinclude a means for night, week-end and holiday set-back.

B. If design of A/C permits, all air conditioning chilled coils shall beprovided with two-way control valves and variable speed pumping via controlledfrequency drive technologies.

C. Under floor crawl spaces shall be ventilated; utilizing stand alonebuilding exhaust air (used conditioned air supply) specifically for thispurpose.

D. Fire dampers shall be installed in accordance with the state building firecode.

E. Smoke detectors shall be installed in air handling units in accordancewith the National Fire Codes.

F. Duct sizes shown on plans shall be clear inside dimensions. A note on thedrawings shall be specific that the size shown is not the metal size if the ductis internally insulated. Ductwork shall be externally lined. Sound attenuationdevices should be used to reduce air flow noises. Ductwork shall be sized toprovide for low pressure to medium pressure design applications only. Increasedsize system designs shall incorporate larger duct systems, lower air velocities.The use of high pressure duct design is not acceptable. Transformer vaultsshall have adequate heat removal facilities. The use of air conditioned air ispreferred with equalled positive exhaust air system.

G. Room names and numbers shall appear on mechanical floor plans using UMCPstandards.

H. Floor plans for mechanical systems shall be drawn to show pipes, ducts,etc. on the floor in which they are installed. In general, underfloor plansshall be drawn to show all piping underfloor and, from there up, the systemsbetween each floor slab shall be shown only on the appropriate floor plan.

I. Environmental rooms shall be specified in the mechanical section of thespecifications, included on the mechanical drawings, and engineered by aRegistered Professional Engineer.

15. AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL

J. All equipment shall be designed and located for ease of maintenance,noting that roof mounted equipment should be avoided.

K. The specifications shall include the requirement that the contractor shallengage and pay an independent contractor certified by NEBB or AABC to performthe balancing, testing, and adjusting of HVAC systems and fume hoods and cleanrooms. NEBB or AABC procedural standards shall be utilized.

L. Compliance to ASHRAE 62-89 standard "ventilation for acceptable indoor airquality" is required.

M. Design applications utilizing the following shall be avoided:

1. Unit ventilators with outside air connectors,

2. Constant volume reheat for office applications.

END

15. BUILDING SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT ACCESSIBILITY

A. Equipment located above a finished ceiling shall have adequate ceilingaccess for maintenance and removal, including removal of coils.

B. All electrical distribution equipment shall have access as specified inthe latest edition of the NEC for the front and all sides that have accesspanels. Contact the Department of Physical Plant if clarification and/oradditional accessibility information is needed.

END

15. FLOW DIAGRAMS

A. A basic single line flow diagram in riser format indicating majorcomponents for pressurizing circulating water systems and air systems shall beprovided with the Design Development submission (DDS), unless otherwise noted inthe DDS.

B. The flow diagrams shall be included in the Construction Drawing documentsand shall include all line sizes, in-line devices (valves, strainers, controlvalves, thermometers, pressure gauges, flow measuring devices), and flowquantities for headers and branch lines.

C. All system flow diagrams shall be reviewed by Plant Engineering/Department of Physical Plant.

END

15. HVAC

A. Types of air conditioning systems shall be as determined to be the mosteconomical energy saving system for the particular application.

B. Chiller plants at capacities less than 100 air conditioning tons shall beof the reciprocating package design. Applications greater that 100 tons shallbe of the centrifugal chiller or rotary screw application.

In all cases the chiller equipment shall provide for the following minimumrequirements:

1. Environmental compatibility with regards to ozone depletion and globalwarming potentials.

2. Chiller plant control panels shall be microprocessor based in theircontrol strategy.

3. Mechanical room ventilation in accordance with ASHRAE-15-94.

4. Refrigerant monitoring with interface to CCMS as specified in ASHRAE 15-94.

5. Panels shall annunciate system temperatures in fahrenheit and parametersin english units with equivalent metric units.

6. Start-up/shut-down sequences shall be performed through chiller controlpanels. Integration of valve openings/closings, pump starts/stops, coolingtower fan starts/stops shall be performed by the chiller plant.

7. Where feasible, "free cooling and ice storage" concepts shall be utilized.

C. Where practical, applications shall utilize modulating two-way controlvalves. In such applications, electronic variable speed drives shall supply thecooling/heating medium to the coils. The variable drives shall operate tomaintain system working pressure.

D. Facility HVAC designs shall employ four pipe cooling and heating systems.

15. HVAC

E. Air side distribution designs shall be based upon a life cycle analysis.Air side distribution designs shall review various applications with long termstudies determining the most energy conservative design for each application.It should be noted however, that operational and maintenance integrity shouldalso be reviewed in the selection of the design.

F. Air side designs preferred are variable air volume or constant volumesingle duct systems. Over cooling conditions shall be overcome withsupplemental electric or hot water individual zone heating.

G. Applications which employ variable volume delivery shall utilizeelectronic variable speed control on fan drives to maintain duct staticpressure, where applicable.

H. Air moving equipment shall be selected to operate in the low static tomedium static pressure applications. High pressure applications shall not beused.

I. Steam shall not be used for direct heating of air except in 100% outsideair heating units.

END

15. MECHANICAL DESIGN CONDITIONS

A. The following information should be clearly shown on the GeneralInformation Drawing. Additions and deletions may be required if package unitequipment is incorporated in the design of facilities.

1. Mechanical:Summer Outside 95 F.( F.D.B.) (78 FWB)Summer Inside 74 F.( F.D.B.) (50% R.H.)Winter Outside 0 F.( F.D.B.)Winter Inside 70 F.( F.D.B.)

Total Cooling Capacity Avail. (Tons)Total Cooling Max. Demand Load (Tons)Total Heating Capacity (BTUH)Total Heating Max. Demand (BTUH)Outside Fresh Air Required:Winter (cfm)Summer (cfm)Domestic Hot Water, Capacity Available (gph)Domestic Hot Water Max. Demand Load (gpm)Steam, Capacity Available (#/hr.)Steam Max. Demand Load (#/hr.)Fixtures (Plumbing) (Fixture units)Sanitary Sewer (gpd)Gas, natural, demand load (max.) (cfh)

B. Determine the economic feasibility of incorporating solar energy thermalice storage and variable frequency technologies for space heating, cooling, andwater heating into the building design and proposed energy systems. This isrequired if included in the scope of work set forth in the project program.Economic feasibility for each function shall be determined by comparing theestimated cost of energy procurement using conventional sources and theestimated cost of using energy saving technologies during the economic life ofthe proposed building. Assumptions about future energy costs shall be listed.

C. Initial design documentation supportive data, load calculations, and asummary of the system proposed shall be provided.

D. Mechanical system designs shall include all of the following: ladderdiagrams, control logic diagrams, system schematics, points lists, and componentdescriptions.

E. All mechanical drawings shall be completed on 1/4" (or larger) scaledrawings. This shall include all rooms with large quantities of mechanical,plumbing, or electrical equipment or piping; including mechanical and electricalrooms, restrooms, kitchens, etc.

END15. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ROOM REQUIREMENTS (5.1.96)

A. Mechanical rooms shall be designed with maintenance requirements in mind.Equipment must be fully accessible to allow for proper servicing, includingadequate space to disassemble all pumps, motors and chillers. Provide accessfor all required trap primers.

B. Mechanical rooms should be located at grade level. Should a mechanicalroom be located below grade, a vehicular ramp and a 6'-0" clear width (two,three foot wide doors) shall be provided to facilitate equipment replacement.Roof mounted equipment is to be avoided. If, however, roof mounted equipment isspecified, provide exterior roof walkways to allow servicing of equipmentaccessible through standard door ways with permanent stairs or built-in ladders.

C. Air conditioning condensate lines should connect to roof drains whenpossible. Dumping of water on roofs should be avoided.

D. Provide at least one (1) floor drain for every 144 square foot in eachequipment room. Locate drains away from walking areas, but not beneathequipment. Slope floor to drain and connect drain to sanitary sewer system.

E. Provide adequate clearance and access for building systems installedbetween ceiling and structure above.

F. Provide positive ventilation and exhaust in all equipment rooms that arenot return air plenums in accordance with most recent edition of ASHRAEMechanical Room Ventilation Guidelines.

G. Equipment rooms with equipment other than those items directly related toair handling equipment will not be used for air plenums. The use of rooms asplenums is not acceptable.

H. Each component of an air handling system shall be spaced so there is ampleroom on all sides for inspection and maintenance (filter removal, bearingreplacement, coil replacement, cleaning, etc.) and man sized hinged access doorsshall be provided for ready access to the spaces in the air handling equipment.

I. Suspended air handlers shall be provided with permanent platforms formaintenance including appropriate access to platforms where required.

J. Walls of equipment rooms, when located on occupied floors, shall be soundproof and return air passages shall utilize sound attenuation boxes.

END15. MECHANICAL LIFE CYCLE COST ANALYSIS

As part of the Mechanical Systems selection, a computerized life cycle costanalysis is required and shall be used and submitted to the University. Thisanalysis is to show the cost benefit of the systems selected by having comparedthree alternative mechanical systems pre-approved by the design project manager.Incorporate a comprehensive lighting systems analysis for participating in thePEPCO rebate program. This comprehensive system/Energy/Life Cycle Analysis willbe used in systems selections. ASHRAE approved or based programs such as TraneTracer, York Yes III, Carrier OP Cost, DOE II, Trakload, or approved equal shallbe used.

END

15. MECHANICAL PIPING AND SPECIALTIES (5.1.96)

A. Gas lines shall be of all welded black steel construction inside of thebuilding, connected to emergency shut-off valves. Valves are to be clearlylabelled. Gas lines from valve to lab table or appliances may be screwed blacksteel with screw type fittings for 3/4" and smaller. All building gas pipingmust be labeled (below ceiling).

B. Chilled water and heating water valves in underground systems shall haveas an enclosure a concrete valve box with sufficient space to maintain andoperate valves.

C. Piping shall not be:

1. Buried beneath the lowest floor level except for soil pipe.2. Run in concrete floors.

If pressure piping placement under slab is unavoidable then the piping must berun in a steel pipe sleeve so leakage can be channeled off.

D. Direct burial of steam piping is not acceptable. Concrete or metal ductshall be provided.

E. Early in the design phase verify with Plant Engineering staff, Departmentof Physical Plant, regarding the location of main mechanical/electrical serviceentry equipment rooms in order to minimize utility extensions from the centralutility distribution system and to perform an adequacy evaluation concerning aparticular utility or utilities.

F. Valves

1. All central valves shall be listed in a schedule on the drawing showingidentification number, body size, port size, if applicable, whether normallyopen or closed, spring range, and CV.2. All service valves, 4" or greater, shall be OSY gate.3. All valves installed at heights greater than six feet shall have chainactivators provided.4. Butterfly valves shall be used only for automatic isolation, temperaturecontrol, and automation functions. Use Globe, Angle and "Y" valves forthrottling services. Gate valves are not acceptable.5. All valves in copper piping systems 2-1/2" or smaller shall be ball,single piece type unless otherwised noted.

END15. PIPING SYSTEMS (10.15.96)

A. COLOR SCHEDULE

STENCILLED SYSTEM NAME NOMENCLATURE COLORS _______________________________________________________

1. Chilled Water Primary - Supply PCHWS Imperial Blue 34 Return PCHWR Imperial Blue 34

Secondary - Supply SCHWS Blue Tint #9637 Return SCHWR Blue Tint #9637

2. Dual Temperature Water Supply DTWS Safety Green Return DTWR Safety Green

3. Utility Hot Water Heating Supply HWS Accent Yellow Return HWR Accent Yellow

4. Steam - High Pressure HPS Aluminum Intermediate Pressure IPS Aluminum Low Pressure LPS Aluminum

5. Steam Condensate High Pressure CHP Safety Orange Intermediate Pressure CIP Safety Orange Low Pressure CLP Safety Orange

6. Condenser Water Supply CWS ANSI Safety Gray Return CWR ANSI Safety Gray

7. Domestic (Potable) Water

Cold DWS Spring Green #9728 Hot (w/Dark Green Band) DWH Spring Green #9728

8. Fire Protection --- Red #9903

9. Fuel Oil FO Safety Black

10. Gas GAS Safety Yellow

11. Vacuum V Platform Gray #9453

12. Compressed Air CA Light Gray #9454

15. PIPING SYSTEMS (10.15.96)

STENCILLED SYSTEM NAME NOMENCLATURE COLORS _______________________________________________________

13. Drain --- Traffic Signal Green #9722

14. Hazardous Waste --- OSHA Safety Purple

NOTE: The above colors are based upon Duron "Dura Clad" (Alkyd Gloss EnamelModified With Urethane) Industrial Maintenance Finishes.

END

15. PLUMBING SYSTEMS

A. Room names and final UMCP approved room numbers shall appear on allplumbing floor plans.

B. Plumbing systems shall be presented as separate drawings.

C. Where piping systems are to be installed below floor level, these shall beshown on the floor plan for the level below and not on the plan prepared for thespace above.

D. HVAC and plumbing system valves less than 2-1/2" shall be ball type, andgreater than 2-1/2" shall be OSY.

E. Color code all piping valves and fixtures in accordance with the UMCP DPPcolor schedule.

F. Provide flexible copper tubing with removable key cut-off valves at alllavatories and sinks.

END

15. PUMPS

A. Acceptable pump manufacturers include: Bell and Gossett, TACO, Ingersoll-Rand, or Allis Chalmers.

B. In-line pumps are not to be used except for small fractional horsepowercirculators.

C. Mechanical pumps shall be of the base mounted end suction design.

D. Pumps shall be capable of being serviced without disturbing pipingconnections or motors.

E. Pump motors shall not exceed 1750 RPM.

F. Impellers shall be selected to be no more than 5% below the point ofmaximum efficiency. Impellers shall be selected at no more than 85% of volutediameter.

G. Pump motor horsepower shall be selected with a service factor of no lessthan 15% greater than the motor rating.

H. Vibration isolation shall be provided for each pump.

I. Hot water pumps shall utilize seals capable of operating at 250 degrees F.

END

15. SATELLITE CENTRAL UTILITY BUILDING (SCUB)

The University of Maryland has utilized a design concept of retrofittingthe campus infrastructure of primary/secondary distribution through the use ofSatellite Central Utility Buildings. Specifically, chilled water production,and primary distribution involves constant volume, hydronic pumping throughchillers installed in a closed loop within a mechanical facility. From thisclosed loop, a variable pumping secondary loop is utilized. The secondarydistribution loop supplies chilled water to the various buildings served by theloop. Within the SCUB there shall be a cross-over pipe. The crossover pipeshall be short in length and shall be installed at the end of the primary loop,between the supply and return secondary distribution loop. It's purpose is toallow for balanced hydronic distribution and production circuits. Shouldhydronic production exceed hydronic distribution to the secondary loop, excesspumping water will bypass and recirculate within the SCUB primary loop.However, should distribution exceed production then a reverse flow will takeplace in the crossover pipes, and return water will be bypassed through thecrossover pipe into the secondary distribution to maintain a balance flow athydronic pumping stations. The University is utilizing a concept within theprimary/secondary distribution of variable flow constant temperature drop. Thisvariable secondary flow shall be modulated via controlled frequency drivetechnology at the hydronic pumping stations of the secondary loop. Carrying theflow requires a constant temperature in order to maintain a desired BTU transferrate (BTUH = Temperature difference x flow).

A. Conceptually, for design of various SCUB's, a supply water temperature of42? F has been chosen to be the standard use for the University's system. It isdesirable for return water to be at a 12? f higher than the supply temperature.The SCUB's design philosophy chosen has been of a constant temperature splitwith a variable flow rate (BTUH = Temperature split x flow).

B. Once distributed along the secondary distribution piping, chilled watershall be distributed through heat exchangers (plate & frame type) in thebuildings. The purpose of the plate & frame heat exchangers is to decouple thesecondary distribution from the various buildings served by the SCUB.Decoupling buildings is the chosen method of heat transfer from the secondarydistribution loop to the buildings. Deviation from the decoupling concept shallonly occur after extensive study into the maintenance feasibility of the systemhas been discussed in its entirety with the Department of Physical Plant, and analternate design concept accepted by all parties involved.


C. Control of the variable speed pump in the secondary distribution shall beaccomplished via differential pressure measurement. It is desirable to have thedifferential pressure transmitter sensor installed at least two-thirds down thepipe, run loop supply and return.

D. The SCUB heating concept shall also be one of primary/secondarydistribution. There shall be a primary heat exchanger in the SCUB system thatshall utilize steam supply from the University of Maryland, Department ofPhysical Plant - Steam Plant. Steam shall be converted to hot water through ashell and tube heat exchanger. The hot water shall circulate through a primaryloop within the SCUB facility. The primary hot water temperature shall besupplied at a temperature a 200?F, at peak design. The secondary distributionsystem shall vary secondary (heating water) to the various buildings on theloop. Heat transfer shall take place between a water to water shell and tubeheat exchanger within each individual building. Buildings shall utilize a 50?temperature difference. The primary heat control shall have the capability toreset hot water temperature based on outside air temperature or to manually loadthe reset control to vary the supply water temperature. Additionally, eachbuilding shall offer hot water reset based upon the outdoor air temperaturesensed.

E. Secondary distribution loops shall terminate in the buildings with acontrol sequence that enables a hot water system to fail in the full heat mode,thereby avoiding any possibility of freeze-up conditions within the building inthe event of control failures. The chilled water system control shall failconverters to the bypass condition around the heat exchangers, again to providea "fail to heat mode of operation".

F. If required as part of the scope of work as set forth in the projectprogram, central emergency power shall be evaluated during design for service toeach building served by the SCUB. The design shall present cost comparison fornatural gas and fuel oil fired prime movers. Any fuel storage shall be aboveground as an integral part of generator assembly.


G. Architectural screening shall be incorporated and sound abatement measuresshall be maximized through placement of unit.

H. Distribution system shall enter each building at the electrical servicedisconnecting means. Any building that does not presently have emergencygeneration, shall include a transfer scheme to existing emergency panels.

END

16. ELECTRICAL GENERAL (2.15.97)

Any discrepancies found within this section of the DCFS should be brought to theattentant of the Assistant Director, Plant Engineering, Department of PhysicalPlant, for clarification/resolution .

END

16. ELECTRICAL BUILDING MODIFICATIONS (10.15.96)

Refer to the "Electrical Design Services Manual" for the design criteria,specifications, and standard details for the electrical work pertinant to thissection.

END

16. ELECTRICAL DESIGN CONDITIONS

The following information should be clearly shown on the General InformationDrawing. Additions and deletions may be required if package unit equipment isincorporated in the design of facilities.

A. Electrical

PrimarySecondaryLoads:LightingDevices

MechanicalTotal Peake DemandTotal Connected Load

Emergency Power

B. Determine the economic feasibility of incorporating solar energy thermalice storage, and variable frequency technologies for space heating, cooling, andwater heating into the building design and proposed energy systems. This isrequired if included in the scope of work set forth in the project program.

Economic feasibility for each function shall be determined by comparing theestimated cost of energy procurement using conventional sources and theestimated cost of using energy saving technologies during the economic life ofthe proposed building. Assumptions about future energy costs shall be listed.

C. Initial design documentation supportive data, load calculations, and asummary of the system proposed.

D. All electrical drawings shall be completed on 1/4" (or larger) scaledrawings. This shall include all rooms with large quantities of mechanical,plumbing, or electrical equipment or piping; including mechanical and electricalrooms, restrooms, kitchens, etc.

END

16. ELECTRICAL DESIGN AND DOCUMENTATION

A. All service entry equipment shall be UL listed for such application andAIC rating shall be required for each component of the equipment. Seriesratings for fault capabilities is not acceptable.

B. Calculations shall include, but not be limited to, fault current, overcurrent coordination, KVA by switchboard, KVA by panel, KVA of lighting, KVA ofreceptacles, voltage drop at feeder/panel during motor start, lightingillumination levels, power factor, peake demand, and diversity factor.

C. Electrical schedules shall include the following information: schedulename, location, mounting, main device, bussing, interrupting capacity(integrated rating), voltage, phase, connected lighting load, connected powerload, connected receptacle load, and expected demand. Each circuit shallinclude the following: circuit number, description of load served, wire size,connected load, and circuit breaker size.

D. All power, lighting, and distribution panels, switchgear, MCG'stransformers, and switches (disconnect and transfer) shall be labeled with roomnumber, circuit number, and panel or device number for the power source feedingthe device.

E. All medium voltage manholes shall be drawn in a fold-down detail.

F. Typical drawings are to be shown in the Appendix.

G. Electrical power and lighting plans shall be drawn on separate drawings.

H. Performance data for electrical equipment shall be shown on the drawings.This data may also be included in the specification but shall be carefullyedited for conflicts.

I. Panel schedules and switchboard schedules shall be designed in accordancewith Department of Architecture, Engineering, and Construction's direction.

J. All switchboard and panel board legend information shall be typed andshall include room numbers for locations of loads being served, as well as CB#and panel where device receives power.

16. ELECTRICAL DESIGN AND DOCUMENTATION

K. For a design-build contract all calculations shall be received by the 50%CD submission.

L. Labeling nomenclature shall be in accordance with Plant Engineering,Department of Physical Plant's requirements.

M. Campus color codes for communication, fire, power, and CCMS use shall beapplied as set forth below.

SYSTEM NAME COLOR____________________________________________________

CCMS GreenCommunications BlueFire Alarm RedSecurity YellowREES White

N. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be supplied with each major pieceof equipment. Wiring diagrams, spare parts lists and vendor contact numbersshall be supplied as part of these submittals. Fire alarm O&M manuals shallprovide a riser, wiring and annunciator diagram.

END

16. ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION (5.1.96)

A. Building electrical service shall be supplied via campus 13,200 voltdistribution system. All primary connections are loop configured and will applyS&C low profile outdoor switchgear.

B. All electrical distribution configuration shall provide the highest levelof segregation when program documents identify distinct tenant spaceallocations. Opportunity for utility sub-metering shall be considered forfacilities having auxiliary occupants.

C. Service entry disconnecting means shall be one or more circuit breakersfor services of 400 amps or less. For services greater than 400 amps a singlemain breaker shall be applied. Fused disconnects are not acceptable.

D. The raceway between service entry equipment and transformer secondary orgenerator shall include provision of 50% spares.

E. All outdoor enclosures shall be NEMA 4 and accessible from all sides.

F. Transformers shall be outdoor, oil-filled units with primary fusing viathe S&C switchgear.

G. All duct bank incorporated in the primary loop distribution shall include,as a minimum, 100% spare raceways.

H. All cables located in manholes shall be labelled indicating originationand destination locations. Contact the Department of Physical Plant for exactnomenclature.

I. The secondary side of transformer shall include provision for 100% sparebreakers for conduit serving the service entry equipment within the building.

END

16. ELECTRICAL LIFE CYCLE COST ANALYSIS

As part of the Electrical Systems selection, a computerized life cycle costanalysis is required and shall be used and submitted tot he University. Thisanalysis is to show the cost benefit of the systems selected by having comparedthree alternative mechanical systems pre-approved by the design project manager.Incorporate a comprehensive lighting systems analysis for participating in thePEPCO rebate program. This comprehensive system/Energy/Life Cycle Analysis willbe used in systems selections. ASHRAE approved or based programs such as TraneTracer, York Yes III, Carrier OP Cost, DOE II, Trakload, or approved equal shallbe used.

END16. ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS

A. Wall mounted electric water coolers shall be specified in accordance withcurrent code requirements, including ADA.

B. Surfaces adjacent to water coolers shall be made of water resistantmaterials.

END

16. EMERGENCY GENERATORS (8.1.96)

A. Emergency power for the following systems is required:

1. Fire Alarm2. Security3. Emergency Lighting4. Telephone Service5. CCMS6. Other systems as may be needed/identified by the University.

Where applicable, new loads shall be connected to existing generators tomaximize the use of existing equipment.

B. Fuel to power the generator shall be selected on the basis of cost andavailability with a preference for natural gas followed by fuel oil and propanegas.

C. Acceptable locations for Emergency Generators:

1. SCUB2. Basement or ground floor of building,3. A weather protected enclosure meeting noise abatement standards adjacentto building.

No other locations are acceptable.

D. Generator exhaust shall not be discharged in a fashion to cause it toenter any building's air handling system or into pedestrian walkways.

E. Generator rooms must be large enough to enable repairs. Access doors mustbe large enough to permit removal and replacement of the generator withouthaving to dismantle the generator in any way.

F. The generator shall be run for several hours while the building is in useand occupied; therefore, the generator must be properly exhausted and sound-proofed so as not to interfere with the building's usage.

G. Overhead lighting, on an emergency circuit, is required in the generatorroom or within the weather protected enclosure while the generator isoperational.

END

16. EMERGENCY POWER (5.1.96)

A three phase, 60 Hertz emergency power generator shall be provided foremergency telephone service, fire alarm system, security systems, egress andemergency (life safety) lighting in all corridors, vestibules and stairwells,the CCMS, any critical laboratory equipment, as well as for mechanical equipmentwhich could cause catastrophic losses if power was interrupted (i.e. sump pumps,pipe heaters, etc.) and for all other spaces as designated in the FacilityProgram. Emergency lighting shall also be provided in major mechanical andelectrical spaces to permit emergency equipment inspection and in occupiedspaces as required (especially windowless spaces such as restrooms) to permitsafe evacuation of the building. Voltage output and control of emergencygenerator shall be determined by the Consultant. Fuel to power the generatordrive shall be selected on the basis of cost and availability with a preferencefor natural gas followed by fuel oil and propane gas. Provide connections fromAutomatic Transfer System (ATS) to CCMS, to monitor generator's status (on/off).

END

16. ENERGY AND ENERGY ANALYSIS (11.15.96)

A. Energy

The University regards the reduction of energy consumption as an importantobjective in all University facilities.

To comply with the requirements of this manual, the design shall meet theEnergy Performance Index, using the procedures detailed in the University Manualin order to demonstrate that the design meets the energy performance criteria.

To be fully cost effective, energy conservation measures must be given early andcareful consideration during the design phase of a new construction project. Toensure that energy conservation is given priority status, an independent EnergyAnalyst shall be utilized. The role of this Energy Analyst shall be to:

1. Review and coordinate all disciplines within the design team to achievethe most optimal energy efficient design;

2. Review architectural, mechanical, and lighting submissions for compliancewith energy guidelines developed by the University, prior to submission to theUniversity;

3. Perform energy and life cycle analysis, to influence the building designto minimize future energy expenditures, and to achieve the University's desiredenergy budget;

4. Attend early design meetings to address building site, orientation, andshape as factors in energy consumption;

5. Calculate the projected energy cost of various design alternatives, asrequested by the University;

6. Prepare required energy reports and certificates to obtain PEPCO rebatesand for other purposes.


In addition, the University intends to take advantage of PEPCO's New BuildingDesign Program whenever it is cost effective to do so. Accordingly, a designstudy or building simulation based upon the requirements of the PEPCO NewBuilding Design Program, Option 1, Comprehensive Incentive Plan shall beprovided. A list of the conservation technologies to be included in the studyare to be submitted to the University during the initial stages of the study.Various energy conservation equipment and building components shall be

considered in the study, and these considerations shall be available to theUniversity for reviews. All the required information shall be submitted toPEPCO including application forms. Besides the information which PEPCOrequires, the study shall provide life cycle costing, to include costcomparisons between standard equipment and building components and thoserecommended, energy and PEPCO incentive savings, and simple payback.

In designing for energy conservation, the entire facility shall be considered,its site and prevailing climatic conditions. Interactions among these elementsas well as the facility's energy using systems must be taken into account.Design elements and sub-systems must be analyzed to arrive at the mostappropriate mix of energy conservation measures.

B. Energy Analysis

Any building includes a diverse collection of spaces and functions with varyingenvironmental requirements. Therefore, a system that is both efficient andfunctionally responsive shall be developed. This includes conducting acomprehensive Energy Study of the building and a cost/benefit analysis ofavailable energy saving alternatives. The following considerations have beenspecifically designated for evaluation. Other such considerations shall beinvestigated which affect the quality of the building environment and the costof operating its system.

1. Design variations in the fenestration, thermal resistance for the exteriorsurfaces, and building geometries which take advantage of passive energyconservation systems.

2. Systems selection contingent on life cycle cost and compatibility withbuilding needs. A minimum of three different systems are to be analyzed.


3. Instrumentation of the building so that the building automatic centralcontrol systems will monitor and control the various components.

4. Functional zoning of the building by use and exposure.

At the Design Development submittal stage, provide a formal written analysis toinclude, but not limited to:

1. Single line, conceptualized schematic system drawings on floor plans. AllHVAC duct work shall be drawn double line in plan view regardless of scale.

2. Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning block and zone loadcalculations.

3. Economic cost/benefit study of the system chosen and compared toalternatives chosen.

4. A computer energy analysis of the building system's energy consumption,operation, and maintainability over a period of not less than five years tocompare life cycle costs for the various HVAC systems. It is desired to obtain

from this analysis the projected cost of operation by varying hours of use andoccupancy in the computer program. One of the following shall be used:

DOE - 2 Computer ProgramOrder: National Technical Information5285 Port Royal RoadSpringfield, VA 22161

Info: 1. Lawrence Berkley LabUniversity of Calif.Berkley, CA 94720(415) 486-5711

2. TRACE Computer Program12320 Parklawn DriveRockville, MD 20852(301) 984-2400

3. E20-II Computer ProgramBox 4808Carrier ParkwaySyracuse, N.Y. 13221(315) 432-6000

END16. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM (11.15.96)

The following equipment shall be included as part of a comprehensive system forfire protection in accordance with NFPA 101, Life Safety Code and approved byDAEC.

A. A complete multiplex fire alarm system with a control panel located in adesignated fire protection services room, or as specified.

B. A textually graphic annunciator in the main lobby areas and otherlocations as designated.

C. Standard fire alarm signals, claxon horns and flashing lights locatedthroughout the building.

D. The connection of the system with the Central Control and MonitoringSystem.

E. The use of smoke detectors, magnetic door releases, manual pull stations,and HVAC controls where appropriate, and as required.

F. A complete automatic sprinkler system throughout the building with maincontrols in a designated fire protection services room.

G. A complete standpipe system (combined with the sprinkler system) for firedepartment use in areas of the building with three or more stories and asdirected.

H. Fire extinguisher cabinets.

The entire system and all equipment is to be designed and/or specified inaccordance with the latest addition of all applicable codes and standards.

In cases in which sensitive electronic equipment is to be located within thefacility, it will be necessary to design a fire detection system capable ofinterrupting the power supply to the equipment. Halon or carbon dioxide typesuppression systems shall not be specified.

Coordination with the Department of Physical Plant, through DAEC to insureconformity of all new fire protection equipment is required.

END

16. LIGHTNING PROTECTION (9.15.96)

Lightning Protection should be evaluated in accordance with NFPA 78. Buildingsin the "moderate to severe" category of exposure and higher should be equippedwith a UL listed lightning protection system. The system should be carefullydesigned to ensure that static discharges are provided with an adequate path toground. Surge arresters on the main electrical service should also beconsidered.

END

16. LUMINAIRES (5.1.96)

A. Exterior

1. Outside street and walkway lighting shall incorporate the Guardco campusstandard fixture or approved equal with metal halide lamping. Existing campuspoles shall be Corten weathering steel with tapered square construction. Ifunavailable, acceptable pole substitutes include, baked enamel on aluminum orfiber glass with a finish (color) to match existing poles. This determinationrequires prior approval of DPP on a project-by-project basis. Parking lot andwalkway coverage shall be documented by vendor produced lighting submission aspart of design package.

2. Control of parking or walkway lighting served from any building shall beenabled by a central contractor configuration with a central photoeye placed onrooftop operating in a parallel manner with time clock control.

3. Security lighting shall be supplied for building perimeter via wall packconstruction for a metal halide fixture. All light fixtures shall be centrallyswitched via a contractor on single photoeye control with time clock in paralleloperation.

B. Lighting equipment pertaining to code required illumination shall besupported by an emergency generator.

C. All mechanical and electrical rooms having disconnecting or air handlingequipment shall have 50% of connected lighting served by an emergency circuit.All lighting shall be switchable at entry to room.

D. Exit signs will be LED type (2 watts or less) with red letters on a whiteor metallic silver background. All fire and building code required lightingwill be supported via emergency generator. Battery back-up systems are notacceptable. Any application of battery back-up systems to accommodate codeegress or other concerns, will require written acceptance by the Department ofPhysical Plant. Battery pack exit signs are not acceptable.


E. All luminaires in general will be 2'x 4' lay-in, troffer type fluorescentconstruction. Low power ballasts, T-8 lamps, and tandem wiring to minimizenumber of ballasts shall be specified. The use of separately switched ballastsin three lamp design shall be limited to applications mandating specificswitched light levels that can only be achieved by this method.

1. Fluorescent Tube Ballasts for 4' long tubes shall conform to the followingrequirements using ANSI Standards:

1 Lamp

UL Listed Class PInput Watts 32Ballast Factor Greater than .77THD Less than 20%Sound Rating AMinimum Start Temperature 0 Degrees FBallast Type ElectronicInstant StartWarranty 5 Year - 100% replacement

2 Lamp


3 Lamp



4 Lamp


2. Design applications of 2'x 2' fluorescent fixtures that apply "U-Bent"lamps shall not be permitted.

3. Design applications of 8 foot fluorescent lamping shall not be permitted.Tandem 4 foot fixtures shall be utilized.

F. Corridors

1. Corridor lighting will be served via dedicated circuits with only hallwaylighting and one level associated with that circuit. Corridors may be served bya 2 lamp system with aluminum reflector or a 3 or 4 lamp with standard whitereflector. Black reflectors shall be prohibited.

2. Corridor lighting of clear alzak aluminum, semi-specular, reflectors in acompact fluorescent downlighting fixture is preferred.

G. Lamping

1. Lamping in any compact fluorescent shall include twin-tubes. Quad tubesare not acceptable. When lumen output is greater than that of a single twintube, double twin tube fixtures shall be specified.

2. Mercury vapor lamps are not acceptable.

3. Incandescent lamping is an unacceptable application. Any application ofincandescent lamping shall be approved by DPP based on program requirements ofthe user.

4. A compact fluorescent with a clear alzak aluminum, semi-specular reflectorusing a single or double twin tube is the appropriate application.


H. Recessed Lighting

1. Shall apply compact fluorescent lamping (twin tubes) whenever dimmingfunction is not required and illumination levels can be achieved.

2. Dimming applications shall incorporate 90 watt, incandescent halogen typelamps for general 150 PAR lamping applications.

For fluorescent applications, fluorescent dimming may be utilized, but each usewill be scrutinized, because of the high cost of dimming ballasts. Options tochange lighting levels via switching shall be reviewed.

3. Recessed applications involving heights greater than 12' ceilings with nodimming requirement, shall be metal halide for maximum burning and illuminationlevels.

I. Lenses

1. Lenses shall be either diffuser type or 3.5" louver type. Shallowparabolic will not be considered except in areas designated for general purposecomputer use where glare is being controlled.

2. Parabolic diffusers shall not be used in rest rooms, storage rooms,corridors, mechanical rooms and housekeeping closets. Acrylic diffusers areacceptable.

END

16. SECURITY EGRESS SYSTEM FOR INDIVIDUALS WITH DISABILITIES (5.1.96)

Currently, many facilities that have handicap door openers do not have theelectronic panic bar. The handicap door opener is activated by the handicapdoor switch. During the day the door is unlocked and the opener can operatewithout resistance. The door is locked at night. When the door is locked andthe latch prevents the door from opening. Therefore, when the handicap switchis pressed, the door does not open. This condition traps individuals withdisabilities in the building.

To alleviate this problem, the following design criteria has been established:

A. Install an electric panic bar on each door equipped with a handicap dooropener.

B. Interface the door opener with the electric panic bar.

Reference attached specifications (MPB-851 Mini Power Supply with delayedrelocking module and electric latch retraction) and drawings (No. 9510-3 and9510-4). In addition, reference Section 8., Finishes and Windows (Hardware) andSection 16., Electrical and (Security Guidelines).

16. SECURITY EGRESS SYSTEM FOR INDIVIDUALS WITH DISABILITIES(5.1.96)

16. SECURITY EGRESS SYSTEM FOR INDIVIDUALS WITH DISABILITIES(5.1.96)

END

16. SECURITY GUIDELINES (5.1.96)

A. All security measures and systems shall be coordinated through TheDepartment of Physical Plant, Loss Prevention Division (LPD) and incorporate thefollowing:

1. Doors

a. All entrances shall have an alarm/access control system connected to LPD'smain computer. Each door shall be equipped with either an alarm, a card reader,electric locking devices, and any other necessary equipment to operate thesystem. Access shall be controlled by a computer coded card. Designated doorscan be locked or unlocked from the main computer at LPD. (Also Reference Section16. Security Egress System for Individuals with Disabilities.)

b. All exterior doors to be provided with conduit and wiring for futureinstallation of automatic door operators and a card access system.

c. Pairs of exterior doors shall have removable mullions for improvedsecurity.

d. Any required second means of egress shall accommodate wheelchair users.

e. All exterior doors which are designated as "EXIT ONLY" shall be installedwithout hardware on the exterior.

f. Service and rear entry doors shall be as entry-proof as possible. Alldoors shall have hinge pins which are not exposed to public areas/exterior.

g. Garage, service, and rear entry doors are to be as entry-proof aspossible. They should be constructed of heavy-duty construction with lockingsystems which provide an appropriate degree of security.

2. Security Alarm System

a. Alarm system controls shall be by Moose Products; access control equipmentshall be by Northern Computers; other devices to be by approved vendors per LPD.

16. SECURITY GUIDELINES (5.1.96)

b. All security alarm equipment and access control system equipment shall beinstalled in an independent Security Closet. LPD shall provide exactrequirements for location and required electrical service.

3. Long corridors should be avoided.

4. Rest rooms and stairwells should not be separated from areas of highusage.

5. Different units within the facility shall be separately securable withoutinterfering with required egress routes from the building.

6. Ground floor windows are discouraged. If installed, ground windows shallbe constructed to prevent easy entry into the building.

Surface materials or windows which can be easily vandalized should be avoided.In the event other criteria dictates the requirement for operable windows,methods for securing these windows are to be provided. Methodology for securingoperable windows is to be coordinated with the DPP Office of Loss Prevention.

7. New or expanded stairwells and elevators must utilize public spaces foraccess and egress. Elevators or stairwells should not allow access directlyinto private office areas which would jeopardize security to the area.

B. All departmental and administrative offices should be equipped with heavyduty locksets with anti-friction latch bolts approved by the University DPP LockShop.

END

16700 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS (11.15.96)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCE REQUIREMENTS

A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, ProgramRequirements and Division 1, General Requirements, apply to the work of thisSection.

1.02 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Telecommunications service entrance.

B. Premises wiring system.

C. Broadband type cable video system.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01340 - Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.

B. Section 01720 - Product Record Documents.

C. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.

D. Section 09900 - Painting.

E. Section 16100 - Wiring Materials and Methods.

F. Section 16300 - Outside Power Transmission and Distribution.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI),"Telecommunications Distributions Methods Manual," 1995.

B. Electronic Industries Association/Telecommunications Industry Association(EIA/TIA)-568A, "Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standard".

C. EIA/TIA-569,"Commercial Building Standard for TelecommunicationsPathways and Spaces".

D. EIA/TIA-606, "Administration Standard for the TelecommunicationsInfrastructure of Commercial Buildings".


E. EIA/TIA-607, "Commercial Building Grounding/Bonding Requirements".

F. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) 70 - National Electrical Code(NEC), 1996.

G. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 802.3 CarrierSense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (Ethernet and 10BASE-T)

H. LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES./AT&T Systimax Premises Distribution System (PDS)Manual

I. Federal Communications Commission (FCC), Title 47, Code of FederalRegulations. Part 68


A. Contractor shall install work in accordance with the BISCI Methods Manual.

B. Contractor shall install work in accordance with the LUCENT TECHNOLOGIESINC./AT&T Systimax PDS Guidelines.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Before the installation of any wire or equipment, Contractor shall submitshop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01340, "ShopDrawings, Product Data and Samples" for University approval.

B. Contractor shall indicate installation details, cable routing of copper,fiber and coax, riser diagrams, outlet lan, BDF & IDF closet layouts, and systemconfiguration on all shop drawings.

C. Contractor shall submit all appropriate product data for each component.

D. Contractor shall submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

1.07 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Contractor shall submit record documents under provisions of Section01720. "Project Record Documents."


B. Contractor shall accurately record location of service entrance conduit,termination backboards, outlet boxes, messenger cable raceways and cable trays,pull boxes, and equipment boxes on 3.5-inch floppy diskettes using AutoCad 12.

C. Contractor shall document the cable plant and associated equipmentinstallation in accordance with Parts 3.19, 3.20, and 3.21 in this Section.

1.08 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installation of all inside wire, equipment, terminations and associatedservices shall be performed by Lucent Technologies Inc./AT&T or a company thatis currently a Lucent Technologies Inc./AT&T Authorized Systimax CertifiedPremise Distribution System Value Added Reseller. For a current list ofauthorized Lucent Technologies Inc./AT&T Contractors contact the Department ofCommunication and Business Services on 301-405-4441. Prior to the finalselection of the telecommunications sub-contractor, the main contractor shallsubmit it's choice for telecommunications sub-contractor for University'sapproval.

B. The company specializing in supplying the products specified in thisSection shall have a minimum of three (3) years experience distributing suchsupplies, and shall be duly authorized by the product manufacturer.

C. Installation of all outside cable plant, wire, equipment, terminations,splices, and associated services shall be performed solely by LucentTechnologies Inc.

1.09 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Contractor shall furnish warranty of products and workmanship for aminimum of two (2) years from date of acceptance by the University.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 TELEPHONE TERMINATION BACKBOARDS

A. The Contractor shall install 3/4-inch fire resistant plywood with Class Asurface in all communications rooms.

B. All termination backboards shall be installed on all walls of eachcommunications room.


C. Minimum backboard size shall be 4' x 8' unless otherwise approved by theUniversity.

2.02 STATION COPPER CABLE

A. All unshielded twisted pair (UTP) station copper cable supporting voicecommunications requirements, as well as Emergency, Courtesy and Pay Telephonesshall be LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T XX61 (where XX is either 10 or 20depending on insulation type), and shall meet Category 5 performancespecifications along with the following technical specification.:

Gauge: 24 AWGInsulation: PVC (1010) or ECTFE

(2061)Outside Diameter: 0.17 in (4.3 mm)Maximum DC Resistance: 28.6 Ohms/1000 ft.Nominal Mutual Capacitance: 14 nF/1000 ft @ 1 kHzAttenuation: 6.3 dB/1000 ft @ 1 MHzCharacteristic Impedance: 100 Ohms +/- 15% @ 1-25

MHz

B. All UTP station copper cable supporting data communications requirementsshall be LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T XX61(where XX is either 10 or 20depending on insulation type), and shall meet the following technicalspecifications:

Gauge: 24 AWGInsulation: PVC (1061) or Teflon

(2061)Outside Diameter: 0.17 in (4.3 mm)Maximum DC Resistance: 28.6 Ohms/1000 ftNominal Mutual Capacitance: 14 nF/1000 ft @ 1 kHzAttenuation: 6.3 dB/1000 ft @ 1 MHzCharacteristic Impedance: 100 Ohms +/- 15% @ 1-25

MHz

C. The cable sheath color for the UTP voice communications cabling specifiedin 2.02A above shall be different from the cable sheath color for the UTP datacommunications cabling specified in 2.02B above.

D. All copper cable and jumpers shall conform to the REA color guide meet NECarticle 725-38, 3 (B) 1, 2 and 3.


2.03 RISER COPPER CABLE

A. All UTP riser copper cable supporting voice and data communicationsrequirements shall be standard 24 gauge, paired dual, semi-rigid PVC skin overfoamed PE, LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T ARMM XXX- R6060 (where XXX is thenumber of pairs), and shall meet the following technical specifications:

Gauge: 24AWG, solid copper conductor, twisted pairDC Resistance: 25.5 Ohms/1000 ftMutual Capacitance: 16 mF/1000 ftCharacteristic Impedance: 100 Ohms +/-15% @ 1-16MHzAttenuation: 7.2 dB/1000 ft @ 1 Mhz; 32 dB/1000 ft @ 16MHz

2.04 UNDERGROUND COPPER CABLE

A. The underground copper cable supporting voice and data communicationsrequirements shall be 24 gauge, paired, dual-insulated with foam skin andplastic, flooded by FLEXGEL filling compound, LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&TGFMW, and shall meet the following technical specifications:

Gauge: 24 AWG, solid copperconductorDC Resistance: 27.3 Ohms/1000 ftMutual Capacitance: 15.7 nF/ft @ 1kHzCharacteristic Impedance: 100 OhmsAttenuation: 6.4 dB/1000 ft @ 1 MHz

2.05 CABLE PROTECTORS FOR COPPER CABLE

A. For all pairs, Contractor shall install three-element gas protectormodules, LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T 4B1-EW, containing silicon avalanche onboth ends (New facility and Patuxent Building).

B. Contractor shall supply and install 188-type Multipair Protector units,LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T 188B1, for all communications equipment andcircuits.


2.06 FIBER OPTIC CABLE

A. All fiber used shall be multimode type, LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&TACCUMAX (indoor applications) or LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T LIGHTPACK(outdoor applications) cable, and shall meet the following technicalspecifications.

Core Type: Graded IndexCore Diameter: 62.5 (+/- 6) micronsCore Eccentricity: 1.5% Nominal - 7.5% Max.Core Ovality:

4% Nominal- 20% Max.Cladding Diameter: 125 (+/-2) micronsCladding Non-Circularity: 2% Maximum

Coating Diameter: 245 (+9/-13) micronsRefracting Index Delta: 2.0% (+/- .3%)Numerical Aperture: 0.275Bandwidth Windows: Dual-850 nm & 1300 nmMaximum Attenuation: 3.4 dB/km @ 850 mm 1.0 dB/km @ 1300 mmMinimum Bandwidth: 160 Mhz/km @ 850 mm 500 Mhz/km @ 1300 mmMaximum Field Loss: 0.5 dB

B. All fiber cable used shall have the following physical characteristics:

Cable Core:Building interior: 900 micron O.D. color-coded PVC buffering surrounded byAramid yarn strength members.Building exterior: Loose tube, LXE Lightpack core filled with water-blocking compound surrounded by non-metallic strength members.

Cable Composition:Building Interior:station:(plenum) OFNP Flouropolymer jacket(non-plenum) OFNR PVC jacketriser: OFNR PVC jacketBuilding exterior: Non-metallic dielectric

Cable Strength: Maximum pulling tension-600 lb.


Minimum Bend Radii: (<30% max. pull tension) 10 times cablediameter(>30% max. pull tension) 20 times cable diameter

Fiber Identification: Color coding system adequate to unambiguouslyidentify each fiber. See paragraph 3.16 in this Section.2.07 SINGLEMODE FIBER OPTIC CABLE

A. Fiber used shall be singlemode type, LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T DNXGeneral Purp0se OSP Cable Lightpack Core, LXE-Nonmetallic Sheath. 4DNX-XXX-BXD(the number of fibers (XXX) will be a minmum of 12 and shall be specified on thedrawings).

2.08 OPTICAL FIBER TERMINATIONS

A. All optical fiber cable installed shall be terminated with a split-ferrulealignment sleeve and a precision ceramic tip. All optical fiber connectorsshall meet the following technical specifications:

Connector Type: STFiber Outside Diameter: 125 microns Nominal

Loss Repeat: < 0.2 dB per 100 reconnectsAxial Load Minimum: 35 PoundsTemperature Stability: +0.1 dB Maximum from-20 to +60 F

B. Furnish Lucent Technologies Inc./AT&T.

2.09 OPTICAL FIBER PATCH CORDS

A. Contractor shall provide optical fiber patch cords. The optical fiberpatch cords shall be LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T FL2E-E, and shall meet thefollowing technical specifications:

Number of fibers: 2Approximate loss: 0.4 dB/mated connectorMinimum bandwidth: 160 MHz-km @ 850 nm500 MHz-km @ 1300 nm

2.10 CONNECTING BLOCKS

A. All UTP copper cable shall be terminated on miniature, highdensity,modular LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T 110 connecting blocks.


B. All optical fiber cable in all Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) roomsshall be terminated in LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T LST1U-72 terminationshelves.

C. All optical fiber cable in the Building Distribution Frame (BDF) roomshall be terminated in an LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T LGS LDS Lightguide CrossConnect Frame utilizing LST1A-72 termination shelves and associated equipment.

D. All optical fiber cable connecting the BDF (in the new facility) to one ofsix (6) Fiber Hub Rooms (designated by the University) shall be terminated inLUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T LST1U-72 termination shelves at both ends.

2.11 INTRABUILDING COAXIAL CABLE

A. All intrabuilding coaxial cable in the new facility supporting videocommunications requirements shall be RG-11/U Belden 89292, and shall meet thefollowing technical specifications:

Gauge: 14 AWG solid bare copper covered, .064 inOutside Diameter: 0.348 in (8.84 mm)Shields: Duofoil + 61% tinned copper braidInsulation: Black tint Teflon jacketNominal DC Resistance: 2.5 Ohms/1000 ftNominal Mutual Capacitance: 16.5 pF/ft @ 1 kHzAttenuation: .15 dB/100 ft @ 1 MHzCharacteristic Impedance: 75 Ohms @ 1 MHz

2.12 INTERBUILDING COAXIAL CABLE

A. All interbuilding coaxial cable in the new facility supporting videocommunications requirements shall be P-3-75-500JCASS, and shall meet thefollowing technical specifications:

Gauge: 0.111 in. (2.82 mm) nom.Outside Diameter: 0.560 in. (14.22 mm) nom. Outer jacket ofmedium density polyethylene, solid aluminum sheath and Migra- Healcompound between jacket and sheathNominal DC Resistance: 0.37 Ohms/1000 ftAttenuation: 0.66 dB/100 ft @ 83 MHzCharacteristic Impedance: 75 Ohms @ 1 MHz


2.13 VIDEO SYSTEM PARTS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Contractor shall install self-terminating video outlets with a built-in 75Ohm resistor and a connector actuated switch that automatically terminates theline when a push-on cable connector is removed.

B. Coaxial cable equipment: The Contractor shall furnish and install thefollowing equipment or University approved equivalent:

Line extender: CCOR LAN-100-2rv

Pads (attenuators) for CCOR LAN-100-2rx:PB-0 PB-12PB-3 PB-15PB-6 PB-18PB-9 PB-21

Pads for Line Extender:Forward dbmv of cable @ 450 MHzEq-450-3 2.5Eq-450-5 6.2Eq-450-8 9.9Eq-450-11 13.8Eq-450-13 17.3Eq-450-15 20.9

Splitters and Directional Couplers:

Insertion LossType Tap Value @ 450 MHzJerrold SSP-3 4.4Jerrold SSP-636 7.9, 7.9 4.4

Jerrold SSP-7 7.8 2.5Jerrold SSP-9 10.0 1.8Jerrold SSP-12 12.8 1.5Jerrold SSP-16 16.3 1.2

Full Feature Taps:Insertion LossType Tap Value @ 450 MHzJerrold FFT8-14 14.2 4.3

Jerrold FFT8-17 17.8 1.8Jerrold FFT8-20 20.0 1.2Jerrold FFT8-23 22.5 1.0Jerrold FFT8-26 26.1 0.8Jerrold FFT8-29 29.2 0.6


Connectors and Other Accessories:Gilbert Parts:Pin Connector: GRS-500-CH-DU-03Power Blocking Ks-F: GF-625-CH-DCBChassis-Chassis Connnector: G-KS-KS-MRight Angle Connector: GP-90-SSplice Connector: GRS-500-SP-DU-03Teflon RG-11 Connector: GF-11-300p-388F-type terminators: GTR-59-s

D-Rings for Mounting Equipment:

Type Inside Dimension Outside DimensionGraybar GB 13a 1-7/8" 4-7/8"Graybar GB 13b 3-1/8" 6-1/8"

Crimping Tool:Teflon RG-11 Crimper: HCT-775

Testing Equipment:RF Signal Strength Meter: Wavetek SAM III or approved equal must be used fortesting.

2.14 OUTLET BOXES

A. All outlet boxes supporting voice/data communications requirements shallbe double-gang, four (4) inch square, three (3) inch deep minimum galvanizedsteel boxes with single gang raised tie covers.

B. All outlet boxes supporting video communications requirements shall besingle gang, four (4) inch deep minimum galvanized steel boxes.

2.15 VOICE/DATA JACKS AND COVER PLATES

A. The jack assembly to support voice/data communications requirements shallbe a modular, eight (8) position, eight (8) conductor (8P8C) Category 5performance-rated, LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T M100-series information outlet.Each work area information outlet shall be separately colored for visualidentification. Inital installations shall utilize Electrical Ivory for thefirst (voice) faceplate position and Orange for the second (data) position.Subsequent UTP installations shall utilize black and/or other colors aviablethrough LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T.


B. The "pin-out" wiring assignment for the 4-pair UTP copper cable for bothvoice and data communications from the telecommunications outlet to the IDFshall be consistent with the EIA/TIA-568B Commercial Building TelecommunicationsWiring Standard.

C. All outlet plates shall be Multi-media type LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&TM50 Series. This outlet plate shall support two (2) 8P8C modular jacks and one(1) FDDI-type connector. Face plates shall have University approved engravedmarkings (words or symbols) to uniquely designate data and voice jacks asdescribes in Part 3.19 of this section.

2.16 DUCTBANK INNERLINERS

A. Three (3) innerliners are required for each section. Contractor shallfurnish Pi-Mar PVC conduit manufactured by Pyramid Industries Inc. Theinnerliner shall conform to the following University color code indicating typeof media routed in the innerliner:

MEDIA INNERLINER COLOR SIZEFiber Orange 1"Copper Black 1.5"Coaxial Yellow 1.5"

2.17 CABLE LUBRICANT

A. Cable pulling lubricant, Ideal Yellow 77 or a University approved equal,shall be utilized when pulling all cable.

2.18 CASES AND SPLICES

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all Building Entrance SpliceCases and shall be LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T type 2000 series closure andaccessories.

B. The Contractor shall furnish and install all outside plant (OSP) CableSplice Cases and shall be Preformed Line Products Stainless Steel with FillingFlange and must be filled with a University Approved re-enterable encapsulant.

C. The Contractor shall furnish and install a MDF (Patuxent Building) splicecase. Furnish Lucent Technologies Inc./AT&T Cable Rearrangement Facility tomatch existing.


2.19 FIRESTOPPING

A. Contractor shall provide firestopping protection that shall meet NFPA LifeSafety Code #101, 6-2.3.6, "Penetrations and Miscellaneous Openings and FireBarriers" and the NEC 300.21 "Fire Stopping" regulations and standards.

B. All vertical penetrations consisting of conduit, sleeves, or chases shallbe firestopped at the bottom of the penetration.

C. All horizontal penetrations consisting of conduit, sleeves of chases shallbe firestopped on both sides of the penetration.

D. Individual cable penetrations in plenum air return areas not enclosed inconduit shall be firestopped.

E. Openings made in concrete floors shall be firestopped using a testedsystem. Thickness or depth of firestop materials shall be as recommended by thematerial manufacturer and backed by formal ASTM E-814 tests.

F. Plenum air return ceiling penetrations for conduit and cables shall besealed with a system appropriate for the substrate and level of protectionrequired.

G. All metal conduits designed for communications with or without wire/cableinside shall be firestopped to restrict transfer of smoke.

2.20 ELEVATOR PHONE

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the following Elevator Phone.Installation shall be coordinated with the Elevator Contractor.

Manufacturer Description Stock No.Talk-A-Phone Co. Hands-free Phone EPT-100E5013 North Kedzie Ave. programmed to useChicago, IL 60625 campus circuit312-539-1100 assurance equipment

B. The location and height shall be ADA compliant and shall be approved bythe University prior to installation.


2.21 OUTDOOR EMERGENCY PHONE

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the following Emergency Phone.Installation shall be coordinated with the General Contractor.

1. Free Standing Emergency Phone

Manufacturer Description Stock No. Code Blue Corporation Vandal resistant Code Blue 1 40E. 64th Street security unit (CB1)

Holland, MI 49422-9322 with: speakerphone, 616-392-8296 keypad, and University of MD software, blue light, and strobe.

2. Wall Mounted Emergency Phone

Description Stock No. Vandal resistant Code Blue 2 Security unit (CB2) with: speakerphone, keypad, and University of MD Software, blue light, and strobe.

NOTE: Reference Section 2. PERT TELEPHONE INSTALLATION CRITERIA

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SYSTEM DESIGN

A. The cabling system to support voice, data, and video requirements has beendesigned in accordance with BICSI, EIA/TIA, NFPA, NEC, LUCENT TECHNOLOGIESINC./AT&T, IEEE, and FCC communications.

B. The proposed cabling system has been designed and shall be installed in amanner that provides mechanical integrity and symmetry for the cabling media andany associated frames and racks and which also furnishes ease of access andsuitability for future rearrangements and changes.

C. The transmission media shall be installed through a network of cabletrays, conduit, sleeves, and chases and interconnect the various rooms andfloors of the building.

D. Determination of Station Quantities - Quantity and placement of outletsshall be shown on the floor plans.16700 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS (11.15.96)

E. Wire Closet design requirements (IDF and BDF): On each floor with morethan 60 stations or 6000 net square feet, at least one "walk-in" type wirecloset of minimum 110 square feet per 10,000 net square feet of floor spaceshall be provided. Walk-in closets shall not have width or depth of less than8'-0". Floors with less than 60 stations or 6000 net square feet shall haveclosets measuring 7'-0" wide by 5'-0" deep minimum. Closets shall be "stacked"one above the other on each floor and shall be located so as to limit stationwiring runs to no more than 150' wire length. Riser penetrations and sleevesshall be located on the left side of the closet wall and shall be sized toaccommodate present wiring needs plus 100% spare capacity. All conduit sleevesshall be 4" galvanized intermediate metal conduit cut 2" above closet floor.All spare sleeves shall be capped. All closet penetrations shall have adequatefirestopping that meets all applicable codes. [Closet door shall be Universitystandard height double units 3'-0" each, opening outward and equipped with aUniversity standard lockset.] [Office grade HVAC (ambient temperature - 68-74

degrees F) shall be provided.] Contractor shall furnish and install a minimumof two (2), 20 ampere, 120 volt in each IDF and BDF.

F. Determination of Minimum Station Quantities:

1. General Office Space: one outlet per 70 net square feet.2. Faculty Office Space: one outlet per 70 net square feet.3. Computer Laboratory Space: one outlet per 40 net square feet. Videooutlet on front wall.4. Other Laboratory Space: one outlet per 140 net square feet. Video outleton front wall, voice/data on back wall.5. Classroom Space: one outlet centered on front and rear walls. Videooutlet on front wall.6. Lecture Hall: two outlets stage area, two outlets projection area.7. Conference Rooms: one video outlet located in the front of the room, andone voice/data outlet mounted next to each other.8. Service/Support Space: one outlet per 40 net square feet for counterservices areas and secretarial areas.9. Miscellaneous Space: one outlet each main mechancial and electricalrooms; courtesy/emergency phone outlet per 5000 NASF, one elevator phone perelevator, and pay telephone outlets in public spaces.


G. Station wiring for Emergency, Courtesy, and Pay Telephones shall be wiredwith one four pair. All other outlets shall be wired with two four pair and twounterminated strands of fiber. The fiber shall have 20" slack coiled in theoutlet box and at least 10'-0" neatly coiled at the IDF. See Section 2.02 forthe specifications for copper cable and fiber cable.

3.02 FORBIDDEN WORK

A. Other than the entrance splice, no cable splices shall be allowed withinbuildings.

B. Aerial cable construction shall not be permitted.

3.03 EXAMINATION

A. Contractor shall verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.

B. Contractor shall verify that field measurements are as shown on theConstruction Drawings approved by the University.

C. The beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF BACKBOARDS

A. All termination backboards in the BDF and IDFs shall be finish paintedwith durable white enamel under the provisions of Section 09900 prior toinstallation of any communications equipment.

B. All backboards shall be supported as specified under the provisions ofSection 16100.

C. All backboards shall be marked with the legend "COMM" under theprovisions of Section 16915.

3.05 CABLE PULLING

A. Contractor shall utilize cable pulling lubricant for all pulls in conduitducts or innerliners. Not less than three (3) gallons per kilometer shall beused.


3.06 COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES

A. Cable routing shall be designed and installed so that cabling andassociated equipment does not interfere with the operation or maintenance of anyother equipment. No wiring shall be hung, tied to, or supported from anythingother than telecommunications raceway or the building structure.

B. All cable in accessible spaces shall be designed and installed for easyaccess. Cable paths above suspended ceilings, mechanical rooms, closets, etc.shall not be blocked or covered in any way that would impede the addition ofcable in the future.

3.07 CONDUIT INSTALLATION

A. To support voice and data communications requirements, Contractor shallinstall one (1) inch conduit from the outlet box stubbed into the accessibleceiling. Contractor shall conform to the Conduit Installation Schedule inSection 16100 for selection of appropriate conduit type. All telecommunicationswiring shall be concealed in conduit or in the ceiling.

B. Conduit sleeves shall be four (4) inch trade size minimum. Sleeves shallbe Rigid Galvanized Steel for penetrations of concrete slabs, concrete walls,and CMU walls. Sleeves for penetrations of stud walls shall be EMT. Allsleeves shall be rigidly installed using appropriate fittings and all masonrypenetrations shall be grouted. Sleeves shall project a minimum of six (6) inchesbeyond wall or floor surface. All penetrations of fire rated construction shallbe firestopped with firestopping as specified in Part 2.16 of this Section toequal or exceed fire rating of the penetrated material. Sleeves for penetrationof walls and floors shall have one hundred percent (100%) spare capacity, andshall be firestopped as per code.

C. Any section of conduit containing two (2) 90-degree bends, a reverse bend,of having length greater than one hundred (100) feet shall have an accessiblepullbox. All conduits with less than a 50% fill ratio shall have a 3/32-inchpolyethylene pull cord appropriately secured at each end.

D. No oval or square conduit fittings shall be permitted. No screw typefittings shall be permitted.


E. All metallic conduit and raceways shall be appropriately grounded asspecified in the National Electric Code.

F. Supports and fasteners shall be used to hold all cables, conduits, andtrays firmly in place. Supports and fasteners shall be used such that theyprovide an adequate safety factor. All conduit/cable trays shall be supportedfrom the building structure and not from any other ductwork, pipes, ceilingtiles, or equipment.

G. Where cable trays or conduit are not provided (especially between thestubbed-out conduit and the nearest cable tray). Kindorf lay-in pipe hangers,or a University approved equal shall be installed. The lay-in pipe hanger shallbe attachable to a floor slab through the use of a pre-threaded lead insertwhich is suitable for installation of a 3/8-inch "all-thread" rod in a pre-drilled 1/2-inch hole. The threads of the closure bolt on the pipe hanger shallbe covered by 3/8-inch copper or aluminum tubing to protect the cabling sheaths.

H. Cables placed in hangers in the plenum ceiling area shall be routed highand away from all other electrical and mechanical systems so as to avoid contactwith light fixtures, ventilation ducts, sprinkler systems or plumbing piping,motors, or any other electrical devices. The cable shall not be run in parallelwith any high voltage electrical wiring. The maximum separation between supportpoints for all cabling shall be eight (8) feet. Lay-in pipe hangers shall beinstalled so as to accommodate these maximum distance spacings. Hangers shallbe installed at directional bend points so as to provide a maximum bend angle of45 degrees for the supported cabling.

I. Contractor shall install 3/16-inch polyethylene pulling string in eachempty conduit, and appropriately secured at each end.

3.08 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOMS

A. The communications equipment rooms supporting voice, data, and videorequirements are to be identified on the construction documents.


B. Prior to the installation of any equipment in any of the communicationsrooms, the Contractor shall provide room layouts, for University approval, foreach of the rooms listed above showing the proposed locations of all backboards,termination blocks, distribution panels, security boxes, control boxes, powersupplies, etc. required for all communications systems which are part if thisspecification.

3.09 STATION CABLING AND INSTALLATION

A. All voice, data, and video outlets shall be installed in the locationsthat are conspicuously marked in the building floor plans. If there is aquestion as to the location of any outlet, it shall be brought to the attentionof the University prior to installation.

B. All outlets supporting voice and data communications requirements shall bewired with two (2), 4-pair UTP copper cables (Two (2) LUCENT TECHNOLOGIESINC./AT&T XX61 as specified in Part 2.02 of this Section) as well as one (1)unterminated, 2-strand optical fiber cable (as specified in Part 2.06 of thisSection). The optical fiber cable shall have twenty (20) inches slack whichshall be coiled at the IDF. For applications where the outlet is designed "DATAONLY," the outlet shall be wired with one (1) LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T XX614-pair UTP copper cable and one (1), unterminated 2-strand optical fiber cable.

C. Voice or "A" jack: Always the top jack of the outlet designated toaccommodate one (1) digital voice station. Wire with one (1), 4-pair LUCENTTECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T XX61 UTP copper cable. The "A" jack pairs shall beterminated in the IDF on a row of the 100 block reserved for voice pairs,separate from the "B" jack pairs.

D. Data or "B" jack: Always the bottom jack of outlet designed toaccommodate one (1) digital data station. Wire with one (1), 4-pair LUCENTTECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T XX61 UTP copper cable. The "B" pairs shall beterminated in the IDF on a row of the 100 block reserved for data pairs,separate from the "A" jack pairs.

E. The terminations in the BDF and all IDFs of all cable pairs for the "A"jacks and the cable pairs for the "B" jacks shall be on termination fields. TheContractor shall not utilize patch cords.

F. All wiring supporting voice and data communications shall conform to IEEE802.3 10BASE-T and Category 5 wiring standards.


3.10 RISER CABLING AND INSTALLATION

A. In the BDF and all IDFs, connecting blocks shall be modular, high-density,LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T 110-type or a University approved equal, withclear protective covers. All telecommunication rooms shall be grounded by meansof a #6 AWG insulated copper ground wire connected to the building groundsystem. The BDF shall have three-element gas protector modules, LucentTechnologies Inc./AT&T 4B1-EW, surge protection with silicon avalanche sneakfuses adequate for protecting all circuits entering the building.

NOTE: All closet layouts shall be approved by the University before installationof any equipment or termination of any wiring.

B. Contractor shall install UTP vertical copper cabling between the BDF andeach IDF to support voice and data communications requirements. Each risercable shall be homerun from the BDF to each IDF in the conduit and sleevesprovided. In both the BDF and IDF, the cable pairs shall be terminated onLUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T 110 connecting blocks and appropriately cross-connected to the UTP horizontal copper cabling (in the IDF) and the UTP backbonecopper cabling (in the BDF). The size of the riser cables for both voice anddata communications from the BDF to each IDF shall be calculated using thefollowing formula:

# of outlets X 4 pairs X 120% = # of voice riser copper pairs.

# of outlets X 4 pairs X 120% = # of data riser copper pairs.

C. Riser Fiber Cabling: For IDFs servicing fewer than seventy-five (75)outlets, twelve (12) tested optical fibers terminated in the BDF fiber patchpanels shall be installed and to each of those IDFs servicing greater thanseventy-five (75) outlets, twenty-four (24) tested optical fibers terminated inthe BDF fiber patch panels shall be installed to each of those IDFs andterminated in the IDF. All optical fiber, terminations, and connections shallconform to the IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T specifications. The optical fiber cableprovided under this paragraph will support future station "C" jacks.

D. Riser Coaxial Cabling: A single RG-11 coaxial cable extending from theBDF to the top floor IDFs shall be installed and used as the riser for each IDFstack.


E. "Kellums"- type basket hangers, or a University approved equal, shall beinstalled on all riser cables to provide independent support of cables passingthrough conduit sleeves installed in floor slabs. Hangers shall have a maximumseparation of twelve (12) inches.

3.11 UNDERGROUND CABLING AND INSTALLATION

A. Contractor shall install UTP underground copper cabling between the BDF(of the new facility and the MDF (located in the Patuxent Building) to supportvoice and data communications requirements (as specified in Part 2.04 of thisSection). The underground cable shall run in the appropriate ductbank andmanholes. The Contractor shall furnish and install an LUCENT TECHNOLOGIESINC./AQT&T Cable Rearrangement Facility Splice case (CRF) to match existing andlocate the CRF in the location designated by the University. The Contractorshall terminate the underground cable in the cable vault of Building 010 in theLUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T Cable Rearrangement Facility (vertical splicecase). The Contractor shall extend pairs from the CRF into the frame room ofBuilding 010 and terminate pairs on Contractor provided 188B1 protector blocks(to be located on the frame in the location desigated by the University). TheContractor shall furnish and install new frame racks to support the protectorunits. The size of the copper underground cable shall be designated by the

University. The Contractor shall use the largest size of cable applicable, andit shall be approved by the University prior to purchasing.

B. Contractor shall install optical fiber backbone cabling between the BDF ofthe new facility and the MDF (located in 010, Patuxent Building) or theUniversity designated Fiber Hub to support data communication requirements (asspecified in Part 2.08 of this Section). The underground fiber shall run ininnerliner (as specified in Part 2.19A of this Section) in the appropriateductbank and manholes, as specified on the drawings, and terminated onContractor provided LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T Lightshelves. The size of thebackbone optical fiber cable shall be a minimum of twelve (12) strands and shallbe specified by the University.


C. Contractor shall install coaxial backbone cabling between the BDF of thenew facility and the MDF (located in the Patuxent Building) to support videocommunications requirements (as specified in Part 2.14 of this Section). Theunderground coaxial cable shall run in innerliner (as specified in Part 2.19A ofthis Section) in the appropriate ductbank and manholes. Cable in the manholeshall be secured to the manhole at least two (2) feet from the connection pointand every four (4) feet thereafter. The connector shall be covered with a one(1) foot section of shrink tube except where the connector is located inside thebuilding. Upon completion, the cable should show no sign of stretches, kinks,or compressions. If damage is apparent, new coaxial cable shall be pulled bythe Contractor.

3.12 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION

A. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, outlets shall be securely andneatly installed at the height specified in the following table:

Standard Telephone Outlets: 1ft-6 inches AboveFinished Floor (AFF)Wall Mounted Telephone Outlets: 4ft 6 inches AFFWall Mounted for Head OnWheelchair Access: 4ft-0 inches AFFService Counter Areas: 0ft-8 inches abovecounter work surface

3.13 DUCTBANK DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION, AND UTILIZATION

A. Contractor shall install XXXX pairs of multipair, UTP copper cable betweenthe BDF and the Patuxent Building, Building 010. Prior to the termination ofthis cable in the Patuxent Building, Contractor shall verify its terminationlocation with the University.

B. Contractor shall install a XXXX strand optical fiber cable (as specifiedin Part 2.04 of this Section) between the BDF (of the new facility) and thePatuxent Building. Prior to termination of this cable in the Patuxent Building,Contractor shall verify its termination location with the University.

C. Contractor shall install one (1) coaxial cable (as specified in Part 2.07Bof this Section) between the BDF and the Patuxent Building. Prior totermination of this cable in the Patuxent Building, Contractor shall verify itstermination location with the University.


D. Optical fiber and coaxial cable in the specified amounts above shall berun in one and one quarter (1 1/4) inch innerducts, and copper cable shall berun in 1-1/2" innerducts. Two (2) one and one-quarter (1 1/4) inch and one (1)one and one-half (1 1/2) inch innerducts shall be installed in at least one (1)duct of each ductbank. Ductbank shall be engineered to accommodate the requiredtwisted pair, fiber optic, and coaxial cable needs plus one hundred percent(100%) spare capacity.

E. All ductbank shall conform to the provisions of Section 16300 and shall bearranged in a rectangular fashion. Only four (4) inch PVC "type B" conduitshall be used for communication ducts. No section of ductbank shall have morethan a sum of 180 degrees of bends without the installation of a manhole.

F. Ductbanks shall have a minimum of thirty (30) inches cover overencasement. There shall be twenty-four (24) inch minimum clearance betweencommunications ductbank encasement and any other utilities.

Note: NO EXCEPTIONS WILL BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL OF THE UNIVERSITY

G. Concrete encased, galvanized intermediate weight rigid steel conduit shallbe used instead of PVC or polypropylene wherever ductbanks cross roads, parkinglots, or buried steam lines. Steel ducts shall extend ten (10) feet on eitherside of the crossing. At steam line crossings, encasement shall be covered withan aluminum reflector.

H. All spare ducts or those with less than twenty-five percent (25%) fillshall have a one-quarter (1/4) inch polypropylene pull wire appropriatelysecured at each end. All vacant innerducts or those with less than twenty-fivepercent (25%) fill shall have a 3/16- inch polypropylene pull wire appropriatelysecured at each end.

I. All ducts shall be pneumatically rodded using a University approved slugof one-quarter (1/4) inch diameter less than the duct inner diameter.

J. All ducts, including spares, shall be sealed watertight with an expandableurethane foam at both ends.


3.14 MANHOLES

A. Manholes shall have inside dimensions 6 feet wide x 12 feet 1 inch deep x7 feet high (6'-0"W x 12'-1"D x 7'0"H) minimum.

B. Manholes shall conform to the provisions of Section 16300. All steelequipment shall be hot dipped galvanized. All manholes shall have at least one(l), 7/8-inch diameter steel pulling eye in the wall opposite each ductentrance. Pulling eyes shall be welded to the reinforcing rods at the time ofmanhole fabrication. Each manhole shall be equipped with at minimum four (4)cable racks, two (2) per long side, that have adjustable hooks adequately sizedto support the hardware. Manhole covers shall have the designation ""COMM"" caston the cover.

C. New ductbank shall be appropriately doweled to existing manholes.

3.15 CONNECTION TO EXISTING SYSTEM

A. Splicing shall only be allowed in manholes or at building entrancelocations. No splices shall be allowed in any other location in the new facilityor in any ducts or innerliner. Splice cases in manholes shall be securelysupported by support hooks on the cable racks not more than two (2) feet awayfrom the splice case. Before closure, all splices shall be offered forinspection by the University and certification of workmanship by LUCENTTECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T.

B. Contractor shall make all cross-connections in each IDF to connect threepairs of each voice and data UTP horizontal copper cable to the facility copperriser system.

C. Contractor shall connect to University video network at the University'sdirection.

3.16 RE-ROUTING OF EXISTING UNDERGROUND CABLES

A. Contractor shall re-route any voice, data, and video cables that arecurrently located in the space where the new facility is to be constructed tonew or existing manholes. The re-routing and manhole locations areconspicuously identified on the site plan of the drawings.


B. Contractor shall notify the University at least two (2) weeks in advanceprior to any outage, re-routing any existing voice, data, and video cables.

C. Any cable that is re-routed must be re-terminated and tested according tothe termination and testing requirements as described in Part 3.19 of thisSection.

3.17 VIDEO SYSTEM INSTALLATION - BUILDING INTERIOR

A. The Contractor shall provide video system design with loss calculation forUniversity approval before the beginning of installation of any video systemcable or equipment.

B. Line extenders shall be mounted horizontally five (5) feet above finishedfloor using two (2) GB13b D-rings secured with eight (8), 1-3/16" screws. Atleast one (1) line extender must be provided for each IDF stack. Appropriatepads and equalizers shall be installed in the forward line extender section.Return line extenders pads and equalizers may be omitted.

C. The first line extender in each IDF stack shall be located in the firstfloor IDF's. Depending on sign level requirements and the size of the building,additional line extenders in the higher floor IDFs may be required.

D. All active and/or passive devices in an individual BDF or IDF shall beattached together using chassis to chassis or right angle connectors.

E. Multiport taps shall be mounted vertically to one (1) GB13a D-ring, with ahex bolt (1/4" wide x 3/4" long) and secured to plywood with four (4) 1-3/16"screws. This does not apply to multiports attached to line extenders.

F. The multiport tap, excluding those attached to line extenders shall faceeither left or right, but not outward into the BDF/IDF. All unused ports shallbe terminated.

G. An FFT8-29 multiport shall be the first device attached to the output sideof the line extender and is to be used to read the signal levels and measureforward tilt. F-Type right angle connectors may be used for multiport wiring.

H. Directional couplers and splitters shall only be used to connect the firstamplifiers in the BDF/IDF stacks.


I. All IDF/BDFs shall have at least one (l) multiport tap connected to theriser regardless if that IDF/BDF, services any outlets. At every IDF/BDF, aminimum of three (3) spare ports is required.

J. In each IDF, the RG-11 coaxial station cable shall be secured to theexisting plywood every two (2) feet with screw-type cable tie connectors.Station cable ends in the IDF/BDF shall clearly indicate the outlet and roomnumber of the station end in indelible ink written on plastic cable tags.

K. Connectors shall be chosen and installed so they can withstand thirty (30)pounds of pulling force without separating from the cable.

3.18 VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTING

A. Contractor shall adjust amplifier gain and make other system adjustmentsto achieve specified output levels at each outlet.

3.19 CABLE PLANT LABELING

A. All labeling shall be clear, securely affixed, and consistent on both endsof each installed cable. All labeling shall be approved in advance by theUniversity.

B. The labeling of outlet and IDF hardware shall be permanently engraved inthe field by the Contractor according to the following numbering system:

1. Each outlet identification code shall consist of five (5) characters.

2. The first character shall indicate the floor of the building where thecommunications room serving the outlet is located. The number 0 (zero) shall beused for the ground floor, 1 (one) for the first floor, etc. The letter B shallbe used for basements, S for sub-basements, and M, N, and P for mezzanines.

3. The second character shall be used for the communications room identifier.The letters A through Z (except I and O) shall be used and the University willspecify the character to be used for each communications room.


4. The last three (3), characters shall denote the number of the outlet.Outlet numbers 1 through 9 shall be preceded with (2) zeros (e.g 004). Outletnumbers 10 through 99 shall be preceded with one (1) zero (e.g. 054).

5. Example: An outlet labeled 1A006 means first floor, IDF "A", outletnumber 006.

C. The five (5) character code for each outlet shall be permanently marked onthe outlet, as well as on the corresponding IDF blocks. An outlet with an "A"and "B" outlet will have it's identification code appear on both cables at theoutlet, as well as in the IDF on both the voice termination field and the datatermination field.

D. All unterminated optical fiber horizontal cabling shall be labeled at eachend with the outlet number.

E. All coaxial cable shall be labeled with an outlet number consistent withthe closest voice/data communications outlet.

F. All UTP copper riser and underground cable termination blocks shall belabeled with white 110 label strips and shall indicate pair count anddestination closet. Voice and data riser shall be labeled separately.

G. Underground cable protector units shall be labeled with green 110 labelstrips reflecting cable pair count and cable number. Underground cable in

manholes shall be labeled with engraved brass tag showing cable number whereentering and exiting manhole.

H. All optical fiber riser and underground cable termination panels shall belabeled with fiber strand count and destination closet. The underground frameshall be labeled with the fiber strand count, fiber number, and fiber optic hubbuilding number. Underground cable in manholes shall be labeled with engravedbrass tag showing cable number where entering and existing manhole.

I. All underground coaxial cable shall be labeled on each end with brass tagmarked with the building number and designated as a coaxial feed cable.


3.20 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE

A. Prior to acceptance, all "As-Built" and technical documentation shall bereceived and approved by the University. As-built documentation shall includethe completed and notarized original copy of the LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&TSystimax Premises Distribution System Registration Document. All intrabuildingand interbuilding wiring and equipment, and all site restoration shall beinstalled and completed in accordance with University and industry standards.All wiring and equipment provided and/or installed under this Contract shall betested as described under the terms of this Contract and shall be fullyoperational. After all work is complete, the Contractor shall also provide theUniversity with LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T Systimax Certification for allcommunications work completed on the project and AT&T Distribution Technologiescertification for all outside plant splices.

B. All copper cable plant testing shall diagnose, at a minimum, the presenceof all open-loop conductors, noisy lines and distortion, low-loop current, high-loop current, ringer failures, grounded, shorted or crossed conductors, dB loss,and split connections. Contractor shall perform a continuity test on all pairsinstalled in the cable plant, both inside and outside the new facility. Thetesting shall cover end-to-end, from the outlet to the IDF and the BDF to thePatuxent Building. In addition, all tests described above shall be performed ona randomly selected pair per twenty-five (25) pair binder group of the copperriser cable. If this random selection is bad, additional testing shall be doneto ensure that ninety-nine percent (99%) good pairs exist. The Contractor shallsupply complete testing and correction reports to the University for reviewprior to acceptance of the system. The Contractor shall perform such additionaltesting as required to verify that pairs meet the transmission parametersrequired for 10BASE-T and Category 5 wiring specifications. The Universityshall have final approval on the format used for recording and reporting of testresults prior to the start of testing activities.


C. Horizontal Cable Testing

All station cabling shall be tested to verify proper installation andtermination. The following test shall be performed using a TIA/EIA TSB-67compliant tester.

* Continuity or wire map testing, consisting of:

- Open/short testing- Polarity testing- Pair transposition testing

* Signal attenuation test.* Near-end crosstalk (NEXT).* DC loop resistance test.* Noise test.* Time domain reflectometer (TDR) measurement and other troubleshootingtests.

D. Optical fiber cable testing shall, at a minimum, quantify the attenuationrange, optical loss, bandwidth, and misalignment. The cable completion testsshall be performed after all optical fiber cable has been placed and allsplicing completed. The Contractor shall terminate ten percent (10%) of allinstalled station fibers for testing purposes. The University will designatewhich fibers shall be terminated after all cables and wires have been pulledinto place. All optical fibers shall be tested at both 850nm and 1300nm. Forfibers terminated between the BDF and the Patuxent Building, testing shallinclude two-way testing using an Optical Time Domain Reflector (OTDR), and one-way testing using a Multimode Optical Loss Test Set (MOLTS). For optical fiberinstallation between the BDF and an IDF, the Contractor shall provide two-wayloss testing through the use of MOLTS. Two-way MOLTS testing shall also beperformed on station fiber terminated for testing purposes. All traces andresults shall be provided to the University for approval. Protective coversshall be in place on all connectors when they are not in use to protect againstcontamination by dirt or dust. Any fiber found to be defective as a result ofinstallation, physical inspection, or operational test shall be replaced at theContractor's expense.


D. Coaxial cable and video signal testing shall be performed in the followingmanner to verify correct installation of coaxial cable and video systemelectronics:

Input Signal @ 450 MHz Output Output@ch. 7(after pad & equalizer) @450 MHz (175.2 MHz)

9 dbmv (± 1 dbmv) 43 dbmv 40 dbmv

FFT8s Located in IDFs:15 dbmv at 450 MHz at the output of all eight (8) ports of all FFT8s located inthe new facility.

3.21 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION

A. The Contractor shall provide the following outside plant wiringinformation, prior to acceptance of the building by the University, for each ofthe specified media:

1. Cable identification number (Copper, Fiber, and Coax).2. Cable design makeup (Copper, Fiber, and Coax).3. Cable lengths between splice points, terminations amplifiers, or lineextenders (Copper, Fiber, and Coax)4. Exact routing of cable (Copper, Fiber, and Coax).5. Splice location and identification (Copper, Fiber, and Coax).6. Strand count, mode of installed fiber, loss per splice in dB, and totalamount of optical fibers installed (Fiber).7. Frequency rating, location, and identification of amplifiers and splitters(Coax).8. Bonding and grounding (Copper, Fiber, and Coax).9. Location and description of all associated equipment (Copper, Fiber, andCoax).10. Location and description of all associated structures and obstructions(Copper, Fiber, and Coax).11. Signal level readings at all line extenders, FFT8s, and all video outletsusing frequencies 175.2 MHz (CH. 7) and 450 MHz.

B. The Contractor shall provide the following intrabuilding wiringinformation on floppy disk, as well as, hard copy for each specified media priorto acceptance of the building by the University:

1. Cable entrance locations and penetration details (Copper, Fiber, andCoax).


2. Location and identification of all distribution closets (IDF's and BDF)and of all equipment located inside distribution closets (Copper, Fiber, andCoax).3. Terminal information, outlet numbering, and pair count information at eachdistribution frame (Copper).4. Schematic drawings of riser (Copper, Fiber, and Coax).5. Routing of cable and termination information (Copper, Fiber, and Coax).

C. The Contractor shall provide the following MDF wiring information prior toacceptance of the building by the University:

1. Cable pair assignments per connector block.2. Identification of cable routing to MDF.

D. The Contractor shall provide a complete listing of pair assignment recordsfor copper wiring, optical fiber cabling, and coaxial cabling. Copper cablerecords shall include the status of each copper pair. Optical fiber cablerecords shall include strand allocation, test results, and identification ofmedia and protocol used.

E. The Contractor shall provide the University with the operational andmaintenance documentation of all telecommunications equipment installed underthe contract.

F. As-Built drawings shall include actual locations of installed ductbank andmanholes, including elevations, and shall indicate location, elevation, and typeof service for all utilities crossed by the new ductbank.

G. Contractor shall submit all drawings on 3.5-inch floppy diskettesutilizing AutoCAD 12.

H. As-built documentation shall include the completed and notarized originalcopy of the LUCET TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T Systimax Premises Distribtuion SystemRegistration Document. The Contractor shall also provide the University withLUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T Systimex Certification for all communications workcompleted on the project and LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T DistributionTechnologies certification for all outside plant splices.

END

16. UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SOURCE UPS - BATTERY SYSTEMS

UPS systems shall be designed on a project-by-project basis.

END16. UTILITY METERING (11.15.96)

A. All utilities serving a building shall be metered.

B. Temporary utility meters are required during construction and shall beincluded in the specifications.

C. Water, electric, and steam utilities shall be remotely metered.

D. Water meters shall incorporate flange meters at all locations. For 2"meters or smaller, rotating disk type shall be used. For 2 1/2" or greater,turbine type shall be used. Pulse weighing shall be not less than 1 closure/100gallon on 2" or smaller and 1 closure/1000 gallons on 2 1/2" or greater. ATrican "S" head shall provide dry contact operation for DPP use.

E. All sub-metering opportunities will be identified. When sub-metering isappropriate, the specified meter and installation shall be inspected andcertified by the appropriate governing agency.

F. Steam utility shall be metered via turbine type condensate meters. Pulseoutput shall be made available via dry contacts for CCMS use.

G. Condensate shall exit to a condensate return system. Condensate shall notbe discharged to sanitary sewer.

H. All service conductors entering a building shall be metered. Allelectrical metering at service entry shall utilize campus standard Time of Useelectronic registration with remote communication via Sangamo's ST-MT100register (or its current replacement), T3000 meter interface unit (or currentproduction model), induction disk meter body, and polycarbonate cover withOptocom port.

I. Where building service provides power to computer systems requiring threephase, uninterruptable power supply, the electrical load shall have electricalmonitoring for on-line alarming and documentation. The hardware used shallconform to existing campus locations and the software used to interrogate theseinstallations.

J. Service entry locations and critical load distribution locations shall beserved by a standard telephone service. This service shall be a hard wirebridge to an analog service existing in the building. If an analog courtesyphone is applied anywhere in the building a bridge shall be provided via a jackat the BDF. One analog bridge will be required per meter interface unit, MIU,(T3000). If no line exists a separate line should be provided to serve the MIU.

END

16. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (VFD) REQUIREMENTS

A. Control Frequency Drives shall be manufactured by a single contractorutilizing a sine coded pulse width modulated invertor control. The variablespeed drive units applied to various HVAC systems shall be provided with designsutilizing the following basic criteria/specifications:

1. Converter shall consist of a modular assembly consisting of a dioderectifier and capacitor assembly which will first convert, then filter andmaintain a fixed DC voltage source from the fixed voltage and frequency input.

2. Invertor shall be Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT) with a minimumrating of 1000 VDC on 460 VAC controls to invert the converter fixed DC voltageinto a sine-coded pulse with modulated output.

3. Control Logic to consist of a single printed circuit board for allhorsepower sizes and incorporates an 8 bit, or larger, microcomputer centralprocessing unit to control all invertor, converter, base drive, and externalinterface functions.

B. The VFD unit shall allow application onto systems whichemploy any NEMA-Binduction squirrel cage motor.

C. The selected VFDs shall provide user friendly diagnostics clearlydisplayed at a front display.

D. The following identifies the minimum features to be noted in a design:

1. Standard line input voltage 460 VAC.

2. Shall not induce voltage line notching into the utility line.

3. The VFD units shall be controlled automatically a 4-20 mA control signal.

4. The VFD shall be UL approved.

5. The VFD shall be designed to meet power line transient conditionsdefined within IEEE-587.

6. The VFD shall comply with 1990 NEC.

16. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (VFD) REQUIREMENTS

7. The VFD shall contain the following general features:

a. Automatic restart after power outage and fault occurrences of overcurrent or over voltage.b. Control follower circuit board to utilize 4-20 mA control signal.c. Electronic overload protection.d. Hand/Off/Auto operator switch.e. Instantaneous electronic trip when 180% FLA sensed, phase to phase outputshort or phase to ground output short circuit occurs.f. Interface for time clock control.g. Line circuit breaker.h. Manual bypass (door interlocked) for fixed 60 Hz operation in emergency.i. Manual speed potentiometer.j. Minimum/Maximum adjustable speeds.k. Over-temperature protection.l. Panel mounted display of status, frequency, service diagnostics.m. Run/Stop command switch.n. Shall provide for 100% current limit.o. Thermal overload relay.p. Timed acceleration and deceleration for soft starting and stopping.

END

17. CENTRAL CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEM (CCMS) (7.15.97)

The Department of Physical Plant (DPP) at the University of Maryland CollegePark operates a Campus-wide Central Control & Monitoring System (CCMS).Installation of a system that interfaces with the central equipment located inthe Service Building (003) on the College Park campus of the University ofMaryland are required. The CCMS system must be an extension of the campussystem and not an independent system. This system is used to override localbuilding control systems, but does not replace them. Therefore, a completelocal (stand alone) system must be provided and integrated with the CCMS.Connection to the College Park CCMS can be achieved via modem and phone lines.

The scope of the CCMS design shall incorporate the operating characteristics forthe proposed facility with regard to the capabilities of the existing CCMS,resulting in an optimally designed CCMS in terms of effectiveness and cost. Theguiding principles for this design are to provide metering (and submetering bycampus department as feasible) for all utilities; to provide remote start/stopand reset for all HVAC systems and other major equipment; to monitor energy-using systems for actual loads and conditions and all systems for alarm statusand critical malfunctions. The desired CCMS shall provide surveillance andoptimal operation of the HVAC and other systems and provide metering informationas to actual utility usage.

CCMS is a microprocessor based, Environmental Management and Control System(EMCS) which uses a distributed processing architecture to achieve a high degreeof system efficiency and reliability. It is an extension of the owner-providedStaefa Control System (SCS) Phoenix/System II model CCMS system.

Systems' requirements include:

A. The system design and architecture shall be compatible with the existingCCMS campus system. The system shall be designed and the equipment shall beselected to achieve the highest possible system wide reliability,serviceability, maintainability, and provide flexibility to meet both currentsequences of operation and any anticipated future needs. Specific directions ofapproach are presently being developed.

B. A digital communication line connection shall be made between the existingowner-provided CCMS and the CCMS extension within a facility.

17. CENTRAL CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEM (CCMS) (7.15.97)

C. Supervisory remote control and monitoring of the system is accomplishedthrough the CCMS unit which has an intelligent, stand-alone capability. TheEMS/CCMS system will digitally communicate with stand-alone microprocessor-basedDDC controllers installed in controlpanels associated with each mechanicalsystem including the air handling units and the chilled and heating hot watersystems. The CCMS will also communicate with stand-alone microprocessor-basedcontrollers installed at each peripheral or terminal mounted equipment affectinga building's environment.

D. Control of equipment will be direct digital control DDC with electric andelectronic actuation. Power actuation for isolation valves, two position indesign, shall use pneumatic pressure (30 psig).

The DPP shall be contacted in order to obtain the present capabilities of theCCMS and to provide the University with a plan for the energy efficientoperation of the HVAC systems. This plan shall be coordinated with the lifecycle costing and HVAC load analysis in the Energy and Energy Analysis sectionto produce the most energy efficient facility design. It shall also delineatethe scope of control between local controls, CCMS override control and fail-safearrangements by HVAC systems.

Provisions shall be made for the complete system installation, including:

A. All sensors, contacts, equipment, and system interfaces and meteringpoints.

B. All electrical and mechanical interface to the building systems andequipment.

C. All electrical and mechanical system components required by the CCMS.

D. Interfacing the new building CCMS to the existing CCMS central equipment.This includes all necessary alterations to the central processing units andtheir software routines located in the Service Building (003) on the UMCPCampus.

E. Extension of underground duct bank and communication cables from theexisting CCMS to the proposed facility.

END18. BUILDING COMMISSIONING (7.15.97)

The Department of Engineering, Architecture, & Construction (DAEC) inconjunction with the Department of Physical Plant is evaluating both the processand procedures to conduct Building Commissioning as well as the method forcontracting for these services. Until this effort has been completed andapproved by the UMCP, DAEC will identify the applicable scope of services.

2

2

2